Volume 3

Academic Progress for every Student
Regular tests &

assignments
VEDANTU
IMPROVEMENT Report card with
PROMISE detailed analysis
VIP
Parent-teacher
meetings
Our Extraordinary Results 2021

Our Students
5.2X
HIGHER
Our Students
Our Students
3.8X
6.6X
HIGHER
All India HIGHER

All India All India
37.28% 37.28% 8.25%

9.84% 9.84% 1.25%
CBSE 10 CBSE 12 JEE

student scoring above 90% student scoring above 90% Advanced
SCAN CODE
to know more
about VIP
Published by
Vedantu Innovations Pvt. Ltd.
D. No. 1081, 3rd Floor, Vistar Arcade,
14th Main Rd, Sector 3, HSR Layout
Bangalore, Karnataka, India 560 102
www.vedantu.com
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information
storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publishers.
Notice: Vedantu is committed to serving students with the best resources and knowledge.
Bearing that in mind, we have obtained all the information in this book from sources regarded
as reliable, and taken utmost care in editing and printing this book. However, as authors and
publishers, we are not to be held responsible for unintentional mistakes that might have crept
in. Having stated that, errors (if any) brought to our notice shall be gratefully acknowledged
and rectified in upcoming editions.
Printed by
Softberry Technology Pvt. Ltd
2nd Floor, above PNB, Scheme No 140
Indore, Madhya Pradesh - 452016
https://www.softberry.in
How to use your
Tatva Practice Book
1
8. Quantization of charge
When a physical quantity can
have only discrete values rather
than any value, the quantity is
said to be quantised. The
smallest charge that can exist in Scan the QR Code in each
nature is the charge of an chapter’s theory section to
electron.
view micro concept videos
related to the chapter, on
SCAN CODE the Vedantu app.
Electrostatics
Exercise - 2:
2
Solve all types of
1. The rate constant for a first
order reaction is 4.606 ×
10–3s–1. The time required to
reduce 2.0g of the reactant to
0.2g is:
exercise questions (JEE 2020)
based on the latest JEE
pattern. (a) 500s (b) 1000s
(c) 100s (d) 200s
Answer Key
3
CHAPTER-1: ELECTROSTATICS
For extra exam
Exercise-1: Basic Objective preparation content,
visit the Vedantu app.
Scan the QR code in the You can find previous
Answers Section to view years’ JEE papers with
detailed solutions for all solutions and detailed
exercise questions. analysis.
Founder’s Message
Dear Student,
I am delighted to present to you a Ready Reckoner and an amazing book to guide you for your
exams-‘TATVA’. Tatva—which means the ‘Core’ is fully aligned with the culture, the mission, and the
vision of Vedantu and therefore it gives me immense pleasure and joy to share this book with you. We
at Vedantu have always believed in revolutionizing the teaching and learning process and always
speedily progressed in the direction of bringing superior quality education and content to your table.
Tatva is a step forward in this direction. This book is your guide, your practice guru, and your
companion in moving towards your dreams. The book is a result of the consistent effort, diligence, and
research by our experienced team of subject experts and teachers.
This book has been customized with curated content to suit the needs of JEE aspirants like you and
guide you on the right path to cracking JEE and optimizing your efficiency. Tatva is a comprehensive
amalgamation of important concepts, theories, derivations, definitions, solved examples, concept
videos, practice questions, and important questions. We have ensured that high-quality content and
the right ingredients are in place in this booklet to help you climb up the success ladder.
A few guiding points to optimally use Tatva with a planned approach:
Tatva equips you with Theory, Concept Videos, and Solved examples to help you revise concepts,
mark your notes, walk you through the entire summary, and eventually makes you capable of
clearing all your conceptual doubts all by yourself.
We suggest revision of theory followed by practice of solved examples.
Practice relevant questions daily after finishing Vedantu lectures and session assignments. We
believe that a daily dose of Tatva will keep all your exam blues at bay.
Use the Tatva booklet to mark notes so that it always comes in handy for last-minute revision
sessions before your exams. Notes should include key points of theory, solved examples, and some
questions which you couldn't solve in the first attempt.
Exercise 1 and Exercise 2 of JEE Tatva deal with basic questions and those which can be asked or
already asked in JEE Main. Similarly, Exercise 3 and Exercise 4 deal with JEE Advanced level
questions. We recommend you solve basic JEE Main questions before moving to JEE Advanced
level questions.
Before wrapping up, the practice mantra: “Don't practice until you get it right. Practice until you
can't get it wrong.”
We strongly believe in you and your capabilities. So believe in yourself

because success is only one step away. Wishing that your talent shines
bright. All the very best!
Anand Prakash
Founder and Academic Head, Vedantu
Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing Top Ranks in JEE/NEET
and Olympiads. He has personally taught and mentored AIR 1, 6, 7 (JEE
Advanced), AIR-1, 7, 9(AIIMS), and thousands of more students who have
successfully cleared these competitive exams in the last few years.
Credits
“Happiness lies in the joy of achievement
and the thrill of creative effort.”
—Franklin D. Roosevelt
Tatva is the brainchild of a group of creative Vedans who have strived tirelessly to weave success stories for you.
We extend our heartfelt gratitude to the superb team of Vedans who give wings to the vision of Vedantu,
starting with our leaders who have been guiding and encouraging us at every step of the way:
Vamsi Krishna Sir, Anand Prakash Sir and Pulkit Jain Sir
We thank our leaders for their insight and mentorship. They steered the project in the right direction and were
instrumental in making Tatva a reality:
Sahil Bhatia, Sudhanshu Jain, Shubam Gupta, Ajay Mittal, Arshad Shahid, Jaideep Sontakke
The managers who embodied every aspect of what Tatva aimed to accomplish and brought their ideas and
diligence to the table to execute this vision immaculately:
Harish Rao, Neha Surana, Charubak Chakrabarti, Prashant Palande
Physics Team
We truly appreciate all the Master Teachers of Vedantu whose relentless efforts helped us translate this vision
into reality. Our heartfelt gratitude to our creative content developers and the typesetting team, who have put
in their hard work, insight, and eagerness to nurture and execute Tatva into ‘your ready handbook’ and bring a
positive learning experience to you.
Teachers Subject Matter Experts
Shreyas Hebbare Gagandeep Singh Atul Singh (Team Lead)
Anmol Gupta Md Fazlur Rehman
Typesetting Team Graphic Designers

Nitesh Kumar Santhosh Mani Vishwanath G
We cannot thank the creative team enough. Their creative minds and contagious energy have added a visual
flair, truly making Tatva the treasure trove of knowledge that it is.
Kajal Nilanjan Chowdhury Rabin Jacob Mohit Kamboj
Kiran Gopal Balaji Sakamuri Thamam Mubarish Haritha Ranchith
Sarib Mohammad
We thank and appreciate the enthusiastic support provided by Arunima Kar, Savin Khandelwal, and Dipshi
Shetty.
The journey of bringing Tatva to life, from an idea to the book you are holding, would not have been possible
without the extensive support of our diligent Operations Team, our amazing Academic Team, our dedicated
team of Teachers, and our talented Tech Team.
6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 08
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 18
Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 23
Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 28
Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 31
Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 35
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 193
FLUID MECHANICS
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 37
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 51
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 195

7
SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 93
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 101
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 198
WAVES
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 140
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 160
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 200

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS 8
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
Chapter 10
1. ELASTIC BEHAVIOUR OF SOLIDS 1.2 Important Points on Elastic Behaviour of Solids

1.1 Introduction
 An elastic body is one that regains its original shape
 What happens to a rubber band when you stretch it
and size when deforming forces are removed
and let go?
 A plastic body is one that succumbs to deforming forces
 It deforms but regains its original form when you stop
applying a force. (however small) and cannot return to its original shape
and size
 But say, you take an aluminium rod and try to bend it
using your arm strength. You somehow do manage to  Elasticity is the property of a body to regain its original
bend it a little and then stop applying force. Does the shape and size when deforming forces are removed. It
rod regain its original shape? Of course not. exhibits an opposition to change.
1.3 Rigid body
A body whose size and shape cannot be changed however
large the applied force may be known as a rigid body.
1.4 Deforming Force and Restoring Force
 Deforming force is the external force applied to a body

which tends to change the size or shape of the body.
 Under the action of deforming force, a body opposes
any change in its shape and size due to the net effect of
internal (molecular) forces. The resulting force which
opposes the deformation is known as restoring force.
Fig. 10.1
 This difference in the behaviour of the material is based 2. STRESS AND STRAIN
on their elastic and plastic nature.
2.1 Stress
 Looking at the elasticity in the atomic level, solids are
Stress is defined as deforming force per unit area within
made of atoms (or molecules). They are surrounded by
materials that arise from externally applied forces, uneven
other such atoms which are held in a state of equilibrium heating, or permanent deformation and that permits an
by interatomic forces. accurate description and prediction of elastic, plastic, and
 When an external force is applied these particles are fluid behaviour.
displaced, resulting in the deformation of the solid. Stress is given by the following formula:
 When the application of the deforming force is stopped,
interatomic forces drive the atoms to regain their state F

of equilibrium. A
where,  is the stess applied, F is the deforming force
 The concept of elasticity is an idealization as no material
applied and A is the area of cross section of the force
is perfectly elastic. For example, if you use a hair tie to
applied.
groom yourself, you may have noticed that its size tends
to deform after prolonged use. After a point, it may The unit of stress is N/m2
snap as well. This is because the hair tie eventually
loses its elastic nature.
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
2.2 Types of Stress 2.4 Types of Strain

Tensile Stress Strain experienced by a body can be of two types depending
on stress application as follows:
 Tensile stress is the force applied per unit area,
increasing the length of body (or area). Tensile Strain
 Objects under tensile stress become thinner and longer.  Tensile strain is the change in length (or area) of a
body due to the application of tensile stress.
Compressive Stress
Compressive Strain
 Compressive stress is the force applied per unit area,
which decreases the length (or area) of a body.  Compressive Strain is the change in length (or area)
of a body due to the application of compressive
 The object under compressive stress becomes thicker strain.
and shorter.
Shear Strain or Tangential Strain
Shear Stress or Tangential Stress
 Tangential strain is Ratio of relative displacement to
 Shear stress, often denoted by T, is the component its original distance in short the applied force
of stress coplanar with a material cross section. It tangentially is itself the tangential stress and the
arises from the shear force, the component of force effect seen is the tangential strain.
vector parallel to the material cross section.
2.5 Hooke’s Law
2.3 Strain
 Strain is the amount of deformation experienced by the If the deforming forces are within a limit (known as elastic
body in the direction of force applied, divided by the limit), the stress created in the body is proportional to the
initial dimensions of the body. resulting strain.
 The following equation gives the relation for i.e. stress  strain.
deformation in terms of the length of a solid:
l stress
 The ratio is known as Modulus of Elasticity.
L strain
where,  is the strain due to stress applied, l is the
change in length and L is the original length of the  According to various types of stresses, we have
material. corresponding modulii of elasticity.
 The strain is a dimensionless quantity as it just defines  Unit of modulus of elasticity is same as the unit of
the relative change in shape. stress
3. MODULI OF ELASTICITY
3.1 Stress, Strain and Various Elastic Moduli
Type of stress Stress Strain Elastic Name of State of

modulus modulus Mater
FL
Longitudinal (Tensile or compressive) Two equal and opposite Elongation or Y Young’s Solid
AL
forces perpendicular to compression modulus
opposite faces (L/L)
= F/A)
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
Type of stress Stress Strain Elastic Name of State of

modulus modulus Mater
x FL
Shearing Two equal and opposite tan   G Shear modulus Solid
L A.x
forces parallel to
opposite surfaces
( = F/A)
 PV
Hydraulic/volume Forces perpendicular Volume change B Bulk modulus Solid, liquid
V
everywhere to the (V/V) and gas
surface, force per unit
area (pressure) same
everywhere.
3.2 Poisson’s Ratio

4. ELASTIC POTENTIAL ENERGY
When a rod or bar is subjected to a longitudinal stress,
then not only its length changes but its transverse
When an elastic body is deformed, work is done by the
dimensions also change and thus giving rise to transverse
applied force. This work is stored as elastic potential energy
or lateral strain in additional to longitudinal strain.
and is released when the body returns back to its original
shape or size.
We know elastic energy stored per unit volume
Fig. 10.2 1
= (stress) (strain)
2
b
Transverse or lateral strain is
b
1 2
= (modulus of elasticity) (strain)
The ratio of transverse to longitudinal strain is termed as 2
Poisson’s ratio, .
 stress 
2
b / b 1
 =
 /  2 modulus of elasticity
transverse strain
Since,    In case of a longitudinal stress (compressive or tensile)
longitudinal strain
Negative sign is introduced to make  a positive quantity.
Energy stored 1  Δ 
2
Since, an increase in length always results in a decrease in = Y 
transverse dimensions and vice-versa. volume 2   
Note:
1 YA 1
.  Δ  = F Δ
2
(1)  has no units, as its a ratio of similar quantities Total energy =
2  2
(2) 0    0.5
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
5. STRESS-STRAIN GRAPH (d) If the stress is increased further,
If by gradually increasing the load on a vertically suspended  A very small increase in stress produces a very large
metal wire, a graph is plotted between stress (or load) and increase in strain (region AB).
longitudinal strain (or elongation) we get the curve as shown
 After reaching point B, the strain increases even if the
in figure. From this curve it is clear that :
wire is unloaded and ruptures at C.
 In the region BC the wire literally flows. The maximum

stress corresponding to B after which the wire begins to
flow and breaks is called breaking or tensile strength.
 The region EABC represents the plastic behaviour of

the material of wire.
 Stress-strain curve for different materials.

Elastic Hysteresis :
The strain persists even when the stress is removed. This
lagging behind of strain is called elastic hysteresis. This
Fig. 10.3 is the reason why the values of strain for same stress are
(a) When the strain is small (< 2%) (i.e., in region OP) different while increasing the load and while decreasing the
load.
 Stress is proportional to strain.
 Hooke’s law is obeyed.
 The point P is called limit of proportionality.
 Slope of line OP gives the Young’s modulus of the
material of the wire. Y = tan .
Note:
Elastic limit. The maximum value of the stress within
which the body regains its original shape and size.
Fig. 10.4
(b) If the strain is increased a little bit (i.e., in the region PE)
Brittle material
 The stress is not proportional to strain.
The plastic region between E and C is small for brittle material
 The wire still regains its original length after the removal
and it will break soon after the elastic limit is crossed.
of stretching force.
 Point E is known as elastic limit or yield–point.
 The region OPE represents the elastic behaviour of the
material of wire.
 Yield point is the stress beyond which the material
becomes plastic.
(c) If the wire is stretched beyond the elastic limit E (i.e.,
between EA)
 The strain increases much more rapidly
 If the stretching force is removed the wire does not come
back to its natural length. Some permanent increase in length
takes place.
Fig. 10.5
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
Ductile material Aim

The material of the wire have a good plastic range and such To determine Young’s modulus of elasticity of the material
materials can be easily changed into different shapes and of a given wire.
can be drawn into thin wires. Materials Required
 Searle’s apparatus
 Two long steel wires of same length and diameter
 A metre scale
 A screw gauge
 Eight 0.5 kg slotted weights
 1 kg hanger
Theory
The normal stress for a wire with length L and radius r is
loaded with weight Mg where  is the increase in length,
then normal stress is given as:
Mg
Normal Stess =
Fig. 10.6 r 2
Elastomers
1
Stress strain curve is not a straight line within the elastic Longitudinal Strain =
L
limit for elastomers and strain produced is much larger than
Hence, Young’s Modulus =
the stress applied. Such materials have no plastic range and
the breaking point lies very close to elastic limit. eg. rubber.
Mg
Normal Stress MgL
Y  r  Y  2
2
Longitudinal Strain  r 
L
Y can be calculated as the values of L and r are known and

l is found by known Mg value.
Fig. 10.7
6. MISCELLANEOUS CASE IN ELASTICITY

6.1 Determination of Young’s modulus by Searle’s
method
Searle’s apparatus is used for the measurement of Young’s
modulus. It consists of two equal length wires that are
attached to a rigid support. To understand how Searle’s
apparatus is used to determine Young’s modulus of
elasticity of the material of a given wire, read the below
experiment.
Fig. 10.8
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
6.2 Rods as springs and their combination 6.3 Stress developed due to rotation of objects
Analogy of Rod as a spring
stress
Y
strain
AY
or F  

Fig. 10.12
Consider a small element of length dx at a distance x from
the axis of rotation
m
Mass of the element, dm  dx  dx
L
Fig. 10.9
m
AY where  
= constant, depends on type of material and geometry L

The centripetal force acting on the element is
of rod. F  k
AY T dx 2 2
where k  dl    L – x 2  dx [Using (i)]

= equivalent spring constant. YA 2YA 
So the total elongation of the whole rod is
1 2
l  L – x 2  dx
0 2YA  2
L
2  2 x3  1 2 L3 1 m2 L2
  L x –   
2YA  3  0 3 YA 3 YA
6.4 Stress in accelerated linear objects
Under the action of the external force, the rod acceleration
with a = F/m. The magnitude of stress decreases as one
Fig. 10.10 moves away from the point of application of the force.
for the system of rods shown in figure (a), the replaced
Therefore, the strain also decreases as one moves towards
spring system is shown in figure (b) two spring in series.
the free end.
Figure (c) represents equivalent spring system. Figure (d)
d determine the total elongation of the rod, let us consider
represents another combination of rods and their replaced
a small element of length dx at a distance x fro the free end
spring system.
of the rod. The magnitude of force at this section is
F  Fx L . Therefore, the stress at this section is
F F x
  
A A L
and elongation d produced in this differential element is
F
Fig. 10.11 d  xdx
YAL
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
Thus, total elongation is  A spring will be better one, if a large restoring force is
set up in it on being deformed, which in turn depends
l
F l F  x2  upon the elasticity of the material of the spring. Since
YAL 0
 xdx    the Young’s modulus of elasticity of steel is more than
YAL  2  0
that of copper, hence steel is preferred in making the
springs.
1 Fl
or  
2 YA  A bridge during its use undergoes alternating stresses
and strains for a large number of times each day,
7. INTERESTING POINTS TO KNOW depending upon the movement of vehicles on it. When
a bridge is used for long time, it loses its elastic strength.
 Consider two rods of rubber and steel each of length l Therefore, the amount of strain in the bridge for a given
and area of cross section a. Let Yr, Ys be the Young’s stress will become large and ultimately, the bridge may
modulus of elasticity of rubber and steel respectively. collapse. That is why the bridges are declared unsafe
When a stretching force F is applied on each rod, let lr, after long use.
ls be the extension in the rubber rod and steel rod
respectivley; where lr > ls  The work done in stretching the wire is stored in it in the
form of the elastic potential energy.
F F 
Then, Yr  and Ys 
a  r a  s
Ys  r
 Y   > 1 i.e. Ys > Yr
r s
Therefore steel is more elastic the rubber.
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
SUMMARY
1. ELASTIC BEHAVIOUR OF SOLIDS 3. MODULI OF ELASTICITY

The concept of elasticity is an idealization as no material is Young’s Modulus
perfectly elastic. For example, if you use a hair tie to groom FL
yourself, you may have noticed that its size tends to deform Y
AL
after prolonged use. After a point, it may snap as well. This Shear Modulus
is because the hair tie eventually loses its elastic nature.
FL
G
A.x
2. STRESS AND STRAIN Bulk Modulus
 PV
Stress B
V
Stress is defined as deforming force per unit area within
materials that arise from externally applied forces, uneven Poisson’s Ratio
heating, or permanent deformation and that permits an When a rod or bar is subjected to a longitudinal stress,
accurate description and prediction of elastic, plastic, and then not only its length changes but its transverse
fluid behaviour.
dimensions also change and thus giving rise to transverse
Stress is given by the following formula: or lateral strain in additional to longitudinal strain.
F

A
where,  is the stess applied, F is the deforming force
applied and A is the area of cross section of the force
applied.
Strain b
Transverse or lateral strain is
Strain is the amount of deformation experienced by the body b
in the direction of force applied, divided by the initial The ratio of transverse to longitudinal strain is termed as
dimensions of the body.
Poisson’s ratio, .
The following equation gives the relation for deformation
b / b
in terms of the length of a solid: 
l  / 

L transverse strain
where,  is the strain due to stress applied, l is the change Since, 
longitrdinal strain
in length and L is the original length of the material.
Hooke’s Law
4. ELASTIC POTENTIAL ENERGY
If the deforming forces are within a limit (known as elastic
limit), the stress created in the body is proportional to the When an elastic body is deformed, work is done by the
resulting strain. applied force. This work is stored as elastic potential energy
i.e. stress  strain. and is released when the body returns back to its original
shape or size.
stress
The ratio is known as Modulus of Elasticity. We know elastic energy stored per unit volume
strain
According to various types of stresses, we have 1

= (stress) (strain)
corresponding modulii of elasticity. 2
Unit of modulus of elasticity is same as the unit of stress
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
1 2 6. MISCELLANEOUS CASE IN ELASTICITY

= (modulus of elasticity) (strain)
2
 Determination of Young’s modulus by Searle’s method
 stress 
2
1
=  Rods as springs and their combination
2 modulus of elasticity
 Stress developed due to rotation of objects
In case of a longitudinal stress (compressive or tensile)  Stress in accelerated linear objects
Energy stored 1  Δ 
2
= Y 
volume 2   
5. STRESS-STRAIN GRAPH
If by gradually increasing the load on a vertically suspended
metal wire, a graph is plotted between stress (or load) and
longitudinal strain (or elongation) we get the curve as shown
in figure. From this curve it is clear that :
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example - 1 Example - 3
A metallic wire is stretched by suspending weight to it. If Four identical cylindrical columns of steel support a big
 is the longitudinal strain and Y is its Young’s modulus structure of mass 50,000 kg. The inner and outer radii of
of elasticity, show that the elastic potential energy per each column are 30 cm and 40 cm respectively. Assume
2
unit volume is given by Y  /2. the load distribution to be uniform, calculate the
compressional strain of each column. The Young’s
Sol. Stress = Young’s modulus × strain = Y ×  11
modulus of steel is 2.0 × 10 Pa.
Elastic potential energy per unit volume is
Sol. Here, M = 50,000 kg; r1 = 0.30 m and r2 = 0.40 m;
1 11
u = × stress × strain Y = 2.0 × 10 Pa.
2
Area of cross section of each column;
1 1
 
2
= × Y  ×  = Y . A   r22  r12    0.4    0.3    0.07 m 2
2 2
2 2  
Example - 2 Whole weight of the structure = Mg = 50000 × 9.8 N
A structural steel rod has a radius of 10 mm and a length of This weight is equally shared by four columns,
1m. A 100 kN force stretches it along its length. Calculate
(a) the stress (b) elongation, and (c) percentage strain on 50000  9.8
 Compressional force on one column, F  N
the rod. Given that the Young’s modulus of elasticity of 4
2
the structural steel is 2.0  10 Nm .
11
F/A
–3 –2
Now, Y  compressional strain
Sol. Here; r = 10 mm = 10 × 10 m = 10 m; l = 1 m;
3 5
F = 100 kN = 100 × 10 N = 10 N; F 50000  9.8 / 4
11
Y = 2.0 × 10 N/m
2  Compressional strain = AY     0.07   2.0  1011
–7
= 2.785 × 10
F F 10 5
(a) Stress =  
A r  
2 2
 22 / 7   10 2 Example - 4
Find the greatest length of copper wire, that can hang
8 –2 7 2
= 3.18 × 10 Nm without breaking. Breaking stress = 7.2 × 10 N/m . Density
2
(b) The elongation, of copper 7.2 g/cc. g = 10 m/s .
7 2
Sol. Given, breaking stress, S = 7.2 × 10 N/m ; Density of wire, 
 
F / A 

 3.18 10  1
8
3
= 7.2 g/cc = 7.2 × 10 kg/m .
3
Y 2  1011 Let l be the greatest length of wire that can hang without
–3
= 1.59 × 10 m = 1.59 mm breaking and a be the area of cross section of the wire.
Weight of wire = (a l)  g.
 1.59  10 3
The strain =   1.59  10 3
 1 Breaking stress, S=
weight of wire a g
=
area of cross section a
(c) Percentage strain in rod
–3
= 1.59 × 10 × 100 S 7.2 107
or     1000 m
= 0.159%  0.16%  g 7.2  103  10
Example - 5
Also, l1 + l2, = 0.70 mm ...(i)
Two wires A and B of length l, radius r and length 2l,
radius 2r having same Young’s modulus Y are hung with a Since both the wires have same tension and same area of
weight mg, as shown in figure. What is the net elongation cross section, hence have the same tensile stress S.
in the two wires ? Thus, S = Y × longitudinal strain
F  1  2
 a  Y1    Y2  
1 2
1 1 Y2 2.2 2.0  1011

or      2.5
 2  2 Y1 1.1 1.1 1011
or l1 = 2.5 l2.
From (i) 2.5 l2 + l2 = 0.70
orl2 = 0.2 mm
–4
 l1 = 0.5 mm = 5 × 10 m
 1 
Thus, F  aY1  r12 Y1 1
1 1
22 5 104
 
2
Sol. Here, the pulling force F (= mg) is same on both the wires.   1.5 103 1.1 1011 
Let l1, l2 be the elongations in the two wires. 7 2.2
2 2
= 1.77 × 10  1.8 × 10 N.
F F
As, Y  2 or  
 r  Y  r2 Example - 7
3
Find the change in volume which 1m of water will undergo
mg
For wire A, 1  when taken from the surface, to the bottom of sea 1 km
Y  r2 deep. Given the elasticity of water is 20,000 atmosphere. 1
5 –2
atmosphere = 1.013 × 10 N m .
mg  2   mg
Fow wire B,  2   3 3 3 6 –2
Y   2r  2 Y  r2 Sol. Here, V = 1 m ; p = h  g = 10 × 10 × 9.8 = 9.8 × 10 Nm
2
4 5 –2 9
B = 20,000 atm. = 2 × 10 × 1.013 × 10 × N m = 2.026 × 10
mg 1 mg Nm
–2
Total elongation = 1   2  

Y  r2 2 Y  r2
As, B 
pV
or V 
pV

9.8 106  1  
3 mg V B 2.026  109
 .
2 Y  r2 –3 3
= 4.83 × 10 m
A copper wire of length 2.2 m and a steel wire of length A solid ball 3cm in diameter is submerged in a lake to a
1.6 m, both of diameter 3.0 mm are connected end to end. 3 –2
depth, where the pressure is 10 kg f m . Find the change
When stretched by a load, the net elongation is found to in volume of the ball, if bulk modulus of the material of the
be 0.70 mm. Obtain the load applied. Young’s modulus of 7 2
ball is 10 dyne/cm .
11 –2
copper is 1.1 × 10 N m and Young’s modulus of steel is
11 –2 –2 –2
2.0 × 10 Nm . Sol. Here, 2 r = 3 cm = 3 × 10 m or r = (3/2) × 10 m
3 2 3 2 7 2 6 2
–3 p = 10 kg f/m = 10 × 9.8 N/m , B = 10 dyne/cm = 10 N/m
Sol. For copper wire, l1 = 2.2 m; r1 = 1.5 mm = 1.5 × 10 m;
3
Y1 = 1.1 × 10 Nm
11 –2 4 3 4 22  3 
Volume of the ball, V   r     10 2  m 3
–3 3 3 7 2 
For steel wire, l2 = 1.6 m; r2 = 1.5 mm = 1.5 × 10 m,
11 2
Y2 = 2.0 × 10 N/m .
Example - 11
pV
Now, B  Two parallel and opposite forces, each 500kgf are applied
V
tangentially to the upper and lower faces of a cubical metal
4 22  3 
3
block 25cm on a side. Find the angle of shear and the
   102   103  9.8
Vp 3 7  2  displacement of the upper surface relative to the lower
or V   10
surface. The shear modulus of the metal is 8 × 10 Nm ;
–2
B 106 –2
–6 3 3 g = 10ms .
= 0.1386 × 10 m = 0.1386 cm
Example - 9 Sol. Here F = 500 kgf = 500 × 10N; L = 25 × 10 m;
–2
The average depth of Indian ocean is about 3000m. –2 2

a = (25 × 10 ) = 6.25 × 10 m ;
–2 2
Calculate the fractional compression, V/V, of water at the 10 –2

G = 8 × 10 Nm
bottom of the ocean, given that the bulk modulus of water
9 –2
is 2.2 × 10 Nm . Take g = 10 ms .
–2
Angle of shear or shear strain,
9 2
Sol. Here, h = 3000 m; B = 2.2 × 10 N/m , F 500  10
  –6
= 10 rad
3
p = h  g = 3000 × 10 × 10 = 3 × 10 N m
7 –3 aG 
6.25  102  8 1010   
V p 3 107 L –2 –6
 Compessional strain,    1.36 102 . Now,   or L = L = (25 × 10 ) × 10 rad
V B 2.2  109 L
–8
Example - 10 = 25 × 10 rad.
Example - 12
A square lead slab of side 50cm and thickness 10.0cm is
subjected to a shearing force (on its narrow face) of When load on the wire is increased slowly from 2kg to
4
magnitude 9.0 × 10 N. The lower edge is riveted to the 4kg, the elongation increases from 0.5mm to 0.9mm. If
2
floor as shown in figure. How much is the upper edge g = 10 m/s , find the work done during the extention of the
9
displaced, if the shear modulus of lead is 5.6 × 10 Pa ? wire.
Sol. Here, F1 = 2kgf = 2 × 10N; F2 = 4kgf = 4 × 10N

–3 –3
l1 = 0.5mm = 0.5 × 10 m; l2 = 0.9mm = 0.9 × 10 m
1 1
Work done, W  F2   2  F1  1
2 2
1
Sol. Here, L = 50cm = 50 × 10 m;
–2  –3 –3
[4 × 10 × 0.9 × 10 –2 × 10 × 0.5 × 10 ]
2
9 4
G = 5.6 × 10 Pa, F = 9.0 × 10 N. –3
= 13 × 10 J.
Area of the face on which force is applied, Example - 13
2 2 2
a = 50 × 10 = 500 cm = 0.05 m . A 45kg boy whose leg bones are 5cm in area and 50 cm
long falls through a height of 2m without breaking his leg
If L is the displacement of the upper edge of the slab due 8 –2
bones. If the bones can stand a stress of 0.9 × 10 Nm ,
to tangential force F applied, then
calculate the Young’s modulus for the material of the bone.
–2
Use, g = 10ms .
F/a FL 9  104  50  10 2
G or L  
L / L Ga 5.6  109  0.05 Sol. Here, m = 45kg; h = 2m; L = 0.50m; A = 5 × 10 m
–4 2
–14 Loss in gravitational energy = gain in elastic energy in both

= 1.6 × 10 m
leg bones.
1  Example - 15
So, mgh  2    stress  strain  volume 
2  How does young’s modulus change with the rise of
–4 –4 3 temperarure ?
Here, volume = AL = 5 × 10 × 0.50 = 2.5 × 10 m
F/A 1
Sol. As Y  Y 
1 4   /  
 45 × 10 × 2 = 2 ×   0.9 10  strain  2.5  10 
8
2  So, as temperature increase, length also increase Hence,

Young’s modulus decreases with the rise in temperature.
45  10  2
or strain =  0.04
0.9  2.5  10  4 Example - 16
Distinguish between elasticity and plasticity of materials.
stress 0.9  108
 Y 
strain 0.04 Sol.
= 2.25 × 10 N m
9 –2 Elasticity Plasticity
1. It is the property of the 1. It is the property of the
Example - 14
body due to which the body due to which it
A wire of radius r stretched without tension along a straight
line is tightly fixed at A and B. Figure. What is the tension body regains its original does not regain to its
in the wire when it is pulled in the shape ACB ? Assume configuration (length, original configuration;
Young’s modulus of material of the wire to by Y.
volume or shape) when when the deforming
the deforming forces are force is removed from
removed. it.
2. The bodies, which has 2. The body, which has
this property, are called this property is called
Sol. Let 2 l be the original length of wire AB, i.e., L = 2l. When
wire is pulled into shape ACB, the increase in length, elastic bodies, e.g., Iron, plastic body, e.g., clay
L = (AC + CB) – AB = 2 (l + d ) – 2l.
2 2 1/2
copper, gold etc. etc.
 
1/ 2
L 2   d  2
2 2
Longitudinal strain   Example - 17

L 2 –5 2
A steel wire of length 4.7 m and cross-section 3.0 × 10 m
2l[(1  d 2 / l 2 )1 / 2  1] stretches by the same amount as a copper wire of length
= –5 2
3.5 m and cross-section 4.0 × 10 m under a given load.
2l
What is the ratio of the Young’s modulus of steel to that
 1 d2  d2 of copper ?
 1   1  2
 2   2
2
–5 2
Sol. Given steel : LS = 4.7 m, AS = 3.0 × 10 m , LC = 3.5 m,
–5 2
A = 4.0 × 10 m
tension F
Longitudinal stress   2 Applied force F and extension L are same for both wires.
area r
Young’s modulus of steel,
longitudinal stress FLS F  4.7
 Young’s Modulus, Y  YS  
longitudinalstrain AS L 3.0  105  L
Young’s modulus for copper

F / r 2
 2
d / 2 2 FL C F  3.5
YC  
2 2 2 A C L 4.0  10 5  L
 Tension in the wire, F = Y × r × d /2l .
Hence, Example - 20
YS F  4.7 4 105  L What is the density of ocean water at a depth, where the
  = 1.79
5
YC 3.0  10  L F  3.5 pressure is 80.0 atm, given that its density at the surface is
3 –3 –11
1.03 × 10 kg m ? Compressibility of water = 45.8 × 10
Example - 18 –1 5
Pa . Given, 1 atm = 1.013 × 10 Pa.
9 –2
The breaking stress for a metal is 7.8 × 10 Nm . Calculate –11 –1
the maximum length of the wire made of this metal which Sol. Given, compressibility of water = 1/K = 45.8 × 10 Pa ,
13 5
may be suspended without breaking. The density of the p = 80.0 atm = 80.0 × 1.0 × 10 Pa, density of water at the
3 –3
3 –3
metal = 7.8 × 10 kg m . Take g = 10 ms .
–2 surface,  = 1.03 × 10 kg m .
Suppose that a volume V of the ocean water is taken to a
9 –2
Sol. Given Breaking stress = 7.8 × 10 N m , L = ?, depth where the pressure is 80.0 atm. Let V be the decrease
3 –3
in volume.
 = 7.8 × 10 kgm .
When the wire is suspended vertically, it tends to break pV
Then K 
under its own weight. Let its length be L and cross-sectional V
area be A.
pV –11
Weight of wire = mg = volume × density × g = ALg or V   80  1.013  105  V × 45.8 × 10
K
weight ALg
Stress =   Lg = 0.0037 V
area A
If V’ is volume of the water, when taken to the depth, then
For the wire not to break, this must be equal to the breaking
stress, therefore, we have V’ = V – V = V – 0.0037 V
= 0.9963 V
9
Lg  7.8  10 9
or L  7.8  10  105 m Let ’ be the density of water at the depth, where the pressure
7.8  10  10
3
is 80.0 atm. Since the mass of water remains same, therefore,
Example - 19 we have
A rigid bar of mass 15 kg is supported symmetrically, by V’ ’ = V
three wires each 2.0 m long. Those at each end are of or 0.9963 V × ’ = V × 1.03 × 10
3
copper and the middle one is of iron. Determine the ratios 3 –3

or ’ = 1.034 × 10 kg m
of their diameters if each is to have the same tension.
Sol. Given M = 15 kg, L = 2.0 m each.
Let T be the tension in each wire. As the bar is supported
symmetrically by the three wires, the increases in length L
of each wire should be same.
The expression for Young’s modulus is
FL TL
Y 
A L A L
Now, for all wires, L, L, and T is same, therefore, we have
1 D 2 1
A or 
Y 4 Y
Hence,
D Cu YFe 1.9  1011

   1.3
D Fe YCu 1.1 1011
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Elastic behaviour of Solids & Stress and Strain 8. A wire of cross section A is stretched horizontally between
1. The force constant of a wire does not depend on two clamps located 2 metres apart. A weight W kg is
(a) Nature of the material (b) Radius of the wire Suspended from the mid-point of the wire. If the mid-point
sags vertically through a distance x < 1 the strain produced
(c) Length of the wire (d) none of these
is:
2. The ratio of radii of two wires of same material is 2 : 1.
Stretched by same force, then the ratio of stress is 2x 2 x2
(a) (b)
2 2
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 1 : 2
(c) 1 : 4 (d) 4 : 1 x2
(c) (d) None of these
3. The length of a wire is increased by 1 mm on the application 2 2
of a given load. In a wire of the same material, but of length 9. A wire elongates by l mm when a load w is hung from it. If
and radius twice that of the first, on application of the same the wire goes over a pulley and two weights w each are
load, extension is hung at the two ends, the elongation of the wire will be
(a) 0.25 mm (b) 0.5 mm (in mm)
(c) 2 mm (d) 4 mm (a) l (b) 2 l
4. If equal and opposite forces applied to a body tend to (c) zero (d) l/2
elongate it, the stress so produced is called
10. A wire can sustain the weight of 20 kg before breaking. If
(a) Tensile stress (b) Compressive stress the wire is cut into two equal parts, each part can sustain a
(c) Tangential stress (d) Working stress weight of
5. The longitudinal extension of any elastic material is very (a) 10 kg (b) 20 kg
small. In order to have an appreciable change, the material
(c) 40 kg (d) 35 kg
must be in the form of
(a) Long thick wire (b) Short thick wire 11. Two wires of the same material and same mass are stretched
by the same force. Their lengths are in the ratio 2 : 3. Their
(c) Long thin wire (d) Short thin wire
elongations are in the ratio
6. The reason for the change in shape of a regular body is
(a) 3 : 2 (b) 2 : 3
(a) Volume stress (b) Shearing strain
(c) 4 : 9 (d) 9 : 4
(c) Longitudinal strain (d) Metallic strain
12. A rubber ball is taken to a depth of 200 m in a pool. Its
7. One end of a uniform rod of mass m1 and cross-sectional
volume decreases by 0.1%. If the density of the water
area A is hung from a ceiling. The other end of the bar is 3 3 2
is 1 × 10 kg/m and g = 10 m/s , then the volume elasticity
supporting mass m2. The stress at the midpoint is 2
(Bulk modulus) in N/m will be
8 8
(a) 10 (b) 2 × 10
9 9
(c) 10 (d) 2 × 10
–5
13. The compressibility of water is 4 × 10 per unit
atmospheric pressure. The decrease in volume of 100 cubic
centimetre of water under a pressure of 100 atmosphere
will be
–5
(a) 0.4 cc (b) 4 × 10 cc
g m 2  2m1  g m 2  m1  (c) 0.025 cc (d) 0.004 cc
(a) (b)
2A 2A
14. A steel wire of diameter 2 mm has a breaking strength of 4
5
g  m 2  m1  × 10 N. The breaking of similar steel wire of diameter 1
g 2m 2  m1  5
(c) (d) mm will be n × 10 N; where n is
2A 3A
9 –2
15. The breaking stress for a metal is 7.8 × 10 Nm . The 20. Two wires are made of the same material and have the
–3 –1
density of the metal is 7800 kg m . If g = 10 N kg , Find same volume. However, wire 1 has cross-sectional area A
the maximum length of the wire (in km) made of this metal and wire-2 has cross-sectional area 3A. If the length of
which may be suspended without breaking. wire-1 increases by x on applying force 1 N, how much
16. To break a wire of one-meter length, minimum weight of force (in N) is needed to stretch wire 2 by the same amount?
40 kg wt is required. Then the wire of same material of 21. A cylindrical eraser which is attached at the back of a light
double radius and 6 m length will require a breaking weight pencil, of negligible mass is dragged across a paper at a
(in kg-wt) constant velocity to the right by its pencil. The coefficient
of kinetic friction between eraser and paper is 0.6. The
17. Two opposite forces F1  120 N and F2  80 N on an
pencil pushes down with 5N. The height of the eraser is 2
2
elastic plank of modulus of elasticity Y  2  1011 N m 2 cm and its circular area is 4 cm . its top surface is displaced
horizontally 0.6 mm relative to the bottom. If the shear
and length l  1 placed over a smooth horizontal surface.
modulus of the eraser material is x  105 Pa, Find value of
The cross-sectional area of the plank is S  0.5m 2 . The
2x.
change in length of the plank is n  10 –9 m. Find the value
Moduli of Elasticity
of n. 10 2
22. Young’s modulus of brass and steel are 10 × 10 N/m
and
11 2
2 × 10 N/m , respectively. A brass wire and a steel wire
of the same length are extended by 1 mm under the same
force. The radii of the brass and steel wires are RB and RS
respectively. Then
R
(a) RS = 2 RB (b) R S  2B
18. A light rod of length 2m is suspended from the ceiling
R
horizontally by means of two vertical wires of equal (c) RS = 4RB (d) R S  4B
lengths. A weight W is hung from the light rod as shown.
23. Two blocks of masses 1 kg and 2 kg are connected by a
The rod is hung by means of a steel wire of cross-sectional
metal wire going over a smooth pulley as shown. The
area A1  0.1cm 2 and brass wire of cross-sectional area
40
breaking stress of the metal is 3  106 N / m2 . If g = 10 m/
A 2  0.2 cm . To have equal stress in both wires, ratio of
2
2
s , then what should be the minimum radius of the wire
tension T1 T2 =
used if it is not to break?
(a) 0.5 mm (b) 1 mm

19. Two wires are made of the same material and have the (c) 1.5 mm (d) 2 mm
same volume. However, wire 1 has cross-sectional area A 24. Two wires are made of the same material and have the
and wire 2 has cross-sectional area 3A. If the length of same volume. However, wire 1 has cross-sectional area A
wire 1 increases by x on applying force F, the force and wire-2 has cross sectional areal 3A. If the length of
needed to stretch wire 2 by equal amount (or elongation) wire 1 increases by x on aplying force F, how much force
is nF, where n is: is needed to stretch wire 2 by the same amount ?
(a) F (d) 4F
(c) 6F (d) 9F
25. One end of a horizontal thick copper wire of length 2L

 4MLg 
and radius 2R is welded to an end of another horizontal 29. In the determination of Young’s modulus  Y  
 d 2 
thin copper wire of length L and radius R. When the
arrangement is stretched by applying forces at two ends, by using Searle’s method, a wire of length L = 2 m and
diameter d = 0.5 mm is used. For a load M = 2.5 kg, an
the ratio of the elongation in the thin wire to that in the
extension l = 0.25 mm in the length of the wire is observed.
thick wire is
Quantities d and l are measured using a screw gauge and a
(a) 0.25 (b) 0.50 micrometer, repectively. They have the same pitch of 0.5
(c) 2.00 (d) 4.00 mm. The number of divisions on their circular scale is 100.
6 2
The contributions to the maximum probable error of the Y
26. A cylindrical tree has a breaking stress of 10 N/m . The measurement is
maximum possible height of the tree is 5 m. the density of (a) due to the errors in the measurements of d and l are
2
material of the tree is (take g = 10 m/s ) the same
3 3 4 3
(a) 10 kg/m (b) 10 kg/m (b) due to the error in the measurement of d is twice that
4 3 3 due to the error in the measurement of l.
(c) 2 × 10 kg/m (d) 1 kg/m
(c) due to the error in the measurement of l is twice that
27. You are given three wires A, B and C of the same length due to the error in the measurement of d.
and cross section. They are each stretched by applying the (d) due to the error in the measurement of d is four times
same force to the ends. The wire A is stretched least and that due to the error in the measurement of l.
comes back to its original length when the stretching force So, error in measurment of y is due to errors in t and 
is removed. The wire B is stretched more than A and also 30. A 0.05 m cube has its upper face displaced by 0.2 cm by a
comes back to its original length when the stretching force tangential force of 8 N. Calculate the modulus of rigidity
is removed. The wire C is stretched most and remains 4 –2
(in 10 Nm ) of the material of the cube.
stretched even when stretching force is removed. The 31.
3
A hydraulic press contains 0.25 m (250 L) of oil. Find the
greatest Young’s modulus of elasticity is possessed by the decrease in volume of he oil ( in %) when it is subjected to
material of wire
a pressure increase p  1.6  107 Pa . The bulk modulus
(a) A
of the oil is B  5.0  109 Pa :
(b) B
32. A solid sphere of radius R made of material of bulk
(c) C modulus B is surrounded by a liquid in a cylindrical
container. A massless piston of area A (the area of container
(d) All have the same elasticity
is also A) floats on he surface of the liquid. When a mass
28. The face EFGH of the cube shown in the figure is displaced M is placed on the piston to compress the liquid, find the
5
2 mm parallel to itself when forces of 5 × 10 N each are fractional change in radius of the sphere.
applied on the lower and upper faces. The lower face is
Mg
fixed. The strain produced in the cube is (Given  0.3 )
AB
Elastic Potential Energy
33. If the potential energy of a spring is V on stretching it by 2
cm, then its potential energy when it is stretched by 10
cm will be
(a) V/25 (b) 5V
(c) V/5 (d) 25V
34. Two wires of the same material and length but diameters
in the ratio 1 : 2 are stretched by the same force. The
(a) 2 (b) 0.5 potential energy per unit volume for the two wires when
8
stretched will be in the ratio
(c) 0.05 (d) 1.2 × 10 (a) 16 : 1 (b) 4 : 1
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 1
35. If S is stress and Y is Young’s modulus of material of a 42. When the thin smooth wire of cross-sectional area A and
wire, the energy stored in the wire per unit volume is Young’s modulus Y, density  and length l is pulled with
S2 2 a 2 l 3 A
(a) 2 S Y
2
(b) an acceleration a the elastic energy stored is .
2Y xY
Find x
2Y S
(c) 2 (d) 2 Y
S
36. A wire fixed at the upper end stretches by length  by

applying a force F. The work done in stretching is : 43. A rubber cord has a cross-sectional area 1 mm2 and total
unstretched length 10.0 cm. It is stretched to 12.0 cm and
F then released to project a missile of mass 5.0 g. Taking
(a) (b) F
2 Young’s modulus Y for rubber as 5.0 × 108 N/m2.
Calculate the velocity (in m/s) of projection.
F
(c) 2F (d) Stress-Strain Graph
2
37. What amount of work is done in increasing the length of a 44. The stress versus strain graphs for wires of two materials
wire through unity? A and B are as shown in the figure. If YA and YB are the
Young’s modulii of the materials, then
YL YL2
(a) 2A (b)
2A
YA YL
(c) 2L (d) A
38. When the load on a wire is slowly increased from 3 to 5

kg wt, the elongation increases from 0.61 to 1.02 mm. The
work done during the extension of wire is
(a) 0.16 J (b) 0.016 J
(c) 1.6 J (d) 16 J (a) YB = 2YA (b) YA = YB
39. Two wires of same diameter of the same material having (c) YB = 3YA (d) YA = 3YB
the length  and 2. If the force F is applied on each, the
ratio of the work done in the two wires will be 45. The strain stress curves of three wires of different materials
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 4 are shown in the figure. P, Q and R are the elastic limits of
the wires. The figure shows that
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 1
40. A wire suspended vertically from one of its ends is stretched
by attaching a weight of 200 N to the lower end. The weight
stretches the wire by 1 mm. Then the elastic energy stored
in the wire is :
(a) 0.2 J (b) 10 J
(c) 20 J (d) 0.1 J
41. An iron ball (solid sphere) of radius R is placed in a gas
chamber in which the pressure is maintained at 2P0. The
increase in elastic potential energy stored in the ball is
R 3 P02 x (a) Elasticity of wire P is maximum

y is a proper fraction, find 
, where x  y . (b) Elasticity of wire Q is maximum
y
(c) Elasticity of R is maximum
[P0 is atmospheric pressure;  is bulk modulus of iron]
(d) None of the above is true
46. The figure shows the stress-strain graph of a certain 50. A sphere of radius 0.1 m and mass 8 kg is attached to the
substance. Over which region of the graph is Hooke’s law lower end of a steel wire of length 5m and diameter 10
–3
obeyed m. The wire is suspended from 5.22 m high ceiling of a

room. When the sphere is made to swing as a simple
pendulum, it just grazes the floor at its lowest point. young’s
11 –2
modulus of steel is 2 × 10 Nm . Find the velocity of the
2
sphere at the lowest position in m/s. (Given: g = 10m/s ):
2 2
E 51. A horizontal oriented copper rod of length   m is
3
(a) AB (b) BC rotated about a vertical axis passing through its middle.
(c) CD (d) ED Breaking strength of copper is   2.5  108 Pa and density
47. The stress-strain curves for brass, steel and rubber are of copper p  9  103 Kg m3 . Rotation frequency
shown in the figure. The lines A, B and C are for –1
measured (in sec ) at which the rod ruptures is given by
50 n, where n is equal to:
52. A uniform circular ring of radius R = 2.5 cm and mass 10
gm is made of an elastic material. Symmetrical radially
outward forces are applied on the ring to increase its radius
from R = 2.5 cm to 2.7 cm. young’s modulus of material
N
of the ring is 2  10
11
(a) Rubber, brass and steel respectively and radius of cross section of
m2
(b) Brass, steel and rubber the ring is 1 mm. If all the external forces are removed,
(c) Steel, brass and rubber respectively how long will it take for the ring to come to its original
(d) Steel, rubber and brass radius for the first tune? (in milliseconds)
2
48. Which one of the following is the Young’s modulus (in N/m ) 53. If stress in a stretched wire of a material (whose Young’s
for the wire having the stress-strain curve shown in the Y
figure modulus is Y) is , in order that the speed of
200
longitudinal waves is equal to 10 times the speed of
transverse waves, then find the value of  ?
54. The elastic limit of a steel cable is 3.0 × 108 N/m2 and the
cross-section is 4 cm2. Find the maximum upward
acceleration that can be given to a 900 kg elevator
supported by the cable if the stress is not to exceed on-
11 11 third of the elastic limit. (take g = 9.8 m/s2)
(a) 24 × 10 (b) 8.0 × 10
(c) 10 × 10
11
(d) 2.0 × 10
11 (Answer should be correct up to two decimal places)
Miscellaneous Cases in Elasticity 55. A lift is tied with thick wires and the mass of the lift is
49. The length of a steel cylinder is kept constant by applying 1000 kg. If the maximum acceleration of the lift is 1ms–2
pressure at its two ends. When the temperature of rod is and the maximum stress the wire can bear is 1.4 × 106
increased by 100°C from its initial temperature, the increase Nm–2. If g = 10 ms–2 the minimum diameter of that wire is
in pressure to be applied at its ends is (in meters)?
11 2 –6 5
(Ysteel = 2 × 10 N/m , steel = 11 × 10 /°C, 1 atm = 10 N/
2
m)
7 3
(a) 22 × 10 atm (b) 2.2 × 10 atm
3
(c) zero (d) 4.3 × 10 atm
EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. A uniformly tapering conical wire is made from a material 4. A compressive force, F is applied at the two ends of a long
of Young’s modulus Y and has a normal, unextended length thin steel rod. It is heated, simultaneously, such that its
L. The radii, at the upper and lower ends of this conical temperature increases by T . The net change in its length
wire, have values R and 3 R, respectively. The upper end is zero. Let l be the length of the rod, A its area of cross-
of the wire is fixed to a rigid support and a mass M is section, Y its Young’s modulus, and  be its coefficient
suspended from its lower end. The equilibrium extended of linear expansion. Then, F is equal to : (2017)
length, of this wire, would equal (2016)
(a) 2 Y  T (b)  AY  T
 2 Mg   1 Mg 
(a) L 1   (b) L 1   AY
 9 YR 2   3 YR 2  (c) AY  T (d)  T
 1 Mg   2 Mg  5. A solid sphere of radius r made of a soft material of bulk

(c) L 1   (d) L 1   modulus K is surrounded by a liquid in a cylindrical
 9 YR 2   3 YR 2 
container. A massless piston of area a floats on the surface
2. A bottle has an opening of radius a and length b. A cork of of the liquid, covering entire cross section of cylindrical
length b and radius (a + a ) where (a  a) is container. When a mass m is placed on the surface of the
compressed to fit into the opening completely (See figure). piston to compress the liquid, the fractional decrement in
If the bulk modulus of cork is B and frictional coefficient
 dr 
between the bottle and cork is  then the force needed to the radius of the sphere,   is (2018)
push the cork into the bottle is : (2016)  r 
mg mg
(a) (b)
3K a Ka
Ka Ka
(c) mg (d) 3mg
6. As shown in the figure, forces of 105 N each are applied in

opposite directions, on the upper and lower faces of a
cube of sides 10 cm, shifting the upper face parallel to
itself by 0.5 cm. If the side of another cube of the same
material is 20 cm, then under similar conditions as above,
the displacement will be : (2018)
(a) (B b) a (b) (2B b) a
(c) (B b) a (d) (4B b) a

3. A steel rail of length 5m and area of cross section 40 cm2 is (a) 0.25 cm (b) 0.37 cm
prevented from expanding along its length while the (c) 0.75 cm (d) 1.00 cm
temperature rises by 10ºC, If coefficient of linear expansion
7. A load of mass M kg is suspended from a steel wire of
and Young’s modulus of steel are 1.2 × 10–5 K–1 and 2 ×
length 2m and radius 1.0 mm in Searle’s apparatus
1011 Nm–2 respectively, the force developed in the rail is
experiment. The increase in length produced in the wire is
approximately : (2017)
4.0 mm. Now the load is fully immersed in a liquid of relative
(a) 2×107 N density 2. The relative density of the material of load is 8.
(b) 1×105 N The new value of increase in length of the steel wire is
(c) 2×109 N _____. (2019)
(d) 3×10–5 N (a) 3.0 mm (b) 4.0 mm
(c) 5.0 mm (d) Zero
8. A boy’s catapult is made of rubber cord which is 42 cm 13. Two steel wires having same length are suspended from a
long, with 6 mm diameter of cross-section and of negligible ceiling under the same load. If the ratio of their energy
mass. The boy keeps a stone weighing 0.02 kg on it and stored per unit volume is 1: 4, the ratio of their diameters
stretches the cord by 20 cm by applying a constant force. is: (2020)
When released, the stone flies off with a velocity of 20 ms1.
Neglect the change in the area of cross-section of the (a) 2 :1 (b) 1: 2
cord while stretched. The Young’s modulus of rubber is (c) 1 : 2 (d) 2 : 1
closest to: (2019)
14. Given below are two statements: one is labelled as Assertion
(a) 106 N/m–2 (b) 104 N/m–2 A and the other is labelled as Reason R
(c) 108 N/m–2 (d) 103 N/m–2 Assertion (A): When a rod lying freely is heated, no thermal
9. A steel wire having a radius of 2.0 mm, carrying a load of stress is developed in it.
4 kg, is hanging from a ceiling. Given that g = 3.1 ms–2, Reason (R): On heating, the length of the rod increases.
what will be the tensile stress that would be developed in
In the light of the above statements, choose the correct
the wire? (2019)
answer from the option given below: (2021)
(a) 6.2 × 106 Nm–2 (b) 5.2 × 106 Nm–2
(a) A is false but R is true
(c) 3.1 × 106 Nm–2 (d) 4.8 × 106 Nm–2
(b) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation
10. Young’s moduli of two wires A and B are in the ratio 7 : 4. of A
Wire A is 2 m long and has radius R. Wire B is 1.5 m long
(c) A is true but R is false
and has radius 2 mm. If the two wires stretch by the same
length for a given load, then the value of R is close to : (d) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct
explanation of A
(2019)
15. If Y, K and  are the values of Young’s modulus, bulk
(a) 1.5 mm (b) 1.9 mm
modulus and modulus of rigidity of any material
(c) 1.7 mm (d) 1.3 mm respectively. Choose the correct relation for these
11. In an environment, brass and steel wires of length 1 m parameters. (2021)
each with areas of cross section 1mm 2 are used. The wires
9K 9K
are connected in series and one end of the combined wire (a) Y   N / m2 (b) Y   N / m2
3K   2  3K
is connected to a rigid support and other end is subjected
to elongation. The stress required to produce a net
elongation of 0.2 mm is: Y 3YK
(c) K   N / m2 (d)    N / m2
9  3Y 9K  Y
[Given, the Young’s modulus for steel and brass are,
respectively, 120  109 N / m 2 and 60  109 N / m 2 ] 16. The normal density of a material is  and its bulk modulus
of elasticity if K. The magnitude of increase in density of
(2019)
material, when a pressure P is applied uniformly on all sides,
(a) 1.2  106 N / m 2 (b) 4.0  106 N / m2 will be : (2021)
(c) 8 106 N / m2 (d) 0.2 106 N / m2 PK K

(a) (b)
 P
12. The elastic limit of brass is 379 M Pa. What should be the
minimum diameter of a brass rod if it is to support a 400 N
K P
load without exceeding its elastic limit? (c) p (d)
K
(2019)
(a) 1.00 mm (b) 1.15 mm
(c) 0.90 mm (d) 1.36 mm
17. The length of metallic wire is  1 when tension in it is T1 . It 19. A uniform metallic wire is elongated by 0.04 m when
subjected to a linear force F. The elongation, if its length
is  2 when the tension is T2 . The original length of the and diameter is doubled and subjected to the same force
wire will be (Assume that Hooke’s law is valid) (2021) will be ___cm. (2021)
T2 1  T1 2 20. Two separate wires A and B are stretched by 2mm and
1   2
(a) T2  T1 (b) 4mm respectively, when they are subjected to a force of
2
2N. Assume that both the wires are made up of same material
and the radius of wire B is 4 times that of the radius of wire
T11  T2  2 T2 1  T2  2
(c) (d) A. The length of the wires A and B are in the ratio of a:b.
T2  T1 T1  T2
a 1
18. An object is located at 2 km beneath the surface of the can be expressed as where x is ..... (2021)
b x
V
water. If the fractional compression is 1.36%, the ratio
V
of hydraulic stress to the corresponding hydraulic strain
will be _____.
[Given : density of water is 1000kg / m 3 and g  9.8m / s 2

(2021)
(a) 1.96 107 N / m2 (b) 1.44 107 N / m2
(c) 2.26 109 N / m 2 (d) 1.44 109 N / m2

EXERCISE - 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Single Choice Questions 6. A bar of cross section A is subjected to two equal and
1. The length of an elastic string is a meter when the opposite tensile forces as shown. Consider a cross section
longitudinal tension is 4 N and b metre when the tension is BB as shown in figure. The shearing stress at this point is
5 N. The length of the string (in metre) when the
longitudinal tension is 9 N is
(a) a – b (b) 5b – 4a
(c) 2b – a/2 (d) 4a – 3b
5
2. A substance breaks down under a stress of 10 Pa. If the
3 3
density of the wire is 2 × 10 kg/m , find the minimum
length of the wire which will break under its own weight
(g = 10 m/s ).
2 Fcos 2  F
(a) (b) A
A
(a) 10 m (b) 2.5 m
Fsin 2
(c) 4 m (d) 5 m (c) (d) zero
2A
3. A slightly conical wire of length L and end radii r1 and r2
is stretched by two forces F, F applied parallel to length in 7. A uniform rod of length L has a mass per unit length  and
opposite directions and normal to end faces. If Y denotes area of cross section A. The elongation in the rod is  due
the Young’s modulus, then extension produced is to its own weight if it is suspended from the ceiling of a
room. The Young’s modulus of the rod is
FL FL
(a) r 2Y (b) rY 2gL2 gL2
(a) (b)
1 1
A 2A
FL FLY 2gL g 2
(c) r r Y (d) r r (c) (d)
1 2 1 2 A AL
4. One end of uniform wire of length L and of weight W is 8. A small but heavy block of mass 10 kg is attached to a
7 2
attached rigidly to a point in the roof and a weight W1 is wire 0.3m long. Its breaking stress is 4.8 × 10 N/m . The
–6 2
suspended from its lower end. If s is the area of cross area of cross section of the wire is 10 m . The maximum
section of the wire, the stress in the wire at a height (3L/4) angular velocity with which the block can be rotated in
from its lower end is the horizontal circle is
(a) 4 rad/s (b) 8 rad/s
W1  W
(a) s
(b)  W1  4  s (c) 10 rad/s (d) 32 rad/s
9. A 5 kg rod of square cross section 5 cm on a side and 1 m
 3W  long is pulled along a smooth horizontal surface by a force
 W1  4  W1  W applied at one end. The rod has a constant acceleration of
(c) (d) s
s 2
2 m/s . Determine the elongation in the rod. (Young’s
9 2
5. Two bars A and B of circular cross section and same modulus of the material of the rod is 5 × 10 N/m )
volume and made of the same material are subjected to (a) Zero, as for elongation to be there, equal and opposite
tension. If the diameter of A is half that of B and if the force must act on the rod
force applied to both the rod is the same and it is in the (b) Non-zero but can’t be determine from the given
elastic limit, the ratio of extension of A to that of B will be situation
(a) 16 (b) 8 (c) 0.4 m
(d) 16 m
(c) 4 (d) 2
10. A solid sphere of radius R, made up of a material of bulk 14. Choose the correct statements from the following :
modulus K is surrounded by a liquid in a cylindrical (a) Steel is more elastic than rubber.
container. A massless piston of area A floats on the surface
of the liquid. When a mass M is placed on the piston to (b) The stretching of a coil spring is determined by the
compress the liquid, the fractional change in the radius of Young’s modulus of the wire of the spring.
the sphere is (c) The frequency of a tuning fork is determined by the
shear modulus of the material of the fork.
Mg Mg
(a) (b) 3AK
AK (d) When a material is subjected to a tensile (stretching)
stress the restoring forces are caused by interatomic
3Mg Mg attraction.
(c) (d)
AK 2AK
15. A heavy block of mass 150 kg hangs with the help of three
11. A uniform rod of mass m, length L, area of cross-section A vertical wires of equal length and equal cross sectional
is rotated about an axis passing through one of its ends area as shown in the figure.
and perpendicular to its length with constant angular
velocity  in a horizontal plane. If Y is the Young’s modulus
of the material of rod, the increase in its length due to
rotation of rod is
m2 L2 m2 L2
(a) (b)
AY 2AY
m2 L2 2m2 L2
(c) (d)
3AY AY
12. Figure shows the stress-strain graphs for materials A Wire is attached to the mid-point (centre of mass) of block.
and B. Take Y2 = 2Y1. For this arrangement mark out the correct
statment(s).
(a) The wire I and III should have same Young’s modulus.
(b) Tension in I and III would be always equal.
(c) Tension in I and III would be different.
(d) Tension in II is 75 g.
16. A composite rod consists of a steel rod of length 25 cm
and area 2A and a copper rod of length 50 cm and area A.
The composite rod is subjected to an axial load F. If the
Young’s mouduli of steel and copper are in the ratio 2 : 1,
From the graph it follows that
then
(a) material A has a higher Young’s modulus
(a) the extension produced in copper rod will be more
(b) material B is more ductile
(c) material A is more brittle (b) the extension in copper and steel parts will be in the
ratio 1 : 8
(d) material A can withstand a greater stress
13. Two wires A and B have the same cross-section and are (c) the stress applied to copper rod will be more
made of the same material, but the length of wire A is twice (d) no extension will be produced in the steel rod
that of B. Then, for a given load
(a) the extension of A will be twice that of B
(b) the extensions of A and B will be equal
(c) the strain in A will be half that in B
(d) the strains in A and B will be equal
Multiple Choice Questions 21. Assertion : The stress–strain graphs are shown in the figure
17. A metal wire length L, cross section area A, and Young’s for two materials A and B are shown in figure. Young’s
modulus Y is stretched by a variable force F. F is varying modulus of A is greater than that of B.
in such a way that F is always slightly greater than the
elastic forces of resistance in the wire. When the elongation
in the wire is l, up to this instant
YA 2
(a) the work done by F is
2L
YA 2
(b) the work done by F is
L
Reason : The Young’s modulus for small strain is,

YA 2
(c) the elasitc potential energy stored in wire is
2L stress
Y  slope of linear portion, of graph; and slope
(d) no energy is lost during elongation strain
of A is more than that of B.
(a) A (b) B
Numeric Value Type Questions
(c) C (d) D
18. A block of mass m produces an extension of 9 cm in an
elastic spring of length 60 cm when it is hung by it, and
the system is in equilibrium. The spring is cut in two parts Match the Column
of 40 cm and 20 cm lengths. The same block hangs in
22. In the Column I type of stresses or strains are mentioned
equilibrium with the help of these two parts. Find the
and some effect of these stresses within the body are
extension (in cm) in this case.
mentioned in Column II. Match the entries of Column-I
19. Two separate wires A and B are stretched by 2 mm and 4 with the entries of Column-II.
mm respectively, when they are subjected to a force of 2
Column-I Column-II
N. Assume that both the wires are made up of same mate-
rial and the radius of wire B is 4 times that of the radius of (A) Compressive stress (P) Intermolecular
wire A. The length of the wires A and B are in the ratio of separation in
a 1 stresssed state is greater
a : b. Then can be expressed as where x is .......
b x than equilibrium
Assertion & Reason separation.
(A) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true and (B) Tensile stress (Q) Intermolecular
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion. separation in
(B) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true but reason stressed state is less
is not the correct explanation of the assertion. than equilibrium
(C) If ASSERTION is true but REASON is false. separation.
(D) If both ASSERTION and REASON are false. (C) Longitudinal stress (R) Internal developed
(E) If ASSERTION is false but REASON is true. forces are
20. Assertion : Young’s modulus for a perfectly plastic body attractive in nature.
is zero. (D) Lateral strain (S) Internal developed
Reason : For a perfectly plastic body, restoring force is forces are repulsive
zero. in nature
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
Passage 24. Just on crossing the yield region, the material will have
Using the following Passage, Solve Q. 23 to 25 (a) reduced stress
According to Hooke’s law, within the elastic limit stress/ (b) increased stress
strain = constant. This constant depends on the type of (c) breaking stress
strain or the type of force acting. Tensile stress might result
(d) constant stress
in compressional or elongative strain; however, a tangential
stess can only cause a shearing strain. After crossing the stress
elastic limit, the material undergoes elongation and beyond 25. If be x in elastic region and y in the region of yield,
strain
a stage beaks. All modulus of elastically are basically
then
constants for the materials under stress.
(a) x = y (b) x > y
23. Two wires of same material have length and radius (  , r)
(c) x < y (d) x = 2y
 r
and  2,  . The ratio of their Young’s modulus is
 2
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 3
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 1
EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

(a) P has more tensile strength than Q
 4MLg 
1. In the determination of Young’s modulus  Y  
 d 2  (b) P is more ductile than Q
by using Searle’s method, a wire of length L = 2 m and (c) P is more brittle than Q
diameter d = 0.5 mm is used. For a load M = 2.5 kg, an (d) The Young’s modulus of P is more than that of Q.
extension l = 0.25 mm in the length of the wire is observed.
Quantities d and l are measured using a screw gauge and a 4. A block of weight 100 N is suspended by copper and steel
micrometer, respectively. They have the same pitch of 0.5 wires of same cross sectional area 0.5 cm2 and, length3
mm. The number of divisions on their circular scale is 100. m and 1 m, respectively. Their other ends are fixed on a
The contributions to the maximum probable error of the Y ceiling as shown in figure. The angles subtended by
measurement is (2012) copper and steel wires with ceiling are 30° and 60°,
(a) due to the errors in the measurements of d and l are respectively. If elongation in copper wire is (  c ) and
the same
 c
(b) due to the error in the measurement of d is twice that elongation in steel wire is (s) , then the ratio  is
due to the error in the measurement of l. s
___ . (Young’s modulus for copper and steel are 1 × 1011

(c) due to the error in the measurement of l is twice that
N/m2 and 2 × 1011 N/m2, respectively)
due to the error in the measurement of d.
(2019)
(d) due to the error in the measurement of d is four times
that due to the error in the measurement of l.
2. One end of a horizontal thick copper wire of length 2L and
radius 2R is welded to an end of another horizontal thin
copper wire of length L and radius R. When the arrangement
is stretched by applying forces at two ends, the ratio of the
elongation in the thin wire to that in the thick wire is
(2013)
dP
(a) 0.25 (b) 0.50 5. A cubical solid aluminium (bulk modulus =  V = 70
dV
(c) 2.00 (d) 4.00
GPa) block has an edge length of 1 m on the surface of the
3. In plotting stress versus strain curves for two materials P earth. It is kept on the floor of a 5 km deep ocean. Taking
and Q, a student by mistake puts strain on the y-axis and the average density of water and the acceleration due to
stress on the x-axis as shown in the figure. Then the
gravity to be 103 kg m 3 and 10 ms 2 , respectively, the
correct statement(s) is (are). (2015)
change in the edge length of the block in mm is _____.
(2020)
Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book
Please share your valuable feedback by

scanning the QR code.
FLUID MECHANICS 37
FLUID MECHANICS
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID Chapter 11
MECHANICS 38
FLUID MECHANICS
1. INTRODUCTION TO FLUIDS
1.1 Introduction to Fluids and Fluid Pressure
 Pressure P at any point is defined as the normal force
per unit area.
dF
P
dA Fig. 11.2
 Pressure at two points which are at a depth separation
of h when fluid is at rest or moving with constant velocity
Fig. 11.1 is related by the expression
 The SI unit of pressure is the Pascal and
2
1 Pascal = 1 N/m
NOTE:
Fluid force acts perpendicular to any surface in the fluid,
no matter how that surface is oriented. Hence pressure,
has no intrinsic direction of its own, it is a scalar.
1.2 Relative Density or Specific Gravity

Fig. 11.3
 Relative density, or specific gravity, is the ratio of the
P2 – P1 = gh, where  is the density of liquid.
density (mass of a unit volume) of a substance to the
density of a given reference material. 2.2 Types of Pressure
 lf the relative density is exactly 1 then the densities are Atmospheric Pressure
equal: that is, equal volumes of the two substances
 It is the pressure exerted by the before earth earth’s
have the same mass. atmosphere. Normal atmospheric pressure at sea level is
5
1 atmosphere (atm) that is equal to 1.013 × 10 Pa.
substance
RD 
reference Gauge Pressure
 Gauge pressure is the difference between absolute
RD = relative density
pressure and atmospheric pressure.
substance = density of substance being measured
 If the gauge pressure is above the atmospheric pressure,
reference = density of the reference it’s positive.
 If the gauge pressure is below the atmospheric pressure,

it’s negative. Since gauge pressure readings include
2. HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
atmospheric pressure, gauge pressure can differ
2.1 Variation of Pressure
depending on weather and sea level.
 Pressure at two points in a horizontal plane or at same
level when the fluid is at rest or moving with constant  If you’re measuring pressure in an environment that
velocity is same. won’t be heavily affected by the atmosphere, you can
measure in pounds per square inch gauge .
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 39
Absolute Pressure 2.4 Hydrostatic paradox

Absolute pressure is gauge pressure plus atmospheric  Hydrostatic Paradox
pressure. An absolute pressure reading of zero can only be “Hydrostatic Paradox states that, the pressure at a
achieved in a perfect vacuum and only naturally occurs in certain horizontal level in the fluid is proportional to the
outer space. vertical distance to the surface of the fluid.”
 Hydrostatic Paradox is mathematically expressed as:
Ph
 Example
Three-vessel X, ‘Y, Z of different shape, containing a
different volume of liquid, but all exert the same
pressure(P) at all points at the same horizontal level.
3. FORCE EXERTED BY FLUIDS ON

THE WALLS OF THE CONTAINER
Fig. 11.4 3.1 Horizontal Force Exerted on the Walls of the Container
Force on Side Wall of a Vesssel
2.3 Manometer
A Manometer is a device to measure pressures. A common Consider a strip of width dx at a depth x from the surface of
simple manometer consists of a U shaped tube of glass the liquid as shown in figure, and on this strip the force due
filled with some liquid. Typically the liquid is mercury to the liquid:
because of its high density.
dF  xg  bdx (perpendicular to the wall) ....(i)
Fig. 11.6
Net force on the wall from eq (i).
h
F   dF   xg bdx
0
gbh 2
F
2
Fig. 11.5
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 40
Average Pressure on Side Wall According to principle of hydraulics,

The average pressure on the wall can be given as : F1 F2 A
P1  P2    F2  2 F1
A1 A2 A1
F
Paverage 
bh
5. BUOYANCY
 Buoyancy is the tendency of an object to float in a
1 gbh 2 1 fluid.
   gh
2 bh 2
 All liquids and gases in the presence of gravity exert an
Above equation shows that the average pressure on side upward force known as the buoyant force on any object
vertical wall is half of the net pressure at the bottom of the immersed in them.
vessel.  Buoyant Force
Torque on the Side Wall due to Fluid Pressure  The buoyant force is the upward force exerted on an
As shown in figure, due to the force dF, the side wall object wholly or partly immersed in a fluid.
experiences a torque about the bottom edge of the side  This upward force is also called Upthrust.
which is given as :  Due to the buoyant force, a body submerged partially
d  dF   h  x  or fully in a fluid appears to lose its weight, ie. appears
to be lighter.
 xgb dx  h  x  Following factors affect buoyant force:
 Density of the fluid
h
Thus net torque is    d   gb  hx  x dx

2
 Volume of the fluid displaced
0
 Local acceleration due to gravity

 h3 h3  5.2 Archimedes Principle
 gb   
2 3 Archimedes’ principle states that:
“The upward buoyant force that is exerted on a body
1 immersed in a fluid, whether partially or fully submerged,
 gbh 3
6 is equal to the weight of the fluid that the body displaces
and acts in the upward direction at the center of mass of
4. PASCAL’S LAW the displaced fluid”.
 A change in the pressure applied to an enclosed fluid is  Archimedes Principle Explanation
transmitted equally to every portion of the fluid in all
direction of to the walls of the containing vessel.
 There are a lot of practical applications of Pascal’s law
e.g Hydraulic lift
Fig. 11.8
If you look at the figure, the weight due to gravity is opposed
by the thrust provided by the fluid. The object inside the
Fig. 11.7 liquid only feels the total force acting on it as the weight.
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 41
Because the actual gravitational force is decreased by the From Newton’s second law
liquid’s upthrust, the object feels as though its weight is FB – mg = ma0 …(1)
reduced. The apparent weight is thus given by: or B = m (g + a0) …(2)
Equation (1) and (2) are similar to the corresponding
Apparent weight = Weight of object (in the air)
equations for unaccelerated liquid with the only differ-
- Thrust force (buoyancy) ence that g + a takes the role of g.
Archimedes’s principle tells us that the weight loss is equal
to the weight of liquid the object displaces.
6. ACCELERATED FLUIDS
 Archimedes Principle Formula
 Pressure Distribution in an Accelerated Frame
Archimedes law states that the buoyant force on an object
 We’ve seen that when a liquid is filled in a container,
is equal to the weight of the fluid displaced by the object.
generally its free surface remains horizontal as shown
Mathematically written as:
in figure 10.9 as for its equilibrium its free surface must
Fb    g  V be perpendicualr to gravity i.e. horizontal.
Where Fb is the buoyant force,  is the density of the fluid,  Due to same reason we said that pressure at every point
of a liquid layer parallel to its free surface remains
V is the submerged volume, and g is the acceleration due to
constant, Similar situation exist when liquid is in an
gravity.
accelerated frame as shown in figure.
Floatation  Due to acceleration of container, liquid filled in it
When a solid body is dipped into a fluid, the fluid exerts experiences a pseudo force relative to container and
and upward force of buoyancy on the solid. If the force of due to this the free surface of liquid which remains
buoyancy equals the weight of the solid, the solid will remain normal to the gravity now is filled as shown in figure 10.10
in equilibrium. This is called floatation. When the overall and normal to the direction of effective gravity.
density of the solid is smaller than the density of the fluid,
 Thus we can get the inclination angle of free surface of
the solid floats with a part of it in the fluid. The fraction
liquid from horizontal as
dipped is such that the weight of the displaced fluid equals
the weight of the solid. a
  tan 1   ....(i)
Center of Buoyancy g
The center of buoyancy is the point where if you were to
take all of the displaced fluid and hold it by that point it
would remain perfectly balanced, assuming you could hold
a fluid in a fixed shape. This point is also called the center
of mass. The center of buoyancy for an object is the center
of mass for the fluid it displaces.
Buoyant Force in an accelerated Fluid
Fig. 11.9 Fig. 11.10
Suppose a body is dipped inside a liquid of density 
 Now from equilibrium of liquid we can state that
placed in an elevator going up with an acceleration a 0 . Let pressure at every point in a liquid layer parallel to the
us calculate the force of buoyancy FB on this body. As was free Surface
done earlier, let us suppose that we substitute the body  Remains same for example if we find pressure at a point
into the liquid by the same liquid of equal volume. The A in the accelerated containers shown in figure 10.11 is
entire liquid becomes a homogenous mass and hence he given as
substituted liquid is at rest with respect to the rest of the
liquid. Thus, the substituted liquid is also going up with an PA  P0  h a 2  g 2 ...(ii)
acceleration a 0 together with the rest of the liquid.
Where h is the depth of the point A below the free surface
The forces acting on the substituted liquid are of liquid along effective gravity and P0 is the atmospheric
(a) The buoyant force FB and pressure acting on free surface of the liquid.
(b) The weight mg of the substituted liquid.
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 42
h g 2  a2
l2  h cos ec 
a
From eq. (iii) we have
PA  P0  h g 2  a 2
Here we can see that while evaluating pressure at point A

Fig. 11.11
from vertical direction we haven’t mentioned any thing
about pseudo acceleration as along vertical length l1 due
to pseudo acceleration at every point pressure must be
constant similarly in horizontal direction at every point due
to gravity pressure remains constant.
Using the above concept we can write pressure equations
for a static fluid. These pressure equations are very helpful
in solving numerical examples.
Fig. 11.12
6.2 Fluid in a Rotating Container
 The pressure at point A can also be obtained in an
 When tube is rotated, liquid starts to flow radially
another way as shown in figure 10.12.
outward. Let the shift of liquid mal as shown in
 If l1 and l2 are the vertical and horizontal distances of figure 10.14. Let the cross sectional area of tube be S.
point. Then pressure at point A will be
 Here the pressure difference between point A and B can
PA  P0  l1g  P0  l2 a ....(iii) be given by integrating the pressure difference across
an element of width dx, which is given as
Here l1g is the pressure at A due to the vertical height of
dP  dx  2 x
liquid above A and according to Pascal’s Law pressure at
A is given as Now integrating from A to B, we get
L
PB  PA   H 2 xdx 2 2
PA  P0  l1g ....(iv)
y

2
 L  y2 
here we can write l1 as
h a 2  g2
l1  h s ec  
g
or from equation (iv)
PA  P0  h a 2  g 2
Similarly if we consider the horizontal distance of point A

from free surface of liquid, which is l2 then du e to pseudo
acceleration of container the pressure at point A is given
as
PA  P0  l2 a ....(v)
Here l2 is given as
Fig. 11.13
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 43
If 2  1 then P2  P1 and the junction of the liquid can

not remain in equilibrium, it will be displaced to the left as-
shown in figure 10.16. The displacement of the junction is
such that the pressure on the two sides at every point must
be same, then only the liquid remains in equilibrium.
In figure 10.16, if x be the displacement of the junction, the

pressure at the bottom from the two sides must be same.
Thus now P1  P2 , here P1 and P2 are given as
P1  P0  l1 g  x2 g
P2  P0   l  x  2 g
Fig. 11.14 On equation P1 and P2 we get the value of x.

Thus pressure at point C can be given as
PC  PB  yg
8. TYPES OF FLUID FLOWS
and at point A, pressure is atmospheric, thus we have
 Steady Flow (Stream Line Flow)
The flow in which the velocity of fluid particles crossing

2 2
PC 
2
 L  y 2   0  yg a particular point is the same at all the times. Thus, each
particle takes the same path as taken by a previous
particle through that point.
7. MISCELLANEOUS CASES IN FLUID STATICS
7.1 U-tube problems
Consider the situation shown in figure 10.15, a U tube,
filled with equal volumes of two different liquids 1 and 2.
In case-1, the pressure at the left of the bottom is
P  P0  l1 g
At the right pressure is
Fig. 11.17
P2  P0  l2 g
 Line of flow
It is the path taken by a particle in flowing liquid. In case of a
steady flow, it is called streamline. Two streamlines can
never intersect. Streamlines do not intersect each other
 Turbulent flow
It is type of fluid flow in which the fluid undergoes
irregular fluctuations, or mixing, in contrast to laminar
flow, in which the fluid moves in smooth paths or layers.
In turbulent flow the speed of the fluid at a point is
continuously undergoing changes in both magnitude
and direction. The flow of wind and rivers is generally
turbulent in this sense, even if the currents are gentle.
The air or water swirls and eddies while its overall bulk
Fig. 11.15 Fig. 11.16 moves along a specific direction.
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 44
 A1 V1 = A2 V2
 mass flows rate = AV
(where  is the density of the liquid.)
Fig. 11.18  Thus AV = constant, velocity of liquid is smaller in codes

parts and velocity is smaller in larger part of the body.
Reynold’s number
Thrust Force
 The stability of laminar flow is maintained by viscous
forces. It is observed, however that laminar or steady The total normal force exerted by a liquid at rest on a surface
flow is disrupted when the rate of flow is large. Irregular, in contact with it is called fluid thrust. SI unit fluid thrust is
unsteady motion, turbulence, sets in at high flow rates. newton (N) and is a vector quantity.
 Reynolds numbers defined as a dimensionless number
Force by fluid on bent pipe corners
whose value gives one an approximate idea, whether
the flow rate would be turbulent or laminar. Forces on pipe bend due to slug flow
When fluid flows through a pipe bend or elbow, the fluid changes
vD
Re  direction and hence there is a change in momentum. As per
 Newton’s Second Law: ‘’The rate of change of momentum of a
body is equal to the net force acting on the body’’. Slug forces are
where,  = the density of the fluid flowing with a
generated when there is ‘two-phase’ (gaseous and liquid phase)
speed v. fluid flowing through pipes and slugs of liquid that are formed
D = the diameter of the tube. intermittently travel at relatively high velocity.
 = the coefficient of viscosity of the fluid. The liquid slug can cause large reaction forces at changes in
direction such as elbows or tee connections. High slug forces
 It is found that flow is streamline or laminar for Re less
have the potential to cause large pipe deflection or damage to the
than 1000. The flow is turbulent for Re > 2000. The flow supports if they are not designed to withstand them. The slug
becomes unsteady for Re between 1000 and 2000. load lasts until the slug has traversed the elbow and then drops to
near zero. The time duration of the load is calculated as slug
Note:- length divided by the fluid velocity.
For lower density and higher viscosity fluids laminar flow
is more probable.
9. EQUATION OF CONTINUITY
In a time t, the volume of liquid entering the tube of flow in
a steady flow is A1 V1 t. The same volume must flow out as Fig. 11.20
the liquid is incompressible. The volume flowing out in t is Let us assume a horizontal pipe bend turning through and
A2 V2 t. It is a consequence of conservation of mass. angle  as shown in figure below..
The following details apply:
V = Velocity of flow
Q = Flow Rate
 = Fluid Density
A = Cross-section area of pipe ID
 = Change in direction at Bend
Fig. 11.19
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 45
The forces exerted on the bend by the flowing fluid are Fx  It is a mathematical consequences of low of conservation
and Fy respectively. of energy an fluid dynamics.
Force in X-direction
Net force acting on the bend in x-direction (Fx) = Rate of
change of momentum in x-direction
= Mass Flow × (Final velocity in x-direction – Initial velocity
in x-direction)
= Density (  ) × Flow Rate (Q) × (Vcos  – V) = (  ) × (Q)
(Vcos  – V)
Net force acting on the bend in x-direction
(Fx) =  QV(cos  – 1) ….(1) Fig. 11.21
Force in Y-direction  Bernoulli’s equation is valid only for incompressible
Net force acting on the bend in x-direction (Fy) = Rate of steady flow of a fluid with no viscosity.
change on momentum in y-direction
= Mass Flow × (Final velocity in y-direction – Initial 11. APPLICATION OF FLUID DYNAMICS
velocity in y-direction)
= Density (  ) × Flow rate (Q) × (Vsin  – 0) = (  ) × (Q) 11.1 Velocity of Efflux
× (Vsin  )
Net force acting on the bend in y-direction
(Fy) =  Q(Vsin  ) …..(2)
Resultant Force acting on the Bend
The resultant force acting on the bend
  Fy 
2
 FR    Fx 
2
…(3)
Solving equation (3) gives

The resultant force actin on the bend
 FR   QV 2 1 – cos   …(4)
Substituting Q = A × V
 FR   AV 2 2 1 – cos   …(5) Fig. 11.22
For 90° elbow or bend, cos   0 hence Let us find the velocity with which liquid comes out of a
hole at a depth h below the liquid surface.
Using Bernoulli’s theorem,
 FR   AV 2 2 …(6)
1 2 1 2
PA  vA  gh A  PB  v B  gh B
10. BERNOULLI’S EQUATION 2 2
In a stream line flow of an ideal fluid, the sum of pressure 1 2 1 2

 Patm  v  gh  Patm  v  0
energy per unit volume, potential energy per unit volume 2 A 2
and kinetic energy per unit volume is always constant at all Note:
cross section of the liquid.
PB = Patm, because we have opened the liquid to atmosphere)
ρV 2
P+ρgh+ =Constant 2 2
2  v = vA + 2gh
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 46
Using equation of continuity 2 2

Q Q
   2 hg (Q = av)
AvA = av 2
a2
2
a1
A: area of cross-section of vessel
a: area of hole 2hg

 Q  a1a 2 2 2
a  a2
1
2 a2 2
 v  v  2gh Here Q is the rate of fluid flow
A2
11.3 Magnus Effect
2gh  Magnus effect is described as a phenomenon that is
 v 2 2
 2gh (if the hole is very small) mainly characterized by a spinning object that is moving
1 a / A
through fluid wherein there is relative motion between
the spinning body and the fluid.
11.2 Venturi Meter
 When the Magnus effect takes place, the path of the
This is an instrument for measuring the rate of flow of fluids.
spinning object is usually deflected in a way that is
completely different from when the object is not
spinning. The deflection that occurs can be described
by the difference in pressure of the fluid that is present
on the opposite sides of the spinning object.
 In simple terms, there is a generation of a sidewise force

on a spinning object. Magnus effect is greatly affected
by the speed of rotation or we can say that it is
dependent on it.
 The Magnus effect is why a football player is able to

bend a football into the goal around a 5-person wall
and the movement of the cricket ball as seen in
conventional swing bowling.
Fig. 11.23
If PA is pressure at A and PB is pressure at B,
PA – PB = hg
[h : difference of heights of liquids of density  in vertical

tubes]
If v1 is velocity at a and v2 is velocity at B
Q = a1v1 = a2v2 [equation of continuity]
2 2
v1 v
Pa    Pa   2 [Bernoulli’s Theorem]
2 2
2 2
2
 v 2  v1 
2
 Pa  PB   hg
 
Fig. 11.24
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 47
11.4 Aerodynamic lift 12.2 Stoke’s Law

 When a solid moves through a viscous medium, its
Dynamic lift is the force that acts on a body by virtue of its
motion is opposed by a viscous force depending on the
motion through a fluid. It can be defined as:
velocity and shape and size of the body.
Dynamic lift is the force which acts on a body such as an  The viscous drag on a spherical body of radius r, moving
airplane wing hydro fall or spinning Ball by virtue of its with velocity v, in a viscous medium of viscosity  is given
motion through a fluid. by
Fviscous = 6rv
This relation is called Stoke’s law.
12. VISCOSITY
12.3 Terminal Velocity
The property of a fluid by virtue of which it opposes It is maximum constant velocity acquired by the body while
the relative motion between its different layers is known falling freely in a viscous medium.
as viscosity and the force that is into play is called the viscous
2r    s  g
2
force. vr 
9
12.1 Newton’a Law of Viscocity Where r is raduis of body  is density of body,  is density
of liquid and  is coefficient of viscosity.
It defines relationship between the shear strers and rate of
fluid subjected to an externals strers.
where  is a constant depending upon the nature of the
liquid and is called the coefficient of viscosity and velocity
dv
gradient =  dy
–2
S.I. unit of coefficient of viscosity is Pa.s or Nsm .
CGS unit of viscocity is poise. (1 Pa.s = 10 Poise)
 Viscous force is given by :
dv
F  A
dy
Fig. 11.26
12.4 Poiseuille’s Formula
This law states that the flow of liquid depend on variables
such as length of tube (L) radius(r), pressure difference (P)
and coefficient of visocity 
Poiseuille studied the stream-line flow of liquid in capillary
tubes.
Volume of liquid coming out of tube per second in given by
4
 Pr
V
8
Fig. 11.25
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 48
13. SURFACE TESNSION  The adhesion and cohesion forces, both vary in their
strengths. For example, if cohesion forces between the
13.1 Cohesion and Adhesion water molecules are stronger than that of the adhesion
 As for the definitions, the tendency of two or more forces between them, then the individual molecules will
different molecules to bond with each other is known atiract towards each other thus resulting in settling. In
as Adhesion, whereas the force of attraction between case, the adhesion forces of the water surfaces are
the same molecules is known as Cohesion. stronger than that of the cohesion forces of the water
molecules. then the water tends to disperse.
 The adhesion forces can be one of the results of
electrostatic forces which are exerted on different
substances.
 The cohesive forces are associated with Van der Waals

forces and hydrogen bonding that cause liquids such
as water to withstand the separation.
 When a glass surface is poured with water, both

adhesive and the cohesive forces act on the surface of
the water. A strong adhesive force tends the liquid to
spread over the surface whereas a strong cohesive force
is responsible for the formation of water droplets on
the water surface. Fig. 11.27 Fig. 11.28 Fig. 11.29
DIFFERENCE BETWEENADHESIONAND COHESION
Sr. no. Adhesion Cohesion

1. Adhesion happens between two dissimilar When two similar substances or molecules face the force of
molecules or substances attraction this force is known as cohesion force.
2. Adhesion is generally the force of attraction Cohesion force is rampant among water molecules
present between the water molecules and the
walls of xylem vessels.
3. Capillary action and meniscus (the curved Surface tension meniscus and capilary action are the effects
surface which is formed by any liquid in a of cohesion.
4. Adhesion is caused by electrostatic or Cohesion is caused by hydrogen bonding and Van der Walls forces
mechanical forces that exist among two kinds
of different substances.
5. A strong adhesion force causes the liquid to A strong force of cohesion forms water droplets on any surface
spread all over the surface
13.2 Introduction to surface tension Surface tension is a property of liquid where liquid surface
The surface tension of a liquid is defined as the force per behaves like a stretched membrane which have the tendency
unit length in the plane of the liquid surface at right angles to contract tending to have minimum possible area at the
to either side of an imaginary line drawn on that surface. surface. The property is called surface tension.
2
F Unit of surface tension in MKS system : N/m, J/m
So, S  where S = surface tension of liquid. 2
 CGS system  Dyne/cm, erg/cm
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 49
13.3 Surface Energy 16. CAPILLARITY

In order to increase the surface area, the work has to be
 A very narrow glass tube with fine bore and open at
done over the surface of the liquid. This work done is stored
both ends is known as capillary tube. When a capillary
in the liquid surface as its potential energy. Hence the surface
tube in dipped in a liquid, then liquid will rise or fall in
energy of a liquid can be defined as the excess potential
the tube, this action is termed as capillarity.
energy per unit area of the liquid surface.
Fig. 11.30
W = SA, where A = increase in surface area.

Note:
(1) Work done in formation of drop of radius
2
r = surface tension × A = 4r S
(2) Work done in formation of soap bubble Fig. 11.31
2
= 2 × surafce tension × A = 8r S
2Scos  2S
h 
r g Rg
14. EXCESS PRESSURE where, S = surface tension,
 Excess pressure in a liquid drop or bubble in a liquid is  = angle of contact,
2S r = radius of capillary tube,
P , S is surface tension
R R = radius of meniscus, and
4S
 Excess pressure in a soap bubble is P =  = density of liquid.
R
(because it has two free surfaces)  Capillary rise in a tube of insufficient length :
If the actual height to which a liquid will rise in a capillary

15. ANGLE OF CONTACT tube is ‘h’ then a capillary tube of length less than ‘h’
can be called a tube of “insufficient length”.
 The angle between the tangent to the liquid surface at
the point of contact and the solid surface inside the In such a case, liquid rises to the top of the capillary
liquid is called the angle of contact. It depends upon tube of length l (l < h) and adjusts the radius of curvature
nature of liqiud and solid in contact. of its meniscus until the excess pressure is equalised by
the pressure of liquid column of length l. (Note liquid
 If the glass plate is immersed in mercury, the surface is does not overflow).
curved and the mercury is depressed below. Angle of
2
contact is obtuse for mercury.   g ... (i)
 If the plate is dipped in water with its side vertical, the r
water is drawn-up along the plane and assumes the If r were the actual radius of curvature,
curved shape as shown. Angle of contact is acute for 2
water.   h g ...(ii)
r
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 50
Comparing (i) and (ii)
Fig. 10.32
2
 r   hr
g
hr
 r  i.e. radius of curvature r’ can be calculated.

Adhesion > Cohesion Adhesion = Cohesion Adhesion < Cohesion
1. Liquid will wet the solid. 1. Critical. 1. Liquid will not wet the solid.
2. Meniscus is concave. 2. Meniscus is plane. 2. Meniscus is convex.
3. Angle of contact is acute  < 90°). 3. Angle of contact is 90°. 3. Angle of contact is obtuse  > 90°).
4. Pressure below the meniscus is 4. Pressure below the 4. Pressure below the meniscus
lesser than above it by (2T/r), meniscus is same as more then above it by (2T/r),
i.e. P  P0  2T . above it, i.e. P = P0. i.e., P  P0  2T .

r r
5. In capillary there will be rise. 5. No capillarity. 5. In capillary there will be fall
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 51
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example - 1
0.84
The two thigh bones (femurs) each of cross-sectional area or h1 = 1.2 h2 = 0.7 h2
2
10 cm support the upper part of a human body of mass
40 kg. Estimate the average pressure sustained by the From (i),
femurs. h2 – 0.7 h2 = 9
2
g = 10 m/s . or
0.3 h2 = 9 or h2 = 30 cm
Sol. Total cross-sectional area,
and h1 = 0.7 × 30 = 21 cm
2 –4 2
A = 2 × 10 cm = 20 × 10 m , F = mg Pressure at the common surface
F = 40 kg wt = 40 × 10 N = 400 N = h22g
3
Average pressure, = 0.30 × (0.84 × 10 ) × 10
= 2520 pa
F 400
P= A
5
= 2 × 10 pa. Example - 4
20 104
Determine height h of oil in the U tube as shown in Fig.
Example - 2 Density of oil = 0.9 g/cc ; Density of liquid is 1.6 g/cc and
What is the pressure on a swimmer 10 m below the surface density of mercury. = 13.6 g/cc.
–2 5
of lake ? g = 10 ms ; atmospheric pressure = 1.01 × 10 Pa.
Sol. Here, h = 10 m,
5
Pa = 1.01 × 10 Pa
 = Density of water =1000 kg m3

5
Total pressure = Pa +  gh = 1.01 × 10 + 1000 × 10 × 10
5
= 2.01 × 10 Pa = 2 atm.
Example - 3 Sol. In equilibrium state, the pressure of liquid at the same level
Two liquids of specific gravity 1.2 and 0.84 are poured into must be equal. Taking pressure at level C in both arms of U
the limbs of a U tube until the difference in levels of their tube, we have
upper surfaces is 9 cm. What will be heights of their Pressure due to h cm of oil + pressure due to (20 – h) cm of
respective surfaces above the common surface in U tube ? mercury
What is the pressure at the common surface ? = pressure of 20 cm of liquid
-2
(g = 10 ms ). i.e., h × 0.9 × g + (20 – h) × 13.6 × g = 20 × 1.6 × g
Sol. Let h1, h2 be the heights of denser and lighter liquids above or 0.9 h + 272 - 13.6 h = 32
the common level. Then or 12.7 h = 240
h2 – h1 = 9.0 cm ...(i) or
At the common surface , h11g = h22g 240
h = 12.7 = 18.9 cm
i.e., h1 × 1.2 × g = h2 × 0.84 × g
FLUID MECHANICS 52
3
Example - 5 (b) Gauge pressure, P = P – Pa = g h = (1.03 × 10 ) × 10 × 1000
5
The vessel shown in Fig. has two sections of area of cross = 103 × 10 Pa.
section A1 and A2. A liquid of density  fills both the (c) The pressure outside the submarine is P = Pa + g h and the
sections, upto a height h in each. Neglect atmospheric pressure inside the submarine is Pa.
pressure. Pressure difference on the window of the submarine = P – Pa
Find (a) the pressure at the base of vessel = g h.
(b) the force exerted by the liquid on the base of the vessel Force on the window = pressure difference × area of window
5 5
(c) the downward force exerted by the walls of the vessel = g h × A = 103 × 10 × (0.04) = 4.12 × 10 N.
at the level B. Example - 7
In a car lift, compressed air exerts a force F1 on a small
piston having a radius of 5.0 cm. This pressure is
transmitted to a second piston of radius 10.0 cm. If the
mass of the car to be lifted is 1350 kg, calculate F1. What is
the pressure necessary to accomplish this task?
–2
(g = 9.8 ms )
5
Sol. Here, F1 = ? ; r1 = m,
100
m = 1350 kg, F2 = 1350 × 9.8 N ;
10
r2 = m
Sol. (a) Pressure at the base of vessel is the pressure due to 100
height of liquid column = h + h = 2. It is given by
F1 F2 a  r2
As,  or F1  a F1   r 2 F2
1 1
P = 2 h g. a1 a 2 2 2
(b) The force exerted by the liquid on the base of the vessel,
r2 (5 / 100) 2
F = P × A2 = 2 h g A2 or F1  r 2 F2  (10 / 100)2  1350  9.8  3307 N
1
2
(c) Since the liquid exerts equal pressure in all directions, so
the force on the wall of vessel at level B in action is equal to F1 F1 3307 5
Pressure, P   = 4.21 × 10 Pa
the downward force exerted by the wall of vessel on the a1 r12 (22 / 7)(5 / 100) 2
liquid at level B
Example - 8
= Pressure × (A2 - A1) = h g × (A2 - A1) –3
A piece of pure gold of density 19.3 g cm is suspected to
Example - 6 be hollow inside. It weighs 38.250 g in air and 33.865 g in
At the depth of 1000 m in an ocean (a) what is the absolute water. Calculate the volume of the hollow portion of the
pressure ? (b) What is the gauge pressure ? (c) Find the gold, if any :
force acting on the window of area 20 cm × 20 cm of a –3
submarine at this depth, the interior of which is maintained Sol. Here, density of pure gold  = 19.3 g cm ;
at sea-level atmospheric pressure. The density of sea water
3 –3 –2 Mass of gold piece, M = 38.250 g
is 1.03 × 10 kg m , g = 10 ms . Atmospheric pressure
5
= 1.01 × 10 Pa.  Volume of the gold piece,
Sol. Here, M 38.25 3 3
5 3 –3 V =   19.3 cm = 1.982 cm
Pa = 1.01 × 10 Pa ; = 1.03 × 10 kg m ;
2
h = 1000 m; A = 0.20 × 0.20 = 0.04 m . mass of gold piece in water, = 33.865 g
(a) Absolute pressure P = Pa + g h Therefore apparent loss in weight of the gold piece in water
5 3 5
= 1.01 × 10 + 1.03 × 10 × 10 × 1000 = 104.01 × 10 Pa. = 38.250 – 33.865 = 4.385 g.
FLUID MECHANICS 53
–3
As, density of water is 1 g cm , therefore, the volume of Example - 11
4.385 3
(a) There is a rectangular frame of wire measuring
displaced water = = 4.385 cm 20 cm × 13 cm. Calculate (i) the side of the square and
1
(ii) radius of the circle, which will have the same perimeter
 Volume of the hollow portion of the gold = 4.385 – 1.982 as the rectangular frame. (b) Show that of the three, the
3
= 2.403 cm circle has the maximum surface area.
Example - 9
Sol. (a) Perimeter of the rectangular frame = (20 + 13)2 = 66 cm
The tension in a string holding a solid block below the
Let l be the side of the square and r be the radius of the
surface of a liquid (of density greater than that of solid) as
square having the same perimeter as that of rectangular
shown in Fig. is T0, when the system is at rest. What will
frame.
be the tension in the string if the system has upward
acceleration a ? (i) For square, the perimeter of square = 4 l = 66 cm
or l = 66/4 = 16.5 cm
(ii) For circle, the perimeter of circle = 2 r = 66
66 66
or r =  = 10.5 cm.
2 2  22 / 7
(b) Area of rectangle = 20 × 13 = 260 sq. cm.

Area of square = 16.5 × 16.5 = 272.25 sq. cm.
22
Area of circle = r 
2 2
Sol. Let V be the volume of block of density . Let be the × (10.5) = 346.5 sq. cm
7
density of liquid. Mass of block, m = V .
Hence, out of the three, circle encloses the maximum area.
Initially for the equilibrium of block, we have
Example - 12
upward thrust = V g = T0 + V g or T0 = V ()g
If excess of pressure inside a soap bubble of radius 1 cm is
When the lift is accelerated upwards, then g  g + a, balanced by that due to column of oil (sp. gravity 0.8) 2 mm
so, T = V ()(g + a) high, find surface tension of soap bubble.
Therefore, T/T0 = [(g + a)/g] or T = T0[(g + a)/g] –2 3 –3
Sol. Here, r = 1 cm = 10 m ; density of oil,  = 0.8 × 10 kg m
–3
Example - 10 ; h = 2 mm = 2 × 10 m
–3
A wire ring of 30.0 mm radius resting flat on the surface of Pressure due to 2 mm column of oil, p = h  g = (2 × 10 )
3
the liquid is raised. The pull required is 3.03 g f more, before (0.8 × 10 ) × 9.8 = 2 × 0.8 × 9.8 Pa
the film breaks than it is after. Calculate the surface tension
4S
of the liquid. In case of a soap bubble, p = r
Sol. Here, r = 30.0 mm = 3 cm ; F = 3.03 g = 3.03 × 980 dyne. Since

pr 2  0.8  9.8 102 –2 –1
the liquid is touching the ring, both inside as well as outside, or S =  = 3.92 × 10 Nm
4 4
therefore, force acting on the ring due to surface tension is
given by Example - 13
F’ = 2 (S × circumference of ring) = 2 (S × 2  r) Find the height to which water will rise in a capillary tube of
–3 –1
1.5 mm diameter. Surface tension of water is 7.4 × 10 Nm .
22
=4Sr=4×S× × 3 dyne –3
7 Sol. Here, h = ? ; r = D/2 = 1.5/2 = 0.75 mm = 0.75 × 10 m ;
–3 –1 3 –3
S = 7.4 × 10 Nm . For water,  = 10 kg m and angle of
22 o
As F’ = F  4 × S × × 3 = 3.03 × 980 contact  = 0
7
2Scos  2  7.4 103  cos 0o
3.03  980  7 Now, h =  = 0.0021m
or S= = 78.76 dyne/cm. rg (0.75 103 ) 103  9.8
4  22  3
FLUID MECHANICS 54
The terminal velocity of a copper ball of radius 2.0 mm Water flows through a horizontal pipe of which the cross-
o –1
falling through a tank of oil at 20 C is 6.5 cm s . Compute the section is not constant. The pressure is 1 cm of mercury
–1
o 3 –3
viscosity of the oil at 20 C. Density of oil is 1.5 × 10 kg m , where the velocity is 0.35ms . Find the pressure (in terms
–1
3
density of copper is 8.9 × 10 kg/m .
3 of mercury column) at a point where the velocity is 0.65ms .
–2 –1 –3
Sol. Here, v = 6.5 × 10 ms ; r = 2.0 × 10 m ; g = 9.8 m/s ,
2 Sol. At one point,
3
P1 = 1 cm of Hg = 0.01 m of Hg = 0.01 × (13.6 × 10 ) × 9.8 Pa ;
3 3
 = 8.9 × 10 kg/m . –1
v1 = 0.35 ms
3 3
 = 1.5 × 10 kg/m –1 3 –3
At another point, P2 = ?, v2 = 0.65 ms and  = 10 kg m .
2r 2 (  ) g 2  (2.0 103 )2  (8.9 1.5) 103  9.8 According to Bernoulli’s theorem
  
9v 9  (6.5 102 )
1 1
P1  v12  P2  v22
–1
= 9.9 × 10 Pa–s. 2 2
Example - 15 1
or P 2 = P1 –  (v 22  v12 )
A rain drop of radius 0.3 mm has a terminal velocity in air 2
–5 –2
1 m/s. The viscosity of air is 18 × 10 dyne cm s. Find the
3 1 3 2 2
viscous force on the rain drops in newton. = 0.01 × 13.6 × 10 × 9.8 – 2 × 10 × [(0.65) – (0.35) ]
–3 –1
Sol. Here, r = 0.3 mm = 0.3 × 10 m ; v = 1 ms 1182.8
 = 18 × 10–5 dyne cm–2 s = 18 × 10–5 Pa-s. = 1182.8 Pa = = 0.00887 m of Hg
9.8  (13.6 103 )
22 Example - 19
Viscous force, F = 6   r v = 6 ×
–6
× (18 × 10 )
7 Find the velocity of efflux of water from an orifice near the
–3 –5
× (0.3 ×10 ) × 1 = 1.018 × 10 N. bottom of a tank in which pressure is 500 gf/sq cm above
atmosphere.
Example - 16
At what speed will the velocity head of stream of water be 500 2 –2
equal to 40 cm ? Sol. Pressure at orifice, P = 500 gf/sq cm = × 9.8 × (100) Nm
1000
–2
= 500 × 98 Nm
v2
Sol. Here, velocity head, = 40 cm Let h be the depth of orifice below the surface.
2g
P 500  98
As, P = h  g,  h =  g  3
–1
 v  2g  40  2  980  40 = 280 cm s =5m
10  9.8
Example - 17
–1
At what speed will the velocity of a stream of water be The velocity of effux, v = 2 gh = 2  9.8  5 = 9.893 ms .
–2
equal to 20 cm of mercury column. Taking g = 10 ms . Example - 20
A bottle full of a liquid is fitted with a tight cork. Explain
Sol. Here, velocity head = 20 cm of Hg = 20 × 13.6 cm of water ; why a slight blow on the cork may be sufficient to break
–2 –2
g = 10 ms = 1000 cm s . the bottle.
v2
As velocity head = Sol. If the blow given to a cork of area of cross-section a exerts
2g a force F on cork, then increase in pressure on liquid is
= F/a. According to Pascal’s law, the increase in pressure at
v2
 20 × 13.6 = one part of liquid is communicated equally at all other parts
2 1000 of liquid. So the increase in force on the area A of the vessel
–1
is F’ = (F/a) A. Since A > > a, so F’ > > F. As a result of which
or v= 20 13.6  2 1000 = 737.56 cm/s = 7.3756 ms the bottle may break.
FLUID MECHANICS 55
Example - 21 of a large iron ship, the weight of water displaced by the

A balloon filled with helium does not rise in air indefinitely ship is higher than the weight of ship, hence the ship floats
but halts after a certain height. (Neglect winds). in water.
Example - 26
Sol. In the beginning the balloon filled with helium rises in air
Does Archimede’s principle hold in a vessel in free fall ?
because weight of the air displaced by balloon is more than
the weight of the balloon and helium gas filled inside balloon. Sol. Archimede’s principle does not hold good in this situation
We know that the density of air and the value of acceleration as the vessel in free fall is in a condition of weightlessness,
due to gravity decreases with height. Due to it, the weight where the buoyant force accounting for Archimede’s
of air decreases at greater height. The balloon halts at such principle does not exist.
a height where the weight of the air displaced just equals to
Example - 27
the weight of helium gas and the balloon.
A block of wood floats in a bucket of water in a lift. Will the
Example - 22
block sink more or less if the lift starts accelerating up ?
The force required by a man to move his limbs immersed in
water is smaller than the force for the same movement in air. Sol. When the lift starts accelerating up, the block of wood will
float at the same level in a bucket of water in a lift. It is so
Sol. The upthurst on the limbs of a man is more when immersed because the equilibrium of floating body is unaffected by
in water than in air. As a result of it, the effective weight of variation is acceleration due to gravity ‘g’. However, thrust
limbs of a man is less in water than in air. Hence the force of liquid and weight of body both depend on g and will
required to move his limbs is less in water than that in air. increase equally.
Ice floats in water with about nine tenths of its volume A shot is obtained by pouring molten lead through narrow
submerged. What is the fractional volume submerged for holes into water from certain height. The falling lead
an ice berg floating on a fresh water lake of a (hypothetical) solidifies and takes the form of small spheres. Explain the
planet whose gravity is ten times that of the earth ? phenomenon.
Sol. The fractional volume of ice submerged in water is Sol. The molten lead comes out of a narrow hole in the form of a
independent of the value of acceleration due to gravity ‘g’. fine stream. When it falls from a height into a vessel
So, it is nine tenths on new planet also. containing cold water, it breaks into spherical drops due to
thrust of water and surface tension. These are cooled on
Example - 24
entering the water and thus solidify into small spheres.
What is the fractional volume of an ice cube in a pail of
Example - 29
water produced in an enclosure which is freely falling
under gravity ? Why does oil spread over the surface of water ?
Sol. For a free fall, the effective value of acceleration due to Sol. Surface tension of oil is less than that of water. When oil is
gravity is zero. Therefore, there will be no weight of ice cube dropped on the surface of water, the force of surface tension
and hence no upward thrust on ice cube. As a result of it, of water being larger than that of oil, stretches the oil drops
the ice cube can float with any value of fractional volume on all sides. Hence, the oil spreads over the surface of water.
submerged. Example - 30
Example - 25 Why the tip of the nib of a pen is split ?
Explain why a small iron needle sinks in water while a
large iron ship floats ? Sol. The tip of the nib of a pen is split in order to provide a
capillary which helps the ink to rise to the end of the nib and
Sol. A body will float in a liquid if the weight of the liquid enables it to write continuously.
displaced by the immersed part of the body in liquid is equal
to weight of body. In case of iron needle, the weight of Example - 31
water displaced by needle is much less than the weight of It is better to wash the clothes in hot soap solution.
needle, hence, the iron needle sinks into the water. In case Why ?
FLUID MECHANICS 56
Sol. The soap solution has less surface tension as compared to Sol. Because in strameline flow all particles maiontain their
ordinary water and its surface tension decreases further on constant speed and the relative separation between them
heating. The hot soap solution can, therefore, spread over Example - 37
large surface area and as such it has more wetting power. It
What happens to the pressure of an ideal liquid when it
is on account of this property that hot soap solution can
passes through a region where its speed increases ?
penetrate and clean the clothes better than the ordinary water.
Example - 32 Sol. The pressure of an ideal liquid decreases when it passes
Why surface tension concept is only held for liquids and through a region where it speed increases, according to
not for gases which are also fluids ? Bernoulli’s theorem.
Example - 38
Sol. We know that the intermolecular distance between the gas
molecules is quite large as compared to that of liquid. Due The shapes of cars and planes are streamlined. Why ?
to it, the forces of cohesion in the gas molecules are very
Sol. When a body moves through a fluid, its motion is opposed
small and these are quite large for liquids. Therefore, the
concept of surface tension is applicable to liquids but not by the force of fluid friction, which increases with the speed
to gases. of the body. When cars and planes, move through air, their
motion is opposed by the air friction, which in turn, depend
Example - 33 upon the shape of the body. It is due to this reason that the
Rain drops falling under gravity do not acquire very high cars or planes are given such shapes (known as stream-
velocity. Why ? lined shapes) so that air friction is minimum. Rather the
movement of air layers on the upper and lower side of
Sol. When a rain drop falls under gravity through a viscous
streamlined shaped body provides a lift which helps in
medium (say air) a viscous drag force acts on it in a direction
increasing the speed of the car.
opposite to that of motion. According to Stoke’s law, this
viscous drag force goes on increasing with the increasing Example - 39
velocity of the drop till a stage comes when the total Why two holes are made to empty an oil tin ?
downward force on the drop is just balanced by the upward
viscous drag force. At this stage, there is no net force to Sol. When oil comes out through a tin with one hole, the pressure
accelerate rain drop. Hence the rain drop starts moving with inside the tin becomes less than the atmospheric pressure.
uniform velocity. This velocity is called ‘terminal velocity’. This stops the oil from flowing out. When two holes are
Example - 34 made in the tin, air keeps on entering the tin through the
A bigger rain drop falls faster than smaller one. Why ? other hole and maintains pressure inside.
Example - 40
Sol. When the rain drops of different sizes fall under gravity,
An air bubble of 1 mm diameter rises in water with terminal
they ultimately move with their terminal velocities due to –3
velocity. If viscosity of water is 1.0 × 10 decapoise and
viscous drag force of air. As terminal velocity of a drop –3
density of air is 1.3 kgm , calculate the terminal velocity of
varies as the square of its radius, therefore a bigger drop
the air bubble.
will have greater terminal velocity and hence fall faster than
a small rain drop.
Sol. Given  = 1.0 × 10 decapoise, density of water  = 10 kg
–3 3
Example - 35 –3 –3
m , diameter of bubble, d = 1 mm = 1 × 10 m
Machine parts are jammed in winter. Why ?
2 r 2 (  )g
Sol. A lubricating oil is generally used between the various parts Using the formula, V =
9 
of a machine to reduce the friction. In winter, since the
temperature is low, the viscosity of oil between the machine
2 (0.5 103 )2 (103  1.3) 9.8
parts increases considerably, resulting in jamming of the We have v 
9 1.0 103
machine parts.
–1
Example - 36 = 0.54 ms .
Two stream lines of fluid can not cut each other. Why ?
FLUID MECHANICS 57
A cylinder of height 20 m is completely filled with water. Why does mercury not wet glass ?
–1
Find the velocity of efflux of water (in ms ) through a
small hole on the side wall of the cylinder near its bottom. Sol. This is because the force of cohesion between mercury
–2
Given g = 10ms . molecules is stronger than the force of adhesion between
the molecules of glass and mercury.
–2
Sol. Given h = 20 m, g = 10ms , Velocity of efflux = ?
Example - 48
Velocity of efflux = 2gh Explain the working of mercury barometer to measure the
atmospheric pressure.
–1
2 10  20 = 20 ms .
Example - 42
How can we suck soft drink through a straw ?
Sol. When we suck the air in the straw, the Pressure inside straw
becomes less than atmospheric preasure. Due to this presure
difference, the soft drink rises up through the straw.
Example - 43
Why does water not flow out of dropper unless the rubber
ball is pressed ?
Sol. The upward air pressure at the tip of the dropper is equal to Sol. (i) The pressure of the atmosphere at any point is equal to
the pressure of the liquid column in it. When we press the the weight of a column per air of unit cross sectional area
rubber ball, the downward pressure increases making the extending from that point to the top of the atmosphere.
liquid flow out.
(ii) A long glass tube closed at one end and filled with mercury
Example - 44 is inverted into a trough of mercury. This device is known
A block of wood is floating in a lake. What is the apparent as mercury barometer.
weight of the floating block ? (iii) The space above the mercury column in the tube contains
only mercury. Vapour whose pressure P is so small that it
Sol. The apparent weight of the block is equal to zero because
may be neglected.
the weight of the block acting vertically downward is
balanced by the buoyant force acting, on the block upward. (iv) The pressure inside the column at point A must be equal to
the pressure at point B which is at the same level.
Example - 45
 Pa = gh
Why is wet ink absorbed by a blotting paper ?
where is the density of mercury and h is height of mercury
Sol. Blotting paper has fine pores which act as capillaries. The column in the tube.
ink rises in these capillarises. Thus, the ink is absorbed by (v) It is found that the mercury column in the barometer has a
the blotting paper. height of about 76 cm at sea level equivalent to one
Example - 46 atmosphere.
Why does water wet glass ? (vi) Hence,
Pa = 0.76 × Density of mercury × g
Sol. This is because the force of adhesion between the 3
molecules of water and the glass is stronger than the force  Pa = 0.76 × 13.6 × 10 × 9.8
5
of cohesion between water molecules.  Pa = 1.013 × 10 pa
FLUID MECHANICS 58
Example - 48 Ans. (d)
If a capillary tube is tilted to 45° and 60° from the vertical Sol. key : considering the fact that density of coin is very high in
then the ratio of length l1? and l2? of liquid columns in it comparison of water and wood.
will be - Density of coin is more so it was applying considerable
force on wood before falling in water.
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 :1
But once it'll fall, wood can't apply same force alone so
(c) 1 : 2 (d) 2 : 1 wood will come a little up as result L will decrease.
Ans. (a) when coin falls in water wood goes up so displaced volume
decreases and coin has high density so it's volume is low
The expression for the capillary rise in a tube is given by,
and it doesn't displace liquid that much. As a result H will
also decrease.
2T cos 
H
gr Example - 50
A rod of length 6 m has a mass of 12 kg. If it is hinged at one
where  is the contact angle and not the angle of tilt. end at a distance of 3 m below a water surface,
Thus, for all parameters constant, (i) What weight must be attached to other end of the rod
so that 5 m of the rod is submerged?
at 60° (ii) Find the magnitude and direction of the force exerted
l1=Hcos60° = H/2 by the hinge on the rod. The specific gravity of the
material of the rod is 0.5.
At 45°
Ans. 5.67
H Sol. Let AC be the submerged part of the rod AB hinged at A as
l2=Hcos45°  shown in figure. G is the centre of gravity of the rod and
2
G  is the centre of buoyancy through which force of
Therefore the ratio of the 2 lengths is given by,
buoyancy FB acts vertically upwards.
l1 1

l2 2
Example - 49
A wooden block, with a coin placed on its top, floats in
water as shown in the fig. the distance l and h are shown
there. After some time the coin falls into the water, then
Since the rod is uniform,

5
 12  10 kg
6
(a) l decreases and h increases [Because AB = 6 m and AC = 5 m]
(b) l increases and h decreases The buoyancy force on rod at G  is
(c) Both l and h increases 10

FB   20 kg weight
0.5
(d) Both l and h decreases
FLUID MECHANICS 59
(i) Let x be the weight attached at the end B. Balancing Buoyancy force on rod at the centre of gravity of
torques about a, we get submerged part is
W  AG  x  AB  FB  AG  FB   2l – x  A  dg …(2)
Let N be the upward force on rod by the hinge then for
12  3  x  6  20   5 2  [As
equilibrium of rod we have
AG   5 2 ] N  FB  W
Solving we get x = 2.33 kg
or N  W – FB
(ii) Suppose R be the upward reaction acting on the
hinge, then in equilibrium position, we have 3
or  lAdg –  2l – x  Adg
W + x = FB + R 2
or R – W + x – FB
3 
= 12 + 2.33 –20  Adg  l – 2l  x 
 2 
= –5.67 kg. wt
Negative sign shows that the reaction at the hinge is  l
 Adg  x –  …(3)
acting in the downward direction. The magnitude of the  2
reaction is 5.67 kg. wt.
Now as rod is also in rotational equilibrium, taking net
Example - 51 zero torque about point A, we have.
A thin uniform rod of length 2l and specific gravity 3/4 is 2l – x
hinged at one end to a point height l/2 above the surface of FB  cos  – W  l cos   0 …(4)
2
water, with the other end immersed. Find the inclination of From equation (1), (2) and (4), we have
rod in equilibrium.
2l – x
Ans. 30° FB  cos  – W  l cos   N  2l cos   0  0 …(5)
2
Sol. The situation is shown in figure. From equation (1), (2) and (4), we have
 2l – x 
2
3  l
or Adg – l 2 Adg  2lAdg  x –   0
2 2  2
 l
or  2l – x  – 3l  4l  x –   0
2 2
 2 
or 4l 2  x 2 – 4lx – 3l 2  4lx – 2l 2  0
or x 2 – l 2  0
or x 2  l 2
or x  l
l 2 1
Thus we have sin    or   30
l 2
Let the length of rod outside water is x and its cross sectional
area is A. Here weight of rod is
3
W  2lA  dg …(1)
4
[d = density of water]
FLUID MECHANICS 60
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Introduction to Fluids & Hydrostatic Pressure 6.
2
A tube 1 cm in cross section is attached to the top of a
2
1. Pressure at a point inside a liquid does not depend on: vessel 1 cm high and of cross section 100 cm . Water is
(a) the depth of the point below the surface of the liquid poured into the system filling it to a depth of 100 cm above
(b) the nature of the liquid the bottom of the vessel as shown in the figure. Take g
(c) the acceleration due to gravity at that point –2
= 10 ms . Find the correct statement.
(d) the shape of the containing vessel
2. Two stretched membranes of area 2 cm2 and 3 cm2 are placed
in a liquid at the same depth. The ratio of the pressure on
them is:
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 2 : 3
(c) 3 : 2 (d) 22 : 32
3. A dam for water reservoir is built thicker at the bottom
than at the top because:
(a) pressure of water is very large at the bottom due to its
large depth
(b) water is likely to have more density at the bottom due
to its large depth (a) The force exerted by the water against the bottom of
(c) quantity of water at the bottom is large the vessel is 100 N.
(d) none of the above (b) The weigth of water in the system is 1.99 N.
4. In the given figure shown.
(c) Both (a) and (b) are correct
(d) Neither (a) nor (b) is correct.
7. A tube of uniform cross-section has two vertical portions
connected with a horizontal thin tube 8 cm long at their
lower ends. Enough water to occupy 22 cm of the tube is
poured into one branch and enough oil of specific gravity
0.8 to occupy 22 cm is poured into the other. Assuming
that interface remains stable find the distance ( in cm) of
(a) p1 > p0 (b) p > p0 the common surface E of the two liquids from point B.
(c) p1 > p2 (d) p = 0
5. A U-tube contains water and oil separated by mercury.
The mercury columns in the two arms are at the same level
with 10 cm of water in one arm and 12.5 cm of oil in the
other, as shown in figure. What is the relative density
of oil ?
Force Exerted by Fluids on the Walls of the Container &

Pascal's Law
8. The height to which a cylindrical vessel be filled with a
homogeneous liquid, to make the average force with which
the liquid presses the side of the vessel equal to the force
exerted by the liquid on the bottom of the vessel, is equal to:
(a) half of the radius of the vessel
(b) radius of the vessel
(a) 0.8 (b) 1.0 (c) one-fourth of the radius of the vessel
(c) 1.25 (d) none of these (d) three-fourths of the radius of the vessel
FLUID MECHANICS 61
9. A uniformly tapering vessel is filled with a liquid of density

F 2F
900 kg/m3. The force that acts on the base of the vessel (a) (b)
A A
due to the liquid is: (g = 10 m/s2)
4F
(c) (d) 0
A
13. A tank 5 m high is half filled with water and then is filled
to the top with oil of denisty 0.85 g/cm3. The pressure at
the bottom of the tank, due to these liquids, is:
(a) 1.85 gf/cm2 (b) 89.25 gf/cm2
(c) 462.5 gf/cm2 (d) 500 gf/cm2
(a) 3.6 N (b) 7.2 N 14. A piston of cross-sectional area 100 cm2 is used in a
(c) 9.0 N (d) 14.4 N hydraulic press to exert a force of 107 dyne on the water.
10. Two vessels A and B of different shapes have the same base The cross-sectional area of the other piston which supports
area and are filled with water upto the same height h (see an object having a mass 2000 kg is:
figure). The force exerted by water on the base is FA for (a) 100 cm2 (b) 109 cm2
vessel A and FB for vessel B. The respective weights of the
(c) 2 × 104 cm2 (d) 2 × 1010 cm2
vessels are WA and WB. Then 2
15. A cylindrical jar of cross-sectional area 0.01 m is filled
with water to a height of 50 cm. It carries a tight-fitting
piston of negligible mass. What is the pressure at the bottom
of the jar when a mass of 1 kg is placed on the piston?
–2
Take g = 10 ms .
5
(a) 10 Pa (b) 6000 Pa
(c) 5000 Pa (d) 1000 Pa
(a) FA > FB ; WA > WB (b) FA = FB ; WA > WB
16. A given shaped glass tube having uniform cross-section is
(c) FA = FB ; WA < WB (d) FA > FB ; WA = WB filled with water and is mounted on a rotatable shaft as
11. A hydraulic lift is used to lift a car of mass 3000 kg. The shown in fig. If the tube is rotated with a constant angular
cross-sectional area of the lift on which the car is supported velocity  then:
–2 2
is 5 × 10 m . What is the pressure on the smaller piston,
if both the pistons are at the same horizontal level ? Take g
–2
= 10 ms .
5 5
(a) 6 × 10 Pa (b) 5 × 10 Pa
5 5
(c) 4 × 10 Pa (d) 3 × 10 Pa
12. Figure shown water filled in a symmetrical container. Four
pistons of equal area A are used at the four openings to
keep the water in equilibrium. Now an additional force F
is applied at each piston. The increase in the pressure at
the centre of the container due to this addition is
(a) water levels in both A and B go up

(b) water level in section A goes up and that in B comes
down
(c) water level in section A comes down and that in B it
goes up
(d) water level remain same in both sections.
FLUID MECHANICS 62
Buoyancy 24. A block of wood is floating in a lake. The apparent weight

of the floating block is
17. When a body is wholly or partially immersed in a liquid it
appears to lose weight. This loss of weight is equal to the (a) equal to its true weight
weight of: (b) less than its true weight
(a) water displaced by the body (c) more than its true weight
(b) liquid displaced by the body (d) equal to zero
(c) equal volume of water
25. A body weights W in air and it loses its weight by 25% in
(d) equal volume of liquid
water. The relative density of the body is
18. Two pieces of metal when immersed in a liquid have equal
(a) 4 (b) 1/4
upthrust on them; then:
(a) both pieces must have equal weights (c) 3/4 (d) 4/3
(b) both pieces must have equal densities 26. A body floats with (1/3) of its volume outside water and
(c) both pieces must have equal volumes immersed (3/4) of its volume outside another liquid. The density of
(d) both are located at the same depth the other liquid is:
19. When a body is weighed in a liquid, the loss in its weight (a) (9/4) g/cc (b) (4/9) g/cc
depends upon: (c) (8/3) g/cc (d) (3/9) g/cc
(a) volume of the body (b) mass of the body 27. A wooden piece floats half submerged in a tub of water. If
(c) shape of the body (d) CG of the body the system is transferred to a lift ascending with
20. An iron ball is weighed in air and then in water by a spring acceleration the wooden piece will:
balance: (a) sink a little more (b) rise a little
(a) its weight in air is more than in water
(c) remain half submerged (d) sink to the bottom
(b) its weight in water is more than in air
28. A body is just floating on the surface of a liquid. The density
(c) its weight is same both in air and water
of the body is same as that of the liquid. The body is slightly
(d) its weight is zero in water
pushed down. What will happen to the body?
21. A body weighs 40 g in air. If its volume is 10 cc, in water
(a) It will come back slowly to its earlier position.
it will weigh:
(a) 30 g (b) It will remain submerged where it is left.
(b) 40 g (c) It will sink.
(c) 50 g (d) It will come out violently.
(d) data are insufficient to calculate 29. A block of metal (density 7 g/cc) of size 5 cm × 5 cm × 5
22. The reading of a spring balance when a block is suspended cm is weighed completely submerged in water. What will
from it in air is 60 N. This reading is changed to 40 N be its apparent weight (density of water = 1 g/cc)?
when the block is submerged in water. The specific gravity (a) (6 × 5 × 5 × 5)g (b) (4 × 4 × 4 × 7)g
of the block must therefore be:
(c) (7 × 5 × 5 × 5)g (d) (4 × 4 × 4 × 6)g
(a) 3 (b) 2
30. A beaker containing water weighs 100 g. It is placed on
(c) 6 (d) 3/2
the pan of a balance and a piece of metal weighing 70 g
23. A vessel with water is placed on a weighing pan and reads
and having a volume of 10 cm3 is placed inside the water
600 g. Now a ball of 40 g and density 0.80 g/cc is sunk
in the beaker. The weight of the beaker and the metal would
into the water with a pin as shown in fig., keeping it sunk.
be:
The weighing pan will show a reading.
(a) 170 g (b) 160 g
(c) 100 g (d) 30 g
31. A boy carries a fish in one hand and a bucket of water in
the other hand; if he places the fish in the bucket, the weight
now carried by him:
(a) is less than before (b) is more than before
(a) 600 g (b) 550 g (c) is the same as before (d) depends upon his speed
(c) 650 g (d) 632 g
FLUID MECHANICS 63
39. A boat carrying a number of large stones is floating in a

9 th water tank. What will happen to the water level if the stones
32. An ice cube floats on water in a beaker with of its
10 are unloaded into the water? The water level
volume submerged under water. What fraction of its (a) remains unchanged
volume will be submerged if the beaker of water is taken
th (b) rises
to the moon where the gravity is 1/6 that on the earth ?
(c) falls
(a) 9/10 (b) 27/50
(c) 2/3 (d) zero (d) rises till half the number of stones are unloaded
then begins to fall
33. When a ship floats on water:
40. A jar is filled with two non-mixing liquids 1 and 2 having
(a) it displaces no water
densities 1 and 2 respectively. A solid ball, made of a
(b) the weight of water displaced is equal to the weight of
material of density 3, is dropped in the jar. It comes to
the ship
equilibrium in the position shown in the fig. Which of the
(c) the weight of water displaced is lesser than the weight
following is true for 1, 2 and 3 ?
of the ship
(d) the weight of water displaced is greater than the weight
of the ship
34. A hydrogen-filled balloon stops rising after it has attained
a certain height in the sky. This happens because
(a) the atmospheric pressure decreases with height and
becomes zero when maximum height is attained
(b) the temperature of the air at maximum height equals that
of the hydrogen in the balloon
(c) viscous effects become negligible
(d) at the highest point, the density of air is such that the
buoyant force on the balloon equals its weight
35. Two solids A and B float in a liquid. It is observed that A
floats with half its volume immersed and B floats with (2/
3) of its volume immersed. Compare the densities of A (a) 3 < 1 < 2 (b) 1 > 3 > 2
and B:
(c) 1 > 2 > 3 (d) 1 < 3 < 2
(a) 4 : 3 (b) 2 : 3
(c) 3 : 4 (d) 1 : 3 41. A metallic sphere floats in an immiscible mixture of water
(w = 103 kg/m3) and a liquid (l = 13.5 × 103 kg/m3) such
36. A raft of wood (density 600 g/m3) of mass 120 kg floats in
water. How much weight can be put on the raft to make it 4 1
that its th portion is in water and th portion is in
just sink? 5 5
(a) 120 kg (b) 200 kg liquid. Density of the metal is:
(c) 40 kg (d) 80 kg (a) 4.5 × 103 kg/m3 (b) 4.0 × 103 kg/m3
37. A boat 3m long and 2 m wide is floating in a lake. When a (c) 3.5 × 103 kg/m3 (d) 1.9 × 103 kg/m3
man climbs over it, it sinks 1 cm further into water. The
42. A vessel contains an immiscible mixture of water and a
mass of the man is:
liquid of density 0.8 gm/cc. A cube of side 10 cm is placed
(a) 60 kg (b) 64 kg in the mixture and it is observed that the water-liquid
(c) 70 kg (d) 72 kg interface is at the middle of cube height. Mass of the cube
38. A man is sitting in a boat which is floating in a pond. If the is:
man drinks some water from the pond, the level of water (a) 420 gm (b) 680 gm
in the pond will: (c) 225 gm (d) 900 gm
(a) rise a little (b) sink a little
(c) remain stationary (d) none of these
FLUID MECHANICS 64
43. A wooden block, with a coin placed on its top, floats in 47. An iceberg is floating partially immersed in sea water. If
water as shown in the figure. The distance h and l are shown the density of sea water is 1.03 g/cc and that of ice is 0.92
there: g/cc, the fraction of the total volume of iceberg above the
level of sea water is:
(a) 8% (b) 11%
(c) 34% (d) 89%
48. A metal ball of density 7800 kg/m3 is suspected to have a
large number of inner cavities. It weighs 9.8 kg when
weighed directly on a balance and 1.5 kg less when
immersed in water. The fraction by volume of the cavities
After sometime, the coin falls into the water. Then: in the metal ball is apporximately:
(a) both l and h increase (a) 20% (b) 30%
(b) both l and h decrease (c) 16% (d) 11%
(c) l decreases and h increases Accelerated Fluids
(d) l increases and h decreases 49. A container containing water has a constant acceleration
44. A piece of ice floats in a vessel with water above which a ‘a’ in the horizontal drection. Free surface of water gets
layer of lighter oil is poured. When the whole of ice melts, sloped with the horizontal at angle:
which one of the following statements will be true? 1  g  1  g 
(a) The level of the interface will remain the same. (a) cos   (b) sin  
a a
(b) The total level of the liquids in the vessel will rise.
1  a  1  a 
(c) The total level of the liquids in the vessel will fall while (c) tan   (d) sin  
g g
the level of interface will go up.
50. The minimum horizontal acceleration of the container so
(d) The level of interface as well as the total level of liquids
that the pressure at the point A of the container becomes
in the vessel will fall.
atmospheric is (the tank is of sufficient height)
45. A cubical block of side 10 cm floats at the interface of an
oil and water. The pressure above that of atmosphere at
the lower face of the block is
3 4
(a) g (b) g
2 3
4 3
(a) 200 N/m2 (b) 680 N/m2 (c) g (d) g
2 4
(c) 400 N/m2 (d) 800 N/m2 51. A sealed tank containing a liquid of density  moves with
46. A sphere of solid material of specific gravity 8 has a horizontal acceleration a as shown in the figure. The
concentric spherical cavity and just sinks in water. Then, difference in pressure between two points A and B will be
the ratio of the radius of the cavity to the outer radius of
the sphere must be
3 3
3 5
(a) (b)
2 2
3
7 2
(c) (d) (a) hg (b) lg
3
2 7
(c) hg – la (d) hg + la
FLUID MECHANICS 65
52. A U-tube of base length ‘l’ filled with same volume of two 56. Bernoulli’s theorem is a consequence of
liquids of densities  and 2 is moving with an acceleration (a) conservation of mass
‘a’ on the horizontal plane. If the height difference between
(b) conservation of energy
the two surfaces (open to atmosphere) becomes zero, then
the height h is given by (c) conservation of linear momentum
(d) conservation of angular momentum
57. The velocity of efflux of a liquid through an orifice in the
bottom of a tank does not depend upon
(a) density of liquid
(b) height of the liquid column above orifice
(c) acceleration due to gravity
(d) None of these
58. A hole is made at the bottom of the tank filled with water
a 3a (density = 1000 kg/m3). If the total pressure at the bottom
(a) 2g  (b) 2g  of the tank is three atmospheres (1 atmosphere = 105 N/
m2), then the velocity of efflux is
a 2a
(c) g  (d) 3g  (a) 400 m / s (b) 200 m / s
Miscellaneous Cases in Fluid Statics & Types of Fluid Flows (c) 600 m / s (d) 500 m / s
& Equation of Continuity & Bernoulli's Equation
53. In the given figure, the velocity v3 will be
59.  
A small hole is made at a height of h '  1 / 2 m from the
bottom of a cylindrical water tank and at a depth of
h  2 m form the upper level of water in the tank. The

distance where the water emerging from the hole strikes
the ground is
(a) 2 m/s (b) 4 m/s

(c) 1 m/s (d) 3 m/s (a) 2 2 m (b) 1 m
54. Water is flowing through two horizontal pipes of different
(c) 2 m (d) none of these
diameters whcih are connected together. The diameter of
the two pipes are 3 cm and 6 cm respectively. If the speed 60. The level of water in a tank is 5 m high. A hole of area 1
of water in the narrower tube is 4 m/s. Then, the speed of cm2 is made at the bottom of the tank. The rate of leakage
water in the wider tube is : of water from the hole is (g = 10 m/s2)
(a) 10–3 m3/s (b) 10–4 m3/s3
(a) 16 m/s (b) 1 m/s
(c) 10 m /s
3
(d) 10–2 m3/s
(c) 4 m/s (d) 2 m/s
61. A water tank standing on the floor has two small holes
55. A cylinder of height 20 m is completely filled with water. punched in the vertical wall one above the other. The holes
–1
The velocity of efflux of water (in ms ) through a small are 2.4 cm and 7.6 cm above the floor. If the jest of water
hole on the side wall of the cylinder near its bottom, is from the holes hit the floor at the same point, then the
(a) 10 (b) 20 height of water in the tank is:
(c) 25.5 (d) 5 (a) 10 cm (b) 5 cm

(c) 20 cm (d) 48 cm
FLUID MECHANICS 66
62. The pressure of water in a pipe when tap is closed is 5.5 × 67. The ratio of the terminal velocities of two drops of radii R
105 N/m2. When tap gets open, pressure reduces to 5 × 105 and R/2 is
N/m2. The velocity with which water comes out on opening (a) 2 (b) 1
the tap is :
(c) 1/2 (d) 4
(a) 10 m/s (b) 5 m/s
68. Units of coefficient of viscosity are
(c) 20 m/s (d) 15 m/s
(a) Nms–1 (b) Nm2s–1
63. A tank is filled with water up to height H. When a hole is
made at a distance h below the level of water. What will (c) Nm–2s (d) None of these
be horizontal range of water jet ? 69. The terminal velocity v of a small steel ball of radius r
falling under gravity through a column of viscous liquid
(a) 2 h (H  h) (b) 4 h (H  h)
of coeffcient of viscosity  depends on mass of the ball m,
acceleration due to gravity g, coefficient of viscossity 
(c) 4 h (H  h) (d) 2 h (H  h)
and radius r. Which of the following relations is
64. Water is flowing at a speed of 1.5 ms–1 through a horizontal dimensionally correct ?
tube of cross-sectional area 10–2m2 and you are trying to
stop the flow by your palm. Assuming that the water stops mgr
(a) v  (b) v  mgr
immediately after hitting the palm, the minimum force that 
you must exert should be (density of water = 103 kgm–3).
(a) 15 N (b) 22.5 N mg mg
(c) v  (d) v 
(c) 33.7 N (d) 45 N r 
65. A horizontally oriented tube AB of length l = 2.5 m rotates 70. A rain drop of radius r falls in air with a terminal speed vt.
with a constant anglular velocity   5rad s about a What is the terminal speed of a rain drop of radius 2r ?
stationary vertical axis OO’ passing through the end A. (a) vt/2 (b) vt
Initially the tube is filled with an ideal fluid. The end A of (c) 2vt (d) 4vt
the tube is open, the closed end B has a very small of
orifice. Find the velocity of the fluid (in m/s) relative to 71. Eight spherical rain drops of the same mass and radius are
–1
the tube when the liquid column length in tube reduces to falling down with a terminal speed of 6 cm s . If they
h = 1 m. coalesce to form one big drop, what will be its terminal
speed ? Neglect the buoyancy due to air.
–1 –1
(a) 1.5 cms (b) 6 cms
–1 –1
(c) 24 cms (d) 32 cms
72. Two equal drops of water are falling through air with a
steady velocity v. If the drops coalesce, then new velocity
will be :
(a) 2 v (b) 2v
v
(c) 22/3 v (d)
Applications of Fluid Dynamics & Viscosity 2
66. Spherical balls of radius R are falling in a viscous fluid of 73. As the temperature of water increases, its viscosity
viscosity  with a velocity . The retarding viscous force
(a) remains unchanged
acting on the spherical ball is
(a) directly proportional to R but inversely proportional to . (b) decreases
(b) directly proportional to both radius R and velocity . (c) increases

(c) inversely proportional to both radius R and velocity . (d) increases or decreases depending on the external
(d) inversely proportional to R but directly proportional pressure
to velocity .
FLUID MECHANICS 67
74. The rate of flow of liquid in a tube of radius r, length l, 80. Two small drops of mercury each of radius r form a single
whose ends are maintained at a pressure difference p is large drop. The ratio of surface energy before and after
this change is :
Qpr 4
V , where  is coefficient of the viscosity and Q (a) 2 : 22/3 (b) 22/3 : 1

(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 2
is :
81. Which of the following is not the unit of surface tension?
(a) 8 (b) 1/8
(a) Newton/metre (b) Joule/(metre)2
(c) 16 (d) 1/16
(c) kg/(second)2 (d) 3Watt/metre
75. A viscous fluid is flowing through a cylindrical tube. The
82. Surface tension is due to
velocity distribution of the fluid is best represented by the
diagram (a) friction forces between molecules
(b) cohesive forces between molecules
(c) adhesive forces between molecules
(a) (b) (d) gravitational forces
83. The spiders and insects move and run on the surface of
water without sinking, because
(a) elastic membrane is formed on water due to property
(c) (d) None of these of surface tension
(b) spiders and insects are lighter
76. If the terminal speed of a sphere of gold (density (c) spiders and insects swim on water
–3 –1
= 19.5 kgm ) is 0.2 ms in a viscous liquid (density = 1.5 (d) spiders and insects experience upthrust
–3
kgm ), find the terminal speed of a sphere of silver (density 84. Small droplets of liquid are usually more spherical in shape
–3
= 10.5 kg/m ) of the same size in the same liquid. than larger drops of the same liquid because
(a) force of surface tension is equal and opposite to the
–1 –1
(a) 0.4 ms (b) 0.133 ms force of gravity
(c) 0.1 ms
–1
(d) 0.2 ms
–1 (b) force of surface tension predominates the force of
3 gravity
77. The terminal speed of a sphere of god (density 19.5 × 10
–3 3 –3 (c) force of gravity predominates the force of surface
kgm ) in a viscous liquid (density 1.5 × 10 kg m ) is 0.2
–1 tension
ms . What is the terminal speed (in m/s) of a sphere of
3 –3
silver 9density 10.5 × 10 kg m ) of the same size in the (d) force of gravity and force of surface tension act in the
same liquid? same direction and are equal
85. Hair of shaving brush cling together when it is removed
Surface Tension
from water due to
78. The water droplets in free fall are spherical due to (a) force of attraction between hair
(a) gravity (b) surface tension
(b) viscosity (c) viscosity of water
(c) surface tension (d) characteristic property of hair
(d) intermolecular attraction 86. Two water droplets coalesce to form a large drop. In this
process,
79. Tiny insects can float and walk on the surface of water
due to (a) energy is liberated
(a) buoyancy alone (b) energy is absorbed
(c) energy is neither liberated nor absorbed
(b) surface tension alone
(d) a small amount of mass is converted into energy in
(c) both buoyancy and surface tension
accordance with Einstein’s mass-energy equivalence
(d) neither buoyancy nor surface tension 2
relation E = mc .
FLUID MECHANICS 68
6
87. A mercury drop of radius 1 cm is sprayed into 10 drops 95. The excess pressure across a soap bubble of radius r is
of equal size. The energy expended in joule is (surface p = 4/r, where  is the surface tension of soap solution.
–3 –1
tension of mercury is 460 × 10 Nm ) What is the excess pressure across an air bubble of the
(a) 0.057 (b) 5.7 same radius r formed inside a container of soap solution?
–4 –6
(c) 5.7 × 10 (d) 5.7 × 10  2
(a) (b)
88. If work W is done in blowing a bubble of radius R from r r
soap solution, then the work done in blowing a bubble of
radius 2R from the same solution is 4
(c) (d) none of these
(a) W/2 (b) 2W r
96. Two soap bubbles of radii r1 and r2 equal to 4cm and 5cm
1
(c) 4W (d) 2 W are touching each other over a common surface S1S2
3
(shown in figure). Its radius will be :
89. If the surface tension of soap Sol. is , what is the work
done in blowing soap bubble of radius r ?
2 2
(a) r  (b) 2r 
2 2
(c) 4r  (d) 8r 
90. The average mass of rain drops is 3.0×10–5 kg and their
average terminal velocity is 9 m/s. Calculate the energy
transferred by rain to each square metre of the surface at a
place which receives 100 cm of rain in a year. (a) 4 cm (b) 20 cm
(a) 4.05 ×10 J 4
(b) 3.5 ×10 J 5
(c) 5 cm (d) 4.5 cm
(c) 9.0 ×10 J 4
(d) 3.0 ×10 J 5
Angle of Contact
91. The work done to break up a drop of a liquid of radius R 97. If the angle of contact is less than 90°, then pressure just
and surface tension  into eight drops, all of the same size, is inside the surface of a meniscus
2 2
(a) 4R (b) 2R (a) is less than atmospheric pressure
1 1 (b) is greater than atmospheric pressure

2 2
(c) R (d) R (c) is same as the atmospheric pressure
2 4
Excess Pressure (d) none of these
92. If two soap bubbles of different radii are connected by a 98. Water does not wet an oily glass, because
tube (a) cohesive force of oil > adhesive force between oil and
(a) air flows from the bigger bubble to the smaller bubble glass
till the sizes become equal (b) cohesive force of oil > cohesive force of water
(b) air flows from bigger bubble to the smaller bubble till (c) oil repels water
the sizes are interchanged (d) cohesive force of water > adhesive force between water
(c) air flows from the smaller bubble to the bigger and oil molecules
(d) there is no flow of air. 99. A glass plate is partly dipped vertically in the mercury and
93. If two soaps bubbles of equal radii r coalesce, then the angle of contact is measured. If the plate is inclined, then
radius of curvature of interface between two bubble will the angle of contact will
be: (a) increase (b) remain unchanged
(a) r (b) 0 (c) increase or decrease (d) decrease
(c) infinity (d) r/2 100. A liquid wets a solid completely. The meniscus of the liquid
94. The excess pressure due to surface tension in a spherical in a sufficiently long tube is
liquid drop of radius r is directly proportional to (a) flat (b) concave
(a) r (b) r 2 (c) convex (d) cylindrical
(c) r –1
(d) r –2
FLUID MECHANICS 69
101. If a capillary tube is dippped into liquid and the levels of 104. Two capillary tubes of the same length but different radii
the liquid inside and outside are same, then the angle of r1 and r2 are fitted in parallel to the bottom of a vessel. The
contact is : pressure head is p. What should be the radius of a single
(a) 0° (b) 90° tube that can replace the two tubes so that the rate of flow
is same as before ?
(c) 45° (d) 30°
Capillarity r1r1
(a) r1 + r2 (b) r  r
102. When two capillary tubes of different diameters are dipped 1 2
vertically, then rise of the liquid is:
(a) same in both the tubes r1  r2
(b) more in the tube of larger diameter 2
(c) less in the tube of smaller diameter 105. A 20 cm long capillary tube is dipped in water. The water
(d) more in the tube of smaller diameter rises upto 8 cm. If the entire arrangement is put in a freely
falling elevator, the length of water column in the capillary
103. Water rises to a height h in a capillary tube held vertically
tube will be
in a beaker containing water. If the capillary tube is inclined
at an angle 30° with the water surface, the length to which (a) 8 cm (b) 10 cm
water rises in the capillary will be (c) 4 cm (d) 20 cm
(a) h/2 (b) h Ans. (d)
Sol. In a freely falling elevator g = 0
2h
(c) (d) 2h Water will rise to the full length i.e., 20cm of tube.
3
FLUID MECHANICS 70
EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. The excess pressure across a soap bubble of radius r is p 5. Water from a pipe is coming at a rate of 100 litres per
= 4/r, where  is the surface tension of soap solution. minute. If the radius of the pipe is 5 cm, the Reynolds
What is the excess pressure across an air bubble of the number for the flow is of the order of: (density of water =
same radius r formed inside a container of soap solution? 1000 kg/m3, coefficient of viscosity of water = 1 mPa s)
(2015) (2019)
(a) 10 3
(b) 104
 2
(a) (b) (c) 10 2
(d) 106
r r
6. If ‘M’ is the mass of water that rises in a capillary tube of
4 radius ‘r’, then mass of water which will rise in a capillary
r tube of radius ‘2r’ is: (2019)
2. Which of the following option correctly describes the
M
variation of the speed v and acceleration ‘a’ of a point (a) M (b)
mass falling vertically in a viscous medium that applies a 2
force F = kv, where ‘k’ is a constant, on the body ? (Graphs (c) 4 M (d) 2 M
are schematic and not drawn to scale) (2016)
4
7. A wooden block floating in a bucket of water has of its
5
volume submerged. When certain amount of an oil is
poured into the bucket, it is found that the block is just
under the oil surface with half of its volume under water
and half in oil. The density of oil relative to that of water
is:
(2019)
(a) 0.5 (b) 0.8
(c) 0.6 (d) 0.7
8. A cubical block of side 0.5 m floats on water with 30% of
its volume under water. What is the maximum weight that
can be put on the block without fully submerging it under
water? (Take, density of water  103 kg / m 3 ]
(2019)
3. Work done in increasing the size of a soap bubble from a
radius of 3 cm to 5 cm is nearly (surface tension of soap (a) 46.3 kg (b) 87.5 kg
Sol.= 0.03 Nm–1) (2017) (c) 65.4 kg (d) 30.1 kg
(a) 0.4πmJ (b) 2πmJ 9. A submarine experiences a pressure of 5.05  106 Pa at
(c) 3.4πmJ (d) 2.0πmJ depth of d1in a sea. When it goes further to a depth of d2it
4. A small soap bubble of radius 4 cm is trapped inside experiences a pressure of 8.08  106 Pa. Then d2 – d1 is
another bubble of radius 6 cm without any contact. Let P2
approximately (density of water  103 kg / m 3 and
be the pressure inside the inner bubble and P0, the pressure
outside the outer bubble. Radius of another bubble with acceleration due to gravity  10 ms 2 ):
pressure difference P2-P0 between its inside and outside
(2019)
would be: (2018)
(a) 300 m (b) 400 m
(a) 12 cm (b) 2.4 cm
(c) 600 m (d) 500 m
(c) 6 cm (d) 4.8 cm
FLUID MECHANICS 71
10. Water from a tap emerges vertically downwards with an 15. A soap bubble, blown by a mechanical pump at the mouth
initial speed of 1.0 ms–1The cross-sectional area of the tap of a tube, increases in volume, with time, at a constant
is 10–4m2. Assume that the pressure is constant throughout rate. The time dependence of pressure inside the bubble
the stream of water and that the flow is streamlined. The is given by : (2019)
cross-sectional area of the stream, 0.15 m below the tap
would be: [Take g = 10ms–2] (a)  t 2 (b)  t –3
(2019) –
1
1
(c)  t 3 (d) 
(a) 2  10 m5 2 (b) 5  10 m5 2 t
(c) 5 104 m2 (d) 1105 m2 16. A cylindrical vessel containing a liquid is rotated about
its axis so that the liquid rises at its sides as shown in the
11. A solid sphere, of radius R acquires a terminal velocity v1 figure. The radius of vessel is 5 cm an and the angular
when falling (due to gravity) through a viscous fluid having
speed of rotation is  rad s1. The difference in the height,
a coefficient of viscosity  . The sphere is recast into 27
identical solid spheres. If each of these spheres acquires h (in cm) of liquid at the centre of vessel and at the side
a terminal velocity, v2, when falling through the same fluid, will be : (2020)
 v1 
the ratio  v  equals: (2019)
 2
1
(a) 9 (b)
27
1
(c) (d) 27
9
12. The top of a water tank is open to air and its water level is
maintained. It is giving out 0.74m3 water per minute through
a circular opening of 2 cm radius in its wall. The depth of
the centre of the opening from the level of water in the
tank is close to: (2019)
(a) 6.0 m (b) 4.8 m
(c) 9.6 m (d) 2.9 m
13. Water flows into a large tank with flat bottom at the rate of
52 22
10–4m3s–1 Water is also leaking out of a hole of area 1 cm2 at (a) (b)
its bottom. If the height of the water in the tank remains 2g 25g
steady, then this height (in cm) is:
252 22
(2019) (c) (d)
2g 5g
14. A long cylindrical vessel is half filled with a liquid. When 17. A capillary tube made of glass of radius 0.15 mm is dipped
the vessel is rotated about its own vertical axis, the liquid vertically in a beaker filled with methylene iodide (surface
rises up near the wall. If the radius of vessel is 5 cm and its tension = 0.05 Nm–1, density = 667 kg m–3) which rises to
rotational speed is 2 rotations per second, then the height h in the tube. It is observed that the two tangents
difference in the heights (in cm) between the centre and drawn from liquid-glass interfaces (from oopposite sides
the sides, in cm, will be (take g = 10 m/s2, pi2 = 10) of the capillary) make an angle of 60º with one another.
(2019) Then h is close to (g = 10 ms–2) (2020)
(a) 2.0 (b) 0.1 (a) 0.172 m (b) 0.049m
(c) 0.4 (d) 1.2 (c) 0.087 m (d) 0.137 m
FLUID MECHANICS 72
18. Pressure inside two soap bubbles are 1.01 and 1.02 23. A fluid is flowing through a horizontal pipe of varying
atmosphere, respectively. The ratio of their volumes is : cross-section, with speed v ms-1 at a point where the
(2020) pressure is P pascal. At another point where pressure is
(a) 4 : 1 (b) 2 : 1 P
Pascal its speed is V ms-1. If the density of the fluid is
2
(c) 0.8 : 1 (d) 8 : 1
kg m-3 and the flow is streamline, then V is equal to :
19. When a long glass capillary tube of radius 0.015 cm is (2020)
dipped in a liquid, the liquid rises to a height of 15 cm
within it. If the contact angle between the liquid and glass P P
is close to 0º, the surface tension of the liquid, in milli (a)  v2 (b)  v2
2 
Newton m–1, is
2P P
[(liquid)  900 kgm3 , g  10 ms2 ] (Give answer in (c)  v2 (d) v
 
closest integer) ……….. (2020)
24. An ideal fluid flows (laminar flow) through a pipe of non-
20. An air bubble of radius 1 cm in water has an upward uniform diameter. The maximum and minimum diameters of
acceleration 9.8 cm s-2. The density of water is 1 gm cm-3 the pipes are 6.4cm and 4.8cm, respectively. The ratio of
and water offers negligible drag force on the bubble. The minimum and maximum velocities of fluid in this pipe is
mass of the bubble is (g = 980 cm/s2).
(2020)
(2020)
3 9
(a) 1.52 gm (b) 4.51 gm (a) (b)
2 16
(c) 3.15 gm (d) 4.15 gm
21. A hollow spherical shell of outer radius R floats just 3 3
(c) (d)
submerged under the water surface. The inner radius of 4 2
the shell is r. If the specific gravity of the shell material is 25. A leak proof cylinder of length 1 m, made of metal which
has very low coefficient of expansion is floating in water
27
w.r.t water, the value of r is : at 0o C such that its height above the water surface is 20
8
cm. When the temperature of water is increases to 4o C,
(2020) the height of the cylinder above the water surface becomes
21 cm. The density of water at T = 4oC relative to the
4 8 density at T=0o C is close to (2020)
(a) R (b) R
9 9 (a) 1.01 (b) 1.03
(c) 1.26 (d) 1.04
1 2
(c) R (d) R 26. Consider a solid sphere of density
3 3
 r2 
22. In an experiment to verify Stokes law, a small spherical   r   0 1   , 0  r  R . The minimum density of a
 R2 
ball of radius r and density  falls under gravity through
a distance h in air before entering a tank of water. If the liquid in which it float is just (2020)
terminal velocity of the ball inside water is same as its
velocity just before entering the water surface, then the 2 2
(a) 0 (b) 0
value of h is proportional to : (ignore viscosity of air) 5 3
(2020) 0 0
(c) (d)
(a) r4 (b) r 5 3
(c) r3 (d) r2
FLUID MECHANICS 73
27. Two liquids of density 1 and  2  2  2 1  are filled up 31. The pressure acting on a submarine is 3×105 Pa at a certain
depth. If the depth is doubled, the percentage increase in
behind a square wall of side 10 as shown in figure. Each
the pressure acting on the submarine would be :
liquid has a height of 5 . The ratio of forces due to these
liquids exerted on the upper part MN to that at the lower (Assume that atmospheric pressure 1105 Pa density of
part NO is (Assume that the liquids are not mixing)
(2020) water is 103 kg m–3, g  10ms 2 ) (2021)
3 200
(a) % (b) %
200 5
200 5
(c) % (d) %
3 200
32. What will be the nature of flow of water from a circular tap,
2 1 when its flow rate increased from 0.18 L/min? The radius of
(a) (b)
3 2 –3
the tap and viscosity of water are 0.5 cm and 10 Pa s.
1 1 respectively. (2021)
(c) (d)
4 3 3
(Density of water : 10 kg/m )
3
28. An ideal liquid (water) flowing through a tube of non-

(a) Remains turbulent flow
uniform cross-sectional area,where area at A and B are
40 cm2 and 20 cm2respectively. If pressure difference (b) Steady flow to unsteady flow
between A and B is 700 N/m2, then volume flow rate is (c) unsteady to steady flow
(density of water = 1000kgm–3) (2020)
(d) Remains steady flow
33. When two soap bubbles of radii a and b (b > a) coalesce,
the radius of curvature of common surface is :
(2021)
(a) 2720 cm3/s (b) 2420 cm3/s
ab ab
(c) 1810 cm /s
3
(d) 3020 cm3/s (a) (b)
ba ab
29. A small spherical droplet of density d is floating exactly
half immersed in a liquid of density  and surface tension
ba ab
T. The radius of droplet is (take note that the surface (c) (d)
ab ab
tension applied an upward force on droplet)
(2020) 34. A hydraulic press can lift 100 kg when a mass ‘m’ is placed
on the smaller piston. It can lift ____ kg when the diameter
2T T of the large piston is increased by 4 times and that of the
(a) r  3    d  g (b) r    d  g smaller piston is decreased by 4 times keeping the same
mass ‘m’ on the smaller piston. (2021)
T 3T
(c) r   g
d  (d) r    g
2 d
35. Consider a water tank as shown in the figure. Its cross-
2
sectional area is 0.4 m . The tank has an opening B near the
2
30. A large number of water drops, each of radius r, combine bottom whose cross-section area is 1 cm . A load of 24 kg
to have a drop of radius R. If the surface tension is T and is applied on the water at the top when the height of the
mechanical equivalent of heat is J, the rise in heat energy water level is 40 cm above the bottom, the velocity of water
per unit volume will be : (2021) 1
coming out the opening B is ms . Find the value of v
2T 2T  1 1  (round off to the nearest integer)
(a) (b)   
rJ J r R [Take value of g to be 10 ms ]
–2
(2021)
3T  1 1 
(c)    (d) none of these
J r R
FLUID MECHANICS 74
EXERCISE - 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Single Choice Questions 4. Two immiscible liquids P and Q of different densities are
1. Two communicating vessels contain mercury. The diameter contained in a wide U-tube as shown in fig. The heights of
of one vessel is four times the diameter of the other. A the two liquids above the horizontal line XX` which cuts
column of water of height h0 = 70 cm is poured into the the boundary between the liquids are H P and H Q
left hand vessel (the narrower one). How much will be respectively. The U-tube is transported to a planet where
mercury level rise in the right hand vessel? (Specific the acceleration of free fall is 2/3 that on the earth, where
density of mercury = 13.6) the liquids do not evaporate and where the heights of liquid
(measured relative to XX`) are hP and hQ respectively.
(a) 0.3 cm (b) 0.7 cm
Which of the given statements is correct?
(c) 0.1 cm (d) 1.0 cm
2. A U-tube is partially filled with water. Oil, which does not
mix with water, is next poured into one side until water
rises by 25 cm on the other side. If the density of oil be
0.8, the oil level will stand higher than the water level by:
(a) 6.25 cm (b) 12.50 cm
(c) 31.25 cm (d) 20 cm
3. The limbs of a glass U-tube are lowered into vessels A and
B, A containing water. Some air is pumped out through (a) The liquid levels are unchanged, i.e.,
the top of the tube C. The liquid in the left hand limb A hP = HP and hQ = HQ
and the right hand limb B rise to heights of 10 cm and 12
(b) Both liquid levels rise up so that hP/HP = hQ/HQ
cm respectively. The density of liquid B is:
(c) Both liquid levels rise up so that h P - h Q
= HP - HQ
(d) The liquid P falls and liquid Q rises such that
hP 2 HP

hQ 3 HQ
2
5. A tank with a square base of area 2.0 m is divided into two
compartments by a vertical partition in the middle. There is
2
a small hinged door of face area 20 cm at the bottom of the
partition. Water is filled in one compartment and an acid of
(a) 0.75 g/cm3 (b) 0.83 g/cm3 relative density 1.5 in the other, both to a height of 4 m. If
–2
g = 10 ms , the force necessary to keep the door closed is
(c) 1.2 g/cm3 (d) 0.25 g/cm3
(a) 10 N (b) 20 N
(c) 40 N (d) 80 N
FLUID MECHANICS 75
6. A ball is made of a material of density  where oil <  < 8. A cubical block of steel of each side equal to  is floating
water with oil and water representing the densities of oil and on mercury in a vessel. The densities of steel and mercury
water, respectively. The oil and water are immiscible. If are s and m. The height of the block above the mercury
the above ball is in equilibrium in mixture of this oil and level is given by
water, which of the following pictures represents its
equilibrium position ?      
(a)  1  s  (b)  1  s 
  m    m 
     
(c)  1  m 
 (d)  1  m 

 s   s 
9. The tension in a string holding a solid block below the

surface of a liquid (where liquid > block) as in shown in the
figure is T when the system is at rest.
Then what will be the tension in the string if the system

has upward acceleration a?
 a  a
(a) T  1   (b) T  1  
 g  g
7. A cube of mass m and density D is suspended form the
point P by a spring of stiffness k. The system is kept inside a  a
a beaker filled with a liquid of density d. The elongation (c) T   1 (d) g T
g 
in the spring, assuming D > d, is
10. A beaker containing water is placed on the platform of a
spring balance. The balance reads 1.5 kg. A stone of mass
3
0.5 kg and density 500 kg/m is immersed in water without
touching the walls of the beaker. What will be the balance
reading now?
(a) 2 kg (b) 2.5 kg
(c) 1 kg (d) 3 kg
11. An ornament weighing 36 g in air weighs only 34 g in
water. Assuming that some copper is mixed with gold to
prepare the ornament, find the amount of copper in it.
Specific gravity of gold is 19.3 and that of copper is 8.9.
(a) 2.2 g (b) 4.4 g
mg  d mg  D 
(a) 1   (b) 1   (c) 1.1 g (d) 3.6 g
k  D k  d
mg  d
(c) 1   (d) none of these
k  D 
FLUID MECHANICS 76
12. A uniform cylinder of length L and mass M having cross- Passage

sectional area A is suspended, with its length vertical from Using the following Passage, solve Q. 18 & 19
a fixed point by a massless spring such that it is half
A rod of length 6 m has a mass 12 kg. It is hinged at one
submerged in a liquid of density  at equilibrium position.
end A at a distance of 3 m below the water surface. The
The extension x0 of the spring when it is in equilibrium is
specific gravity of the material of rod is 0.5.
Mg Mg  LA 
(a) (b) 1  
k k  M 
Mg  LA  Mg  LA 
(c) 1   (d) 1  
k  2M  k  M 
13. A long metal rod of length  and relative density  is held
vertically with its lower end just touching the surface of
water. The speed of the rod when it just sinks in water is
given by 18. What weight must be attached to the other end B so that 5
m of the rod is immersed in water?
(a) 2g (b) 2g
(a) 7 kgf (b) 20kgf
 1  7 7
(c) 2g 1   (d) 2g  2  1 (c) kgf (d) kgf
 2  5 2
14. A large block of ice 5m thick has a vertical hole drilled 19. Find the magnitude and direction of the force exerted by
through it and is floating in the middle of a lake. The the hinge on the rod.
minimum length of the rope required to scoop up bucket
full of water through the hole is
17
(a) kgf in the downward direction
3
(the relative density of ice = 0.9)
(a) 1 m (b) 0.9 m (b) 8 kgf in the downward direction
(c) 0.5 m (d) 0.45 m (c) 4 kgf in the downward direction
15. If a sample of metal weighs 210 g in air, 180 g in water (d) 5 kgf in the downward direction
and 120 g in a liquid: 20. When at rest, a liquid stands at the same level in the tubes
(i) RD of metal is 3 (ii) RD of metal is 7 as shown in the figure. But as indicated, a height difference
(iii) RD of liquid is 3 (iv) RD of liquid is (1/3) h occurs when the system is given an acceleration a towards
the right. Then h is equal to
(a) (i, ii) (b) (i, iii)
(c) (ii, iv) (d) (ii, iii)
–3
16. A vessel contains oil of density 0.8 gcm floating over
–3
mercury of density 13.6 gcm . A homogeneous sphere
floats with half its volume immersed in mercury and the
–3
other half in oil. The density of the sphere in gcm is
(a) 3.3 (b) 6.4
(c) 7.2 (d) 12.8
17. A cubical block of wood of specific gravity 0.5 and a chunk
of concrete of specific gravity 2.5 are fastened together.
The ratio of mass of wood to the mass of concrete which aL gL
(a) 2g (b)
makes the combination to float with its entire volume 2a
submerged in water is:
(a) 1/5 (b) 1/3 gL aL
(c) (d) g
(c) 3/5 (d) 2/5 a
FLUID MECHANICS 77
COMPREHENSION TYPE QUESTIONS 27. Two bodies with volumes V and 2V are equalized on a
Passage balance. The larger body is then immersed in oil of density
d1 = 0.9 g/cm3 while the smaller body is immersed in
Using the following Passage, solve Q. 21 to Q. 26
another liquid when it is found that the equilibrium of the
If the container filled with liquid gets accelerated balance is not disturbed. The density of the second liquid
horizontally or vertically, pressure in liquids gets changed. is then:
In case of horizontally accelerated liquid (ax), the free
(a) 2.4 g/cm3 (b) 1.8 g/cm3
surface has the slope ax/g. In case of vertically accelerated
liquid (ay) for calculation of pressure, effective g is used. (c) 0.45 g/cm3 (d) 2.7 g/cm3
A closed box with horizontal base 6 m by 6m and a height 28. An open glass tube is immersed in mercury in such a way
2m is half filled with liquid. It is given constant horizontal that a length of 8 cm extends above the mercury level.
acceleration g/2 and vertical downward acceleration g/2. The open end of the tube is then closed and sealed and the
21. The angle of the free surface with the horizontal is equal to tube is raised vertically up by additional 46 cm. What will
–1 be length of the air column above mercury in the tube now?
(a) 30 (b) tan (2/3)
–1 (Atmospheric pressure - 76 cm of Hg)
(c) tan (1/3) (d) 45º
(a) 22 cm (b) 38 cm
22. A cylindrical vessel filled with water is released on an
inclined surface of angle  as shown in the figure. The (c) 6 cm (d) 16 cm
friction coefficient of surface with vessel is  (< tan ). 29. There is a circular tube in a vertical plane. Two liquids
Then the constant angle made by the surface of water with which do not mix and of densities d1 and d2 are filled in
the incline will be the tube. Each liquid subtends 90° angle at centre. Radius
joining their interface makes an angle  with vertical.
d1
Ratio d is :
2
–1 –1
(a) tan  (b)  – tan 
–1 –1
(c)  + tan  (d) cot 
23. Length of exposed portion of top of box is equal to -
(a) 2m (b) 3m
(c) 4m (d) 2.5 m
24. Water pressure at the bottom of centre of box is equal to
(atmospheric pressure = 105 N / m 2 , density of water = 1  cos  1  tan 
(a) (b)
3 2
1  cos  1  tan 
1000 kg / m , g  10 m / sec )
(a) 1.1 MPa (b) 0.11 MPa 1  sin  1  sin 
(c) (d)
1  cos  1  sin 
(c) 0.101 MPa (d) 0.011 MPa
25. Maximum value of water pressure in the box is equal to - 30. Two identical cylindrical vessels, each of base area A, have
their bases at the same horizontal level. They contain a
(a) 1.4 MPa (b) 0.14 MPa
liquid of density . In one vessel the height of the liquid is
(c) 0.104 MPa (d) 0.014 MPa
h1 and in the other h2 > h1. When the two vessels are
26. What is the value of vertical acceleration of box for given connected, the work done by gravity in equalizing the levels
horizontal acceleration (g/2), so that no part of bottom of is
box is exposed - 2 2
(a) 2 Ag (h2 – h1) (b) Ag (h2 – h1)
(a) g/2 upward (b) g/2 downward
1 1
Ag  h 2  h1  Ag  h 2  h1 
2 2
(c) g/4 upward (d) not possible (c) (d)
2 4
FLUID MECHANICS 78
31. Two capillary tubes A and B of radii ra and rb and lengths 35. Water stands at level A in the arrangement shown in figure.
a and b respectively are held horizontally. The volume of What will happen if a jet of air is gently blown into the
water flowing per second through tube A is Qa when the horizontal tube in the direction shown in the figure ?
pressure difference across its ends is maintained at P. When
the same pressure difference is maintained across tube B,
the volume of water flowing per second through it is Qb.
The ratio Qa/Qb is
2
b  ra  b  ra 
(a)   (b)  
a  rb  a  rb 
3 4
b  ra  b  ra 
(c)   (d)  
a  rb  a  rb 
32. Two capillary tubes A and B of equal radii ra = rb = r and

equal lengths a = b =  are held horizontally. When the
same pressure difference P is maintained across each tube, (a) Water will rise above A in the capillary
the rate of flow of water in each is Q. If the tubes are
(b) Water will fall below A in the capillary tube
connected in series and the same pressure difference P is
maintained across the combination, the rate of flow through (c) There will be no effect on the level of water in the
the combination will be capillary tube.
(d) Air will emerge from end B in the form of bubbles.
(a) Q/2 (b) Q
36. Tanks A and B open at the top contain two different liquids
(c) 2Q (d) none of these upto certain height in them. A hole is made to the wall of
33. In a test experiment on a model aeroplane in a wind tunnel, each tank at a depth ‘h’ from the surface of the liquid. The
the flow speeds on the lower and upper surfaces of the area of the hole in A is twice that of in B. If the liquid mass
flux through each hole is equal, then the ratio of the
wing are v and 2 v respectively. If the density of air is 
densities of the liquids respectively, is
and the surface area of the wing is A, the dynamic lift on (a) 2/1 (b) 3/2
the wing is given by
(c) 2/3 (d) 1/2
1 1 2 37. In the diagram shown, the difference in the two tubes of
(a) v 2 A (b) v A the manometer is 5 cm, the cross section of the tube at A
2 2
and B is 6 mm2 and 10 mm2 respectively. The rate at which
2
(c) 2 v A (d) 2 v 2 A water flows through the tube is :
(g = 10 ms–2)
34. In a cylindrical water tank there are two small holes Q and
P on the wall at a depth of h1 form upper level of water and
at a height of h2 from the lower end of the tank respectively
as shown in the figure. Water coming out from both the
holes strike the ground at the same point. The ratio of h1
and h2 is
(a) 1 (b) 2
(c) > 1 (d) < 1
(a) 10.0 cc/s (b)8.0 cc/s

(c) 7.5 cc/s (d) 12.5 cc/s
FLUID MECHANICS 79
38. The cylindrical tube of a spray pump has a radius R, one 42. Figure shows two holes in a wide tank containing a liquid
end of which has n fine holes, each of radius r. If the speed column. The water streams coming out of these holes strike
of flow of the liquid in the tube is V, the speed of ejection the ground at the same point. The height of liquid column
of the liquid through the holes is in the tank is
1/ 2
VR VR
(a)   (b)  
nr n r 
3/ 2 2
VR VR
(c)   (d)  
nr  nr 
39. Water from a tap emerges vertically downwards with an
–1
initial speed of 1.0 ms . The cross-sectional area of the (a) 10 cm (b) 8 cm
–4 2
tap is 10 m . Assume that the pressure is constant (c) 9.8 cm (d) 980 cm
throughout the stream of water and that the flow is steady. 43. A siphon tube is used to remove liquid from a container as
The cross-sectional area of the stream 0.15 m below the shown in the figure.
–2
tap is (take g = 10 ms )
–4 2 –5 2
(a) 5.0 × 10 m (b) 1.0 × 10 m
–5 2 –5 2
(c) 5.0 × 10 m (d) 2.0 × 10 m
40. The figure shows a liquid of density  flowing through a
tube with velocity v. The h1 and h2 are the heights of liquid
in the straight and L-shaped tubes, respectively. Choose
the correct statements.
(a) The pressure at the point A is gh1

(b) The pressure at the point B is gh2
(c) The velocity of flow is, v  2gh 2
(d) The velocity of flow is, v  2g  h 2  h1 

41. The velocity of the liquid coming out of a small hole of a
vessel containing two different liquids of densities 2 and
as shown in the figure is
If the tube is initially filled with liquid, then the speed of
the liquid through the siphon is
(a) 2gy (b) 2g  h  y 
(c) 2g  H  h  y  (d) none of the above
44. Water is flowing continuously from a tap having an internal

–3
diameter 8 × 10 m. The velocity as it leaves the tap is
–1
0.4 ms . The water diameter of the water stream at a
–1
distance 2 × 10 m below the tap is close to
–3 –3
(a) 7.5 × 10 m (b) 9.6 × 10 m
–3 –3
(a) 6gh (b) 2 gh (c) 3.6 × 10 m (d) 5.0 × 10 m
(c) 2 2gh (d) gh

FLUID MECHANICS 80
Passage 49. If a number of identical droplets of water, each of radius r,

Using the following Passage, solve Q. 45 to 56 coalesce to form a single drop of radius R, the resulting
2 rise in the temperature of water is given by (here  is the
A cylindrical tank having cross sectional area A = 0.5 m
–3 density of water, s its specific heat and  its surface tension)
is filled with two liquids of density 1 = 900 kg m and
–3
2 = 600 kg m , to a height h = 60 cm each as shown in the  1 1  3  1 1 
2
figure. A small whole having area a = 5 cm is made in (a)    (b)   
s r R s  r R 
right vertical wall at a height y = 20 cm from the bottom. A
horizontal force F is applied on the tank to tank to keep it  1 1  3  1 1 
in static equilibrium. The tank is lying on a horizontal (c)    (d)   
s  r R  s  r R 
surface. Neglect mass of cylindrical tank in comparison to
mass of liquids (take g = 10 ms ).
–2 Multiple Choice Questions
50. The liquid in the capillary tube will rise, if the angle of
contact is
(a) 0° (b) 90°
(c) obtuse (d) acute
51. A capillary tube is immersed vertically in water and the
height of the water column is x. When this arrangement is
taken into a mine of depth d, the height of the water column
is y. If R is the radius of the earth, the ratio x/y is
45. The velocity of efflux is (a) (1 – d/R) (b) (1 + d/R)
–1 –1
(a) 10 ms (b) 20 ms (c) (R – d/R + d) (d) (R + d/R – d)
–1 –1
(c) 4 ms (d) 35 ms 52. The figure shows a container filled with a liquid of density
46. Horizontal force F to keep the cylinder in static . Four points A, B, C and D lie on the vertices of a vertical
equilibrium, if it is placed on a smooth horizontal plane, square. Points A and C lie on a vertical line and points B
is and D lies on a horizontal line. Choose the correct
statement(s) about the pressure at the four points.
(a) 7.2 N (b) 10 N
(c) 15.5 N (d) 20.4 N
47. A tiny sphere of mass m and density x is dropped in a tall jar
of glycerine of density y. When the sphere acquires terminal
velocity, the magnitude of the viscious force acting on it is
(a) mgx/y (b) mgy/x (a) PD = PB (b) PA < PB = PD < PC
(c) mg (1 – y/x) (d) mg (1 + x/y)
PC  PA PC  PA
48. A spherical solid ball of volume V is made of a material of (c) PD  PB  (d) PD  PB 
2 2
density  1 . It is falling through a liquid of density
53. Equal volumes of liquid are poured in the three vessels A,
2. (2 < 1). [Assume that the liquid applies a viscous
B and C (h1 < h2 < h3). All the vessels have same base area.
force on the ball that is proportional to the square of its Select the correct alternatives.
2
speed , ie, Fviscous = –kv (k > 0). The terminal speed
of the ball is
Vg 1   2  Vg 1
(a) (b)
k k
(a) The force on the base will be maximum in vessel A.
Vg 1 Vg (1   2 ) (b) The force on the base will be maximum in vessel C.
(c) (d)
k k
(c) Net force exerted by the liquid in all the three vessels
is equal.
(d) Net force exerted by the liquid in vessel A is maximum.
FLUID MECHANICS 81
54. A spherical pot is more than half filled with water as shown 57. The tank shown in figure has the base area ( × b). It is
in the figure. Choose the correct statement(s) about the filled with a liquid of density  to a height H. Choose the
forces exerted by water on the pot. correct alternative (s).
(a) It is always normal to the surface of pot.

(b) Everywhere it acts in the downward direction. (a) The force at the base of the container is,
(c) The net horizontal force on the pot is zero. F = 1/2gH ( + 2H cot ) b.
(d) The net vertical force on the pot is in the downward
(b) The horizontal component of the force acting on the
direction. 2
inclined wall is Fh = 1/2 gH b
In vertical direction liquid will exert its weight.
(c) The vertical component of the force acting on the
55. The vessel shown in the figure has two sections of areas of
cross section A1 and A2. A liquid of density  fills both the 1 2
inclined wall is Fv  gbH cos ec.
sections, up to a height h in each. Neglect atmospheric 2
pressure.
(d) The vertical component of the force acting on the
1 2
inclined wall is Fv  gbH cot .
2
58. An open vessel containing liquid is moving with constant
acceleration a on a levelled horizontal surface. For this
situation mark out the correct statement(s).
(a) The pressure at the base of the vessel is 2hg.

(b) The force exerted by the liquid on the base of the vessel
is 2hgA2.
(c) The weight of the liquid is < 2hgA2.
(d) The walls of the vessel at the level X exert a downward
force hg(A2–A1) on the liquid.
56. A wall of length  supports water to a height h as shown (a) The maximum pressure is at the leftmost bottom
figure. Choose the correct statement(s). Take  as the corner.
density of water. (b) Along a horizontal line within the liquid as we move
from left to right the pressure decreases.
(c) The pressure at all points on a line making an angle
1  a 
of tan   with horizontal would be same.
g
(d) Along a horizontal line within the liquid as we move
(a) The force exerted by water on the wall per unit length
from left to right, the pressure remains same.
is 1/2 gH 
2
(b) The force exerted by water on the wall is 1/2 gH 

2
(c) The point of application of the resultant force acts

2H/3 below the free surface.
(d) The point of application of the resultant force acts H/3
below the free surface.
FLUID MECHANICS 82
59. A circular cylinder of radius r and height H is filled with 64. The figure shows a siphon tube removing liquid from a
water to a height 2/3 H. It starts rotating about its axis container. Choose the correct statements.
with constantly increasing angular speed. Choose the
correct alternatives.
(a) At all speeds, shape of the free surface is parabolloid. (a) The siphon tube removes liquid only when h1 > 0
(b) The free surface touches first the brim of cylinder and
then the base of the cylinder. (b) The velocity of flow is v  2g  h1  h 2 
(c) The free surface cannot touch the base without spilling
water (c) The pressure at the point B is pB = p0 – gh3
(d) The free surface touches the brim as well as base at (d) The pressure at the point D is p0
the same instant. 65. A tank is filled upto a height h with a liquid and is placed
60. Water flows steadily through a horizontal pipe of a variable on a platform of height h from the ground. To get maximum
cross-section. If the pressure of water is P at a point where range xm a small hole is punched at a distance of y from
the velocity of flow is v, what is the pressure at another
the free surface of the liquid. Then
point where the velocity of flow is 2v;  being the density
of water ?
3 2 3 2
(a) P   v (b) P   v
2 2
2 2
(c) P – 2v (d) P + 2v
61. If the velocity head of a stream of water is equal to 10 cm
then its speed of flow is approximately
(a) 1.0 m/s (b) 1.4 m/s
(c) 140 m/s (d) 10 m/s (a) xm = 2 h (b) xm = 1.5 h
62. A tank is filled to a height H. The range of water coming (c) y = h (d) y = 0.75 h
out of a hole which is a depth H/4 from the surface of 66. A cylindrical vessel is filled with a liquid up to a height H.
water level is A small hole is made in the vessel at a distance y below,
2H 3H the liquid surface as shown in figure. The liquid emerging
(a) (b) from the hole strike the ground at distance x
3 2
3H
(c) 3H (d)
4
63. A cylindrical vessel of 90 cm height is kept filled up to the
brim. It has four holes 1, 2, 3 and 4 which are, respectively,
at height of 20 cm, 30 cm, 40 cm and 50 cm from the
horizontal floor PQ. The water falling at the maximum
horizontal distance from the vessel comes from
(a) x is equal if hole is at depth y or H – y
H
(b) x is maximum for y 
2
(c) Both (a) and (b) are correct
(a) hole number 4 (b) hole number 3 (d) Both (c) and (d) are wrong
(c) hole number 2 (d) hole number 1
FLUID MECHANICS 83
Numberic Value Type Questions

67. A tube with both ends open floats vertically in water. Oil ASSERTION & REASON
3
with a density 800 kg/m is poured into the tube. The tube (A) Statement I is true, Statement II is true and Statement II is
is filled with oil upto the top end while in equilibrium. a correct explanation for Statemetn I.
The length of the tube outside the water is 10 cm.
Determine the depth (in cm) upto which the oil will be (B) Statement I is true, Statement II is true and Statement II is
filled in tube. NOT the correct explanation for Statement I.
(C) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.
(D) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
70. Statement I : Pascal’s law is the working principal of a
hydraulic lift.
Statement II : Pressure is equal to thrust acting per unit
area.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
71. Statement I : To float, a body must displace liquid whose
weight is greater than the actual weight of the body.
68. A rectangular metal plate has dimensions of 10 cm × 20cm. Statement II : The body will experience no net downward
A thin film of oil separates the plate from a fixed horizontal force, in the case of floating.
surface. The separation between the rectangular plate and
the horizontal surface is 0.2 mm. An ideal string is attached (a) A (b) B
to the plate and passes over an ideal pulley to a mass m. (c) C (d) D
When m = 125 g, the metal plate moves at constant speed
72. Statement I : A block is immersed in a liquid inside a
of 5 cm/s across the horizontal surface. Find the coefficient
–1 2 2 beaker, which is falling freely. Buoyant force acting on
of viscosity of oil in 10 dyne-s/cm . [g = 10 m/s ]
block is zero.
Statement II : In case of freely falling liquid there is no
pressure difference between any two points.
69. What is the excess pressure inside a bubble of soap solution s

(a) A (b) B
of radius 5.00 mm ? Given that the surface tension of soap
–2
solution at the temperature (20°C) is 2.50 × 10 N/m. If an air (c) C (d) D
bubble of the same dimension were formed at a depth of 4.0
cm inside a container containing soap solution (relative
density 1.20), what would be the pressure inside the bubble
–2 5
(in 10 atm) ? (1 atm = 1.01 × 10 Pa)
FLUID MECHANICS 84
73. Statement I : When a body floats such that its parts are Match the Column
immersed into two immiscible liquids then force exerted 75. Match the column I and column II -
by liquid I is of magnitude 1v1g.
Column-I Column-II
Statement II : Total buoyant force = 1v1g + 2v2g.
(A) If the radius of soap bubble A is (P) 16 : 9
fource times that of another soap
bubble B, then the ratio of excess
pressuren (PB/PA) will be
1/3
(B) If two small drops of mercury, each (Q) 2 : 1
of radius R coalesce to form a single
large drop, the ratio of the total surface
energy before and after change will be
(C) The enrgy required to blow a bubble (R) 4 : 1
of radius 4 cm and 3cm in the same
liquid is in the ratio of
(D) Two soap bubbles are blown. In the (S) 1 : 4
(a) A (b) B
first bubble excess pressure in 4 times
(c) C (d) D
that of the second soap bubble. The
74. Statement I : All the raindrops hit the surface of the earth
with the same constant velocity. ratio of radii of first to second soap
Statement II : An object falling through a viscous medium bubble.

eventually attains a terminal velocity.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
FLUIDS MECHANICS 85
EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. A hemispherical portion of radius R is removed from the 3. A uniform solid cylinder of density 0.8 g/cm2 floats in
bottom of a cylinder of radius R. The volume of the equilibrium in a combination of two non-mixing liquids A
remaining cylinder is V and mass M. It is suspended by a and B with its axis vertical. The densities of the liquids A
string in a liquid of density , where it stays vertical. The and B are 0.7 g/cm3 and 1.2 g/cm3 respectively. The height
upper surface of the cylinder is at a depth h below the of liquid A is hA = 1.2 cm. The length of the part of the
liquid surface. The force on the bottom of the cylinder by cylinder immersed in liquid B is hB = 0.8 cm. (2002)
the liquid is (2001)
(a) Find the total force exerted by liquid A on the cylinder.

(a) Mg (b) Mg – Vg
2 2 (b) Find h, the length of the part of the cylinder in air.
(c) Mg + R hg (d) g (V + R h)
2. A wooden block, with a coin placed on its top, floats in (c) The cylinder is depressed in such a way that its top
water as shown in figure. The distance l and h are shown surface is just below the upper surface of liquid A and
there. After sometime the coin falls into the water. Then is then released. Find the acceleration of the cylinder
(2002) immediately after it is released.
4. Statement–I : The stream of water flowing at high speed

from a garden hose pipe tends to spread like a fountain
when held vertically up, but tends to narrow down when
held vertically down. (2003)
Statement–II : In any steady flow of an incompressible

fluid, the volume flow rate of the fluid remains constant.
(a) If Statement I is true. Statement Ii is true; Statement Ii is

the correct explanation for Statement I.
(b) If Statement I is true, Statement Ii is true; Statement Ii is

(a) l decreases and h increases not a correct explanation for Statement I.
(b) l increases and h decreases (c) If Statement I is true; Statement II is false.

(c) Both l and h increase
(d) If Statement I is false; Statement II is true.
(d) Both l and h decrease
FLUIDS MECHANICS 86
5. A container of width 2a is filled with a liquid. A thin wire of 9. Water is filled in a cylindrical container to a height of 3 m.
weight per unit length  is gently placed over the liquid The ratio of the cross-sectional area of the orifice and the
surface in the middle of the surface as shown in the fig. As beaker is 0.1. The square of the speed of the liquid coming
2
a result, the liquid surface is depressed by a distance y (y out from the orifice is (g = 10 m/s ) (2005)
<<a). Determine the surface tension of the liquid.
(2004)
2 2 2 2
(a) 50 m /s (b) 50.5m /s
2 2 2 2
(c) 51m /s (d) 52 m /s
Comprehension Type
Passage - 1
6. Consider a horizontally oriented syringe containing water A wooden cylinder of diameter 4r, height h and density
located at a height of 1.25m above the ground. The diameter /3 is kept on a hole of diameter 2r of a tank, filled with
of the plunger is 8mm and the diameter of the nozzle is liquid of density  as shown in the figure.
2mm. The plunger is pushed with a constant speed of 0.25
m/s. Find the horizontal range of water stream on the
2
ground. (Take g = 10m/s ). (2004)
10. Now level of the liquid starts decreasing slowly. When the
level of liquid is at a height h1 above the cylinder the block
starts moving up. At what value of h1, will the block rise ?
(2006)
(a) 4h/9 (b) 5h/9
5h
7. A small sphere falls from rest in a viscous liquid. Due to (c) (d) Remains same
3
friction, heat is produced. Find the relation between the
rate of production of heat and the radius of the sphere at 11. The block in the above question is maintained at the
terminal velocity. (2004) position by external means and the level of liquid is lowered.
8. A U-shaped tube contains a liquid of density  and it is The height h2 when this external force reduces to zero is
rotated about the line as shown in the figure. Find the (2006)
difference in the levels of liquid column. (2005)
4h 5h
(a) (b)
9 9
2h
(c) remains same (d)
3
FLUIDS MECHANICS 87
12. If height h2 of water level is further decreased, then 15. Two soap bubbles A and B are kept in a closed chamber
–2
(2006) where the air is maintained at pressure 8 Nm . The radii of
bubbles A and B are 2 cm, respectively. Surface tension of
(a) cylinder will not move up and remains at its original –1
the soap-water used tomake bubbles is 0.04 Nm . Find the
position
nB
(b) for h2 = h/3, cylinder again starts moving up ratio n , where nA and nB are the number of moles of air in
A
(c) for h2=h/4, cylinder again starts moving up
bubbles A and B, respectively. [Neglect the effect of
(d) for h2 = h/5, cylinder again starts moving up gravity] (2009)
13. What is the excess pressure inside a bubble of soap Sol. of 16. A cylindrical vessel of height 500 mm has an orifice (small
radius 5.00 mm ? Given that the surface tension of soap Sol. at hole) at its bottom. The orifice is initially closed and water
–2
the temperature (20°C) is 2.50 × 10 N/m. If an air bubble of the is filled in it upto height H.Now the top is completely sealed
same dimension were formed at a depth of 4.0 cm inside a with a cap and the orifice at the bottom is opened. Some
container containing soap Sol. (relative density 1.20), what water comes out from the orifice and the water level in the
–2
would be the pressure inside the bubble (in 10 atm) ? (1 vessel becomes steady with height of water column being
5
atm = 1.01 × 10 Pa) (2007) 200 mm. Find the fall in height (in mm) of water level due to
opening of the orifice.
14. A glass tube of uniform internal radius (r) has a value
5 –2
separating the two identical ends. Initially, the valve is in a [Take atmospheric pressure = 1.0 × 10 Nm , density of
–3 –2
tightly closed position. End 1 has a hemispherical soap water = 1000 kg m and g = 10 ms . Neglect any effect of
bubble of radius r. End 2 has sub-hemispherical soap surface tension.] (2009)
bubble as shown in figure. Passage - 2
Just after opening the valve. (2008) When liquid medicine of density  is to be put in the eye,
it is done with the help of a dropper. As the bulb on the top
of the dropper is pressed, a drop forms at the opening of
the dropper. We wish to estimate the size of the drop.
We first assume that the drop formed at the opening is
spherical because that requires a minimum increase in its
surface energy. To determine the size, we calculate the net
vertical force due to the surface tension T when the radius
of the drop is R. When this force becomes smaller than the
weight of the drop, the drop gets detached from the dropper.
(2010)
(a) air from end 1 flows towards end 2. No change in the
17. If the radius of the opening of the dropper is r, the vertical
volume of the soap bubbles
force due to the surface tension on the drop of radius R
(b) air from end 1 flows towards end 2. Volume of the soap (assuming r << R) is
bubble at end 1 decreases. (a) 2rT (b) 2 RT
(c) no change occurs
2r 2 T 2R 2 T
(d) air from end 2 flows towards end 1. Volume of the soap (c) (d)
R r
bubble at end 1 increases.
–4 3 –3 –2 –1
18. If r = 5 × 10 m,  = 10 kg m , g = 10 ms , T = 0.11 Nm , the
radius of the drop when it detaches from the dropper is
approximately
–3 –3
(a) 1.4 × 10 m (b) 3.3 × 10 m
–3 –3
(c) 2.0 × 10 m (d) 4.1 × 10 m
FLUIDS MECHANICS 88
19. After the drop detaches, its surface energy is Passage - 3

–6 –6
(a) 1.4 × 10 J (b) 2.7 × 10 J A spray gun is shown in the figure where a piston pushes
–6 –9
(c) 5.4 × 10 J (d) 8.1 × 10 J air out of a nozzle. A thin tube of uniform cross section is
20. A glass capillary tube is of the shape of a truncated cone connected to the nozzle. The other end of the tube is in a
with an apex angle  so that its two ends have cross small liquid container. As the piston pushes air through
sections of different radii. When dipped in water vertically, the nozzle, the liquid from the container rises into the nozzle
water rises in it to a height h, where the radius of its crosss and is sprayed out. For the spray gun shown, the radii of
section is b. If the surface tension of water is S, its density the piston and the nozzle are 20 mm and 1 mm respectively.
is , and its contact angle with glass is , the value of h will The upper end of the container is open to the atmosphere.
be (g is the acceleration due to gravity) (2014) (2014)
22. If the piston is pushed at a speed of 5mms–1, the air comes

out of the nozzle with a speed of
(A) 0.1 ms–1 (B) 1 ms–1
2S 2S
(A) cos      (B) cos      (C) 2ms–1 (D) 8 ms–1
b g b g
23. If the density of air is a and that of the liquid l then for a
2S given piston speed the rate (volume per unit time) at which
(C) bg cos    /2 
2S
(D) cos    /2  the liquid is sprayed will be proportional to
bg
21. A person in a lift is holding a water jar, which has a small
a l
hole at the lower end of its side. When the lift is at rest, the (A) (B) a l (C)
l a
water jet coming out of the hole hits the floor of the lift at a
distance d of 1.2 m from the person. In the following, state (D) l
of the lift’s motion is given in List I and the distance where
the water jet hits the floor of the lift is given in List II. 24. A spherical body of radius R consists of a fluid of constant
Match the statements from List I with those in List II and density and is in equilibrium under its own gravity. If P(r)
select the correct answer using the code given below the is the pressure at r(r < P), then the correct option(s) is
lists. (2014) (are). (2015)
List List II
P  r  3R / 4  63
P. Lift is accelerating vertically up. 1. d = 1.2 m
(a) P(r = 0) = 0 (b) P r  2R / 4  80
Q. Lift is accelerating vertically down 2. d > 1.2 m
 
with an acceleration less than the
P  r  3R / 5 16 P  r  R / 2  20
gravitational acceleration.
(c) P r  2R / 5  21 (d) P r  R / 3  27
R. Lift is moving vertically up with 3. d < 1.2 m
   
constant speed
S. Lift is falling freely. 4. No water leaks
out of the jar
(a) P -2, Q-3, R-2, S-4 (b) P-2, Q-3, R-1, S-4
(c) P-1, Q-1, R-1, S-4 (d) P-2, Q-3, R-1, S-1
FLUIDS MECHANICS 89
25. Two spheres P and Q of equal radii have densities  and 28. A cylindrical capillary tube of 0.2 mm radius is made by
, respectively. The spheres are connected by a massless joining two capillaries T1 and T2 of different materials
string and placed in liquids L1 and L2 of densities  &  having water contact angles of 0° and 60° respectively.
and viscosities  and , respectively. They float in The capillary tube is dipped vertically in water in two
equilibrium with the sphere P in L1 and sphere Q in L2 and different configurations, case I and II as shown in figure.
the string being taut (see figure). If sphere P alone in L2 Which of the following option(s) is (are) correct?
 [Surface tension of water = 0.075 N/m , density of water
has terminal velocity VP and Q alone in L1 has terminal
= 1000 kg/m3, take g = 10m/s2] (2019)

velocity VQ , then (2015)
(a) For case I, if the joint is kept at 8 cm above the water

  surface, the height of water column in the tube will
VP  VP 
  1
(a) V   2
(b) V be 7.5 cm. (Neglect the weight of the water in the
Q
2 Q
1
meniscus)
    (b) For case I, capillary joint is 5cm above the water
(c) VP .VQ  0 (d) VP .VQ  0
surface, the height of water column raised in the tube
26. Consider two solid spheres P and Q each of density 8gm will be more than 8.75 cm. (Neglect the weight of the
cm–3 and diameters 1 cm and 0.5cm, respectively. Sphere P water in the meniscus)
is dropped into a liquid of density 0.8gm cm–3 and viscosity (c) The correction in the height of water column raised
 = 3 Poiseuille. Sphere Q is dropped into a liquid of in the tube, due to weight of water contained in the
density 1.6gm cm–3 and viscosity  = 2 Poiseuille. The meniscus, will be different for both cases.
ratio of the terminal velocities of P and Q is
(2016) (d) For case II, the capillary joint is 5 cm above the water
surface, the height of water column raised in the tube
27. A uniform capillary tube of inner radius r is dipped
will be 3.75 cm. (Neglect the weight of the water in
vertically into a beaker filled with water. The water rises to
the meniscus)
a height h in the capillary tube above the water surface in
the beaker. The surface tension of water is  . The angle
of contact between water and the wall of the capillary
tube is . Ignore the mass of water in the meniscus. Which
of the following statements is (are) true? (2018)
(a) For a given material of the capillary tube, h decreases
with increase in r
(b) For a given material of the capillary tube, h is
independent of 
(c) If this experiment is performed in a lift going up with a
constant acceleration, then h decreases
(d) h is proportional to contact angle 
FLUIDS MECHANICS 90
29. A beaker of radius r is filled with water (refractive index 30. A horizontally oriented tube AB of length 1m rotates with
4 a constant angular velocity 10 3 rad/s about a stationary
= ) up to a height H as shown in the figure on the left.
3 vertical axis O1O2 passing through the end A. The tube is
The beaker is kept on a horizontal table rotating with filled with an ideal fluid. The end A is open and end B has
angular speed  . This makes the water surface curved a very small hole. Find the velocity of the fluid (in m/s)
so that the difference in the height of water level at from hole when the length of the liquid column is half the
length of tube.
the center and at the circumference of the beaker is(h
<< H, h << r), as shown in the figure on the right. Take
this surface to be approximately spherical with a radius of
curvature s. Which of the following is/are correct? (g is
the acceleration due to gravity) (2020)
31. A train with cross-sectional area St is moving with speed
 t inside a long tunnel of cross-sectional area
S0 (S0 = 4St ) . Assume that almost all the air (density  )

in front of the train flows back between its sides and the
walls of the tunnel. Also, the air flow with respect to the
train is steady and laminar. Take the ambient pressure and
that inside the train to be p0 .If the pressure in the region
h2 + r2
(a) R = between the sides of the train and the tunnel walls is p,
2h
7
then p 0 - p = Vt2 . The value of N is ________.
3r2 2N
(b) R =
2h (2020)
(c) Apparent depth of the bottom of the beaker is close 32. A hot air balloon is carrying some passengers, and a few
-1
sandbags of mass 1 kg each so that its total mass is 480
3H  2 H  kg. Its effective volume giving the balloon its buoyancy
to 1+ 
2  2g  is V. The balloon is floating at an equilibrium height of
100 m. When N number of sandbags are thrown out, the
(d) Apparent depth of the bottom of the beaker is close to balloon rises to a new equilibrium height close to 150 m
with its volume V remaining unchanged. If the variation
-1
3H  2 H  of the density of air with height h from the ground is
1+ 
4  4g  h
-
(h) = 0 e h0 , where 0 = 1.25 kg m-3 and h 0 = 6000
m, the value of N is _________. (2020)

FLUIDS MECHANICS 91
33. A cylindrical tube, with its base as shown in the figure, is 34. A soft plastic bottle, filled with water of density 1gm/cc,
filled with water. It is moving down with a constant carries an inverted glass test tube with some air (ideal gas)
acceleration a along a fixed inclined plane with angle trapped as shown in figure. The test tube has a mass of
  45 . P1 and P2 are pressures at point 1 and 2, 5gm, and it is made of a thick glass of density 2.5 gm/cc.
Initially the bottle is sealed at atmospheric pressure
respectively, located at the base of the tube. Let
p 0  105 Pa so that the volume of the trapped air
   P1  P2  /  gd  . where  is density of water, d is the
inner diameter of the tube and g is the acceleration due to  0  3.3cc. When the bottle is squeezed from outside at
gravity. Which of the following statement(s) is(are) correct? constant temperature, the pressure inside rises and the
(2021) volume of the trapped air reduces. It is found that the test
tube begins to sink at pressure p0  p without changing
its orientation. At this pressure, the volume of the trapped
air is  0   let   Xcc and p  Y  103 Pa.
(2021)
(a)   0 when a  g / 2
(b)   0 when a  g / 2
The value of X is _______.
2 1
(c)   when   g / 2 35. A soft plastic bottle, filled with water of density 1gm/cc,
2
carries an inverted glass test-tube with some air (ideal gas)
1 trapped as shown in the figure. The test-tube has a mass
(d)   when   g / 2
2 of 5gm, and it is made of a thick glass of density 2.5 gm/cc.
Initially the bottle is sealed at atmospheric pressure so
that the volume of the trapped air is 0  3.3cc. When the
bottle is squeezed from outside at constant temperature,
the pressure inside rises and the volume of the trapped air
reduces. it is found that the test tube begins to sink at
pressure 0  p without changing the orientation. At this
pressure, the volume of the trapped air is 0   let
  Xcc and p  Y 10 Pa .

3
The value of Y is ______. (2021)

FLUIDS MECHANICS 92
FLUIDS MECHANICS

12
SIMPLEChapter
HARMONIC12 MOTION 94
1. INTRODUCTION 3. Frequency
The frequency of a particle executing S.H.M. is
equal to the number of oscillations completed in
(1) A motion which repeats itself over and over again
one second.
after a regular interval of time is called a periodic
ω 1 k
motion. ν
= =
(2) Oscillatory or vibratory motion is kind of motion 2π 2π m
4. Phase
in which a body moves to and fro or back and forth
The phase of particle executing S.H.M. at any
repeatedly about a fixed point in a definite interval instant is its state as regard to its position and
of time. direction of motion at that instant. It is measured as
(3) Simple harmonic motion is a specific type of argument (angle) of sine in the equation of S.H.M.
oscillatory motion, in which Phase = (ωt + φ)
(a) particle moves in one dimension, At t = 0, phase = φ; the constant φ is called initial
(b) particle moves to and fro about a fixed mean phase of the particle or phase constant.
position (where Fnet = 0), 1.2 Important Relations
(c) net force on the particle is always directed 1. Position (For φ = 2nπ )
towards mean position, and
(d) magnitude of net force is always proportional
to the displacement of particle from the mean
position at that instant.
So, Fnet ∝ x ⇒ Fnet =−kx
where, k is known as force constant
⇒ ma = – kx Fig. 12.1
−k
⇒ a= x or a = −ω 2 x If mean position is at origin the position
m (x coordinate) depends on time in general as:
where, ω is known as angular frequency. x (t) = sin (ωt + φ)
d2x • At mean position, x = 0
⇒ = −ω 2 x
dt 2 • At extremes, x = + A, – A
This equation is called as the differential 2. Velocity (For φ = 2nπ )
equation of S.H.M.
The general expression for x(t) satisfying the
above equation is: x (t) = A sin (ωt + φ)
1.1 Some Important terms
1. Amplitude
The amplitude of particle executing S.H.M. is its
maximum displacement on either side from the Fig. 12.2
mean position. • =
At any instant t, v(t ) Aω cos(ωt + φ )
A is the amplitude of the particle in the equation
x(t) = A sin (ωt + φ) • At any position x, v( x) = ±ω A2 − x 2
2. Time Period • Velocity is minimum at extremes because the
Time period of a particle executing S.H.M. is the particles is at rest.
time taken to complete one cycle and is denoted by i.e., v = 0 at extreme position.
T. • Velocity has maximum magnitude at mean
position.
2π m m
Time period= (T) = π
2= as ω vmax = ω A at mean position.
ω k k
SCAN CODE
SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION 95
3. Acceleration (For φ = 2nπ )
Fig. 12.5
1 2
• U is maximum at extremes, Umax = kA
Fig. 12.3 2
• U is minimum at mean position
• −ω 2 A sin(ωt + φ )
At any instant t, a (t ) =
2.3 Total Energy
• At any position x, a ( x) = −ω 2 x
• Acceleration is always directed towards mean
position.
• The magnitude of acceleration is minimum at
mean position and maximum at extremes.
amin = 0 at mean position.
Fig. 12.6
amax = ω 2 A at extremes.
1 2 1
=
T .E. = kA mA2ω 2
2 2
2. ENERGY IN SHM
NOTE:
2.1 Kinetic Energy Total energy is constant at all instants and at all
positions
1 2
K= mv
2
mω 2 ( A2 − x 2 ) (as =
1
⇒K= v ω A2 − x 2 )
2
1
mω 2 A2 cos 2 (ωt + φ )
2
Fig. 12.7 Energy Position Graph
3. RELATION BETWEEN SIMPLE HARMONIC

MOTION AND UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
Fig. 12.4
• K is maximum at mean position and minimum at
extremes.
1 1 2
•= K max =m ω 2 A2 kA at mean position
2 2
• Kmin = 0 at extremes.
2.2 Potential Energy
Fig. 12.8
If potential energy is taken as zero at mean position, Consider a particle Q, moving on a circle of radius A
then at any position x,
with constant angular ω .
1 2 1
U= ( x) = kx mA2ω 2 sin 2 (ωt + φ ) The projection of Q on a diameter BC is P. It is clear
2 2
from the figure that as Q moves around the circle the
projection P oscillates between B and C.
SCAN CODE
The angle that the radius OQ makes with the x-axis is (c) Find the net force on it and check if it is towards
θ= ωt + φ . Here, φ is the angle made by the radius mean position.
OQ with the x-axis at time t = 0. Further, (d) Try to express net force as a proportional function
OP = OQ cos θ of its displacement ‘x’.
or x A cos (ωt + φ )
= NOTE:
This is standard x-t equation of SHM. If step (c) and step (d) are proved then it is a simple
Hence, P executives SHM. That is harmonic motion.
(e) Find k from expression of net force (F = – kx) and

m
find time period using T = 2π .
k
Fig. 12.9 5. SPRING BLOCK SYSTEM

Fig. (a) Relation between SHM and uniform circular
motion, 8 5.1 Horizontal Spring
(b) Position, Let a block of mass m be placed on a smooth horizontal
(c) Velocity and surface and rigidly connected to spring of force constant
(d) acceleration K whose other end is permanently fixed.
When a particle moves with uniform circular motion, its
projection on a diameter moves with SHM. The velocity
of Q is perpendicular to OQ and has a magnitude of
velocity v′ = ω A .
The component v ' along the x-axis is,
v= −ω A sin (ωt + φ )
−v′ sin θ or v =
Which is also the velocity of P. The acceleration of Q is
centripetal and has a magnitude, a ′ = ω 2 x . Fig. 12.10
The component of a ′ along the x-axis is • Mean position: when spring is at its natural length.
a= −ω 2 A cos (ωt + φ )
− a ′ cos θ or a = m
• Time period: T = 2π
Which again coincides with the acceleration of P. k
NOTE: 5.2 Vertical Spring
v = velocity of SHM of particle (a) If the spring is suspended vertically from a fixed
dx d point and carries the block at its other end as
== A cos (ωt + φ )  = −ω A sin (ωt + φ )
dt dt shown, the block will oscillate along the vertical
a = acceleration of SHM of particle line.
dv
= = −ω 2 A cos (ωt + φ )
dt
4. TIME PERIOD OF S.H.M.
To find whether a motion is S.H.M. or not and to find

its time period, follow these steps: Fig. 12.11
(a) Locate the mean (equilibrium) position mg
• Mean position: spring in elongated by d =
mathematically by balancing all the forces on it. k
(b) Displace the particle by a displacement ‘x’ from the
m
mean position in the probable direction of • Time period: T = 2π
oscillation. k
SCAN CODE
5.3 Combination of Springs Example: A light spring of force constant k is held

(a) Springs in Series between two blocks of masses m and 2m. The two
When two springs of force constant k1 and k2 are blocks and the spring system rests on a smooth
connected in series as shown, they are equivalent to horizontal floor. Now the blocks are moved towards
a single spring of force constant k which is given each other compressing the spring by x and then they
by are suddenly released. Then find the relative velocity
between the blocks when the spring attains its natural
1 1 1
= + length.
k k1 k2
k1k2
k=
k1 + k2
Fig. 12.15
Solution: Potential energy of the spring is being
converted into kinetic energy of system.
1 2
Potential energy of the spring before released = kx
2
K.E. of the system in centre of mass frame
1 2 m × 2m 2m
= µ vrelative =
where µ = is reduced
2 m + 2m 3
mass of the system.
1 2 1
Now, µv = kx 2
2 relative 2
Fig. 12.12 3
2
vrelative = kx 2
(b) Springs in parallel 2m
 3k 
For a parallel combination as shown, the effective vrelative =   x

spring constant is k = k1 + k2  2m 
6. ANGULAR SHM
6.1 Angular Oscillations
Instead of straight-line motion, if a particle or centre of
mass of a body is oscillating on a small arc of circular
path then it is called angular S.H.M.
≡
For angular S.H.M., τ = – kθ
Fig. 12.13
⇒ Iα = −kθ
5.4 Reduced Mass and Problems Involving
I
Reduced Mass ⇒ Time period, T = 2π
k
Definition: When two bodies in relative motion are
acted upon by a central force involving Newton’s law 6.1.1 Simple Pendulum
then the system can be replaced by a single mass 
called the reduced mass which is given as • Time period: T = 2π
g
mm
µ= 1 2 • Time period of a pendulum in a lift:
m1 + m2

T = 2π
g+a
(if acceleration a of the lift is upwards)

T = 2π
Fig. 12.14 g −a
(if acceleration a of the lift is downwards)
SCAN CODE
6.1.2 Physical Pendulum This system is called a torsional pendulum. There is no

I small-angle restriction in this situation as long as the
Time period: T = 2π
mgl elastic limit of the wire is not exceeded. Figure shows
the balance wheel of a watch oscillating as a torsional
pendulum, energized by the mainspring.
7. SUPERPOSITION OF SIMPLE HARMONIC

MOTION
A simple harmonic motion is produced when a force

(called restoring force) proportional to the
displacement acts on a particle. If a particle is acted
upon by two such forces the resultant motion of the
Fig. 12.16 particle is a combination of two simple harmonic
motions.
Where, I is moment of inertia of object about point of
suspension, and l is distance of centre of mass of Suppose the two individual motions are represented
object from point of suspension. by,
6.1.3 Torsional pendulum x1 = A1 sin ωt

And x2 A2 sin (ωt + φ )
=
Both the simple harmonic motions have same angular
frequency ω .
Fig. 12.17 Fig. 12.18

Figure shows a rigid body suspended by a wire attached
The resultant displacement of the particle is given by,
at the top to a fixed support. When the body is twisted
x= x1 + x2
through some small angle θ , the twisted wire exerts on
=A1 sin ωt + A2 sin (ωt + φ )
the body a restoring torque that proportional to the
angular displacement. That is, τ = −κθ = A sin (ωt + α )
Where κ (kappa) is called the torsion constant of the Here, A = A12 + A22 + 2 A1 A2 cos φ
support wire. The value of κ can be obtained by A2 sin φ
applying a known torque to twist the wire through a And tan α =
A1 + A2 cos φ
measurable angle θ . Applying Newton’s second law
Thus, we can see that this is similar to the vector
for rotational motion, we find
addition. The same method of vector addition can be
d 2θ applied to the combination of more than two simple
τ= −κθ = I 2
dt harmonic motions.
dθ
2
κ 8. DAMPED AND FORCED OSCILLATIONS
2
= − θ
dt I
Again, this is the equation of motion for a simple 8.1 Damped Oscillations
κ
harmonic oscillator, with ω = and time period (i) The oscillations of a body whose amplitude goes
I on decreasing with time is defined as damped
oscillations.
I
T = 2π
κ
SCAN CODE
(ii) In these oscillations the amplitude of oscillation

decreases exponentially due to damping forces 9. MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES OF SHM
like frictional force, viscous force etc.
9.1 Oscillation of a Cylinder Floating in a Liquid
Let a cylinder of mass m and density d be floating on
the surface of a liquid of density ρ . The total length of
cylinder is L.
Fig. 12.19
(iii) Due to decrease in amplitude the energy of the
oscillator also goes on decreasing exponentially.
8.2 Forced Oscillation
The oscillations in which a body oscillates under the
influence of an external periodic force are known as
forced oscillations. Fig. 12.20
8.3 Resonance Ld
• Mean position: cylinder is immersed upto  = .
When the frequency of external force is equal to the ρ
natural frequency of the oscillator, then this state is Ld 
known as the state of resonance. And this frequency is • =
Time period: π
T 2= 2π .
ρg g
known as resonant frequency.
8.4 Resonance and its Consequences 9.2 Liquid Oscillating in a U-tube
The fact that there is an amplitude peak at driving Consider a liquid column of mass m and density ρ in a
frequencies close to the natural frequency of the U-tube of area of cross section A. Let L = 2H,
system is called resonance. Physics is full of examples
of resonance; building up the oscillations of a child on
a swing by pushing with a frequency equal to the
swing’s natural frequency is one. Inexpensive loud
speakers often have an unwanted boom or buzz when
a musical note happens to coincide with the resonant h
frequency of the speaker cone. Resonance also occurs
in electric circuits; a tuned circuit in a radio or
television receiver responds strongly to waves having
frequencies near its resonant frequency, and this fact is
used to select a particular station and reject the others.
Resonance in mechanical systems can be destructive. Fig. 12.21
A company of soldiers once destroyed a bridge by • Mean position: when height of liquid is same in
marching across it in step; the frequency of their steps both limbs.
was close to the natural vibration frequency of the • Time period:
bridge and the resulting oscillation had large enough
m 2L ⋅ A L
amplitude to tear the bridge apart. = π
T 2= π
2= 2π
2 Aρ g 2 Aρ g 2g
Ever since, marching soldiers have been ordered to
break step before crossing a bridge. Nearly everyone where, L is length of liquid column.
has seen the film of the collapse of the Tacoma
Narrows suspension bridge in 1940.
SCAN CODE
9.3 Body Oscillation in Tunnel Along Any Chord of ky

So the force in the spring F = .
the Earth 2
Now as pulley is massless F = 2T ,
F ky
⇒T = = .
2 4
So the restoring force on the mass m,
1 1
T= ky = k ' y ⇒ k ' = k
4 4
Fig. 12.22 1 k' 1 k fA
• Mean position: At the centre of the chord. ⇒=
fB = =
2π m 2π 4m 2
• Time period:
R
= π
T 2= 84.6 minutes
g
where, R is radius of earth = 6400 Km.
9.4 Pulley Spring Block System
A system is consisting of massless pulley, a spring of
spring constant k and a block of mass m. If the block is
slightly displaced vertically down from its equilibrium
position and released.
Let’s find the frequency of its vertical oscillation in
given cases:
Case (A): Fig. 12.24
As the pulley is fixed and string in inextensible, if mass
Case (C):
m is displaced by y the spring will stretch by y
In this situation if the mass m moved by the pulley will
F = T = ky i.e.,
also move by y and so the spring will stretch by 2 (as
restoring force is linear and so motion of mass m will be
linear simple harmonic with frequency string is inextensible) and so, T=' F= 2ky .
1 k Now as pulley is massless so T = F + T ' = 4ky

fA =
2π m i.e., the restoring force on the mass m
So, T = 4ky = k ' y ⇒ k ' = 4k
1 k' 1 4k
⇒=
fC = = 2 fA
2π m 2π m
Fig. 12.23
Case (B):
Fig. 12.25
The pulley is moveable and string inextensible, so if
mass m moves down a distance y, the pulley will move
 y
down by   .
2
SCAN CODE
Solved Examples
Write the displacement equation representing the A body oscillates with SHM along with X-axis. Its
following conditions obtained in a simple harmonic displacement varies with time according to the
motion. Amplitude = 0.01 m, frequency = 600 Hz, equation:
π  π
initial phase . = x (4.00m) cos  π t + 
6  4
π Calculate at t = 1.00 s:
Sol. Here A = 0.01 m, ν = 600Hz , φ =
6 (a) displacement
(b) velocity
The displacement equation of simple harmonic motion (c) acceleration
is
(d) Also calculate the maximum speed and maximum
= y A sin(ω t =
+ φ ) A sin(2πν t + φ ) acceleration and
(e) phase at t = 2.00 s.
 π
=⇒ y 0.01sin 1200π t +  Sol. By comparing the given equation with the general
 3
equation for SHM along X-axis,
Example - 2 i.e., x = Acos (ωt + φ0), we get
A particle executes SHM of amplitude 25 cm and time A = 4.00m, ω = π rad/s, φ0 = π/4
period 3s. What is the minimum time required for the
(a) Displacement at t = 1.00 s i.e.,
particle to move between two points 12.5 cm on either
x = (4.00 m) cos (π × 1 + π/4) = (4.00) (–cos π/4)
side of the mean position?
Sol. With usual notation, we are given that amplitude = (4.00) (–0.707) = – 2.83 m
A = 25 cm, time period T = 3s (b) Velocity at t = 1.00 s, i.e., v = – ωA sin (ωt + φ0)
Displacement from the mean position, y = 12.5 cm or v = – (π rad/s) (4.00 m) sin [π × 1 + π/4]
If t is the time taken by the particle to move from the
= –(4.00 π) (–sin π/4) m/s
mean position to a point 12.5 cm on any side of the
= (4.00 × 3.14) (0.707) m/s
mean position,
= 8.89 m/s
 2π   2π 
=y A sin = ωt A sin  t  or 12.5 = 25sin  t (c) Acceleration,
 T   3 
a = – ω A cos (ωt + φ0)
2
 2π  1 π  2π  π
or sin  t = = sin or  t =
 3  2 6  3  6 = – π × 4.00 cos (π × 1 + π/4)
2
= – (4.00 π ) (–cos π/4) m/s

2 2
or t = 0.25 s
Obviously, minimum time taken by the particle to 2 2
= 4.00 × (3.14) × 0.707 m/s
move between two points 12.5 cm on either side of the 2
mean position. = 27.9 m/s
= 2t = 2 × 0.25 = 0.5 s. (d) Maximum velocity,
vmax = ωA = π × 4.00 = 12.6 m/s
Maximum acceleration, amax = ω A = π × 4.00
2 2
2
= 39.5 m/s
π
(e) Phase, (ωt + φ0) = (π rad/s) × 2s +
4
π 9π
= 2π + = .
4 4
Example - 4 l
T = 2π … (i)
A block is resting on a piston which is moving g
vertically with a SHM of period 1.0 s. At what When length is increased by 1%, i.e., by 1/100,
amplitude of vibration will the block and the piston
separate? What is the maximum velocity of the piston new length = l + (l/100) = l (1 + 1/100)
at this amplitude? If T’ be its changed time period,
Sol. We are given that T = 1.0 s l (1 + 1 / 100)
Further, the maximum acceleration in SHM, T’ = 2π … (ii)
g
i.e., amax = ω A
2
From eqns. (i) and (ii),
For the block and the piston to separate, 1/2
T'  1   1 
amax ≥ g or ω A ≥ g
2 =1 + =1 + 
T  100   100 
gT 2 T'  1 
or (2π/T) A ≥ g or A ≥
2
= 1 +  [using (1 + x) =1 + nx for x  1 ]
n
or
4π2 T  200 
(9.8 m / s 2 )(1.0s) 2
or A ≥ T'
2
(as 4π = 39.48) or = (1 + 0.005) = 1.005
39.48 T
or A ≥ 0.248 m or T’ = (1.005)T = 1.005 × 2
Thus, the block and the piston separate, when (as for a second pendulum, T = 2s)
A = 0.248 m or T’ = 2.01 s
Clearly, Since the time period has increased, the pendulum will
 2π   2 × 3.14  make lesser number of vibrations per day. In other
vmax = ωA =   A =   (0.248 m) = 1.56 m/s words, it will run slow.
 T   1.0s 
Loss in time in 2 s = 0.01 s
Example - 5 0.01s
Loss in 1 day (i.e., 86400 s) = × 86400 s
A point particle of mass 0.1 kg is executing SHM of 2s
amplitude 0.1 m. When the particle passes through the
–3 = 432 s
mean position, its kinetic energy is 8 × 10 J. Obtain
the equation of motion of this particle if the initial Example - 7
o
phase of oscillations is 45 .
A spring compressed by 10 cm develops a restoring
Sol. Here, m = 0.1 kg, A = 0.1 m, force of 10 N. A body of mass 9 kg is placed on it.
K0 (kinetic energy at mean position) What is the force constant of the spring? What is the
depression in the spring under the weight of the body?
= 8 × 10 J, φ0 = 45 = π/4
–3 o
What is the period of oscillation if the body is
1 1 disturbed from its equilibrium position?
mω A , ⇒ (0.1 kg)ω (0.1 m)
2 2 2 2
Since K0 = [Take g = 10 N/kg]
2 2
= 8 × 10 J
–3 Sol. Here, F = 10 N, y = 10 cm = 0.1 m
or ω = 4 rad/s Force constant, k =
F
=
10 N
= 100 N/m
The equation of motion of a particle executing SHM y 0.1m
is given by Further, when F = weight of the body = 9 kg wt
y = A sin (ωt + φ0) = 90 N,
or y = (0.1) sin [4t + π/4] F 90 N
y= = = 0.9 m
Example - 6 k 100 N / m
If the length of a second pendulum is increased by 1%, m

Time period, T = 2π
how many seconds will it lose in a day? k
Sol. If l be the length of the second pendulum and T be its
time period, then
9  3
= 2π s = 2π   s
100  10 
3π TM 2π l / g M gE 9.8
or T = s = 1.88 s. or= = = = 2.4
5 TE 2π l / g E gM 1.7
Example - 8 Clearly, TM = 2.4 TE = 2.4 × 3.5 = 8.4 s
Write the values of amplitude and angular frequency Example - 11
in the following simple harmonic motion:
x = 0.70 cos (180t + 0.23) A spring balance has a scale that reads from
0 to 50 kg. The length of the scale is 20 cm. A body
where the various quantities are in SI units. suspended from this spring, when displaced and
Sol. Comparing the given simple harmonic motion with released, oscillates with a period of 0.60 s. What is the
the standard SHM equation weight of the body?
x = 0.70 cos (180t + 0.23) Sol. If k is the spring constant of the spring balance,
x = A cos (ωt + φ0), we have A = 0.70 m, ω = 180 rad/s F 50 kg wt 50 × 9.8 N
k= = = = 2450 N/m
Example - 9 l 0.2 m 0.20 m
Two simple harmonic motions are represented by the Let ω be the angular frequency of the spring balance.
equations y1 = 10 sin (3πt + π/4) and 2π 2π
Clearly, ω = = = 10.47 rad/s
T 0.60
y2 = 5 (sin 3πt + 3 cos 3πt)
If m is the mass of the body,
Find the ratio of their amplitudes.
k k 2450
ω = or m = 2 =
2
Sol. We are given that = 22.35 kg
m ω (10.47) 2
y1 = 10 sin (3πt + π/4) … (i)
Weight of the body = mg = 22.35 kg wt
y2 = 5 (sin 3πt + 3 cos 3πt)
= 22.35 × 9.8 N = 219 N
= 10 [(1/2) sin 3πt + ( 3 / 2) cos 3πt] Example - 12
= 10 [cos (π/3) sin 3πt + sin (π/3) cos 3πt] A small trolley of mass 2.0 kg resting on a horizontal
= 10 sin [3πt + (π/3)] … (ii) turntable is connected by a light spring to the centre
From eqns. (i) and (ii), it is clear that the amplitudes of the table. When the turntable is set into rotation at
of both SHM’s are equal i.e., these are in the ration of a speed of 300 rpm, the length of the stretched spring
1 : 1. is 40 cm. If the original length of the spring is 35 cm,
determine the force constant of the spring.
Example - 10
Sol. We are given that
The acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the mass of the trolley, m = 2.0 kg
2
Moon is 1.7 m/s . What is the time-period of a simple Frequency of rotation of the turntable,
pendulum on the Moon if its time period on the Earth
is 3.5 s? 300
ν= = 5rps
(g on Earth = 9.8 m/s )
2 60
Sol. We are given that time period of a simple pendulum Length of the stretched spring,
on Earth, i.e., TE = 3.5 s r = 40 cm = 0.4 m
Acceleration due to gravity on Earth, Original length of the spring,
i.e., gE = 9.8 m/s
2 L = 35 cm = 0.35 m
Acceleration due to gravity on Moon, Extension produced in the spring,
2
l = r – L = 0.05 m
i.e., gM = 1.7 m/s . Tension in the spring = centripetal force,
Let TM be the time period of the simple pendulum on mv 2 2 2
Fc = = 4π v mr
Moon. r
If k is the spring constant of the spring,
l l F = kl
Clearly, TE = 2π and TM = 2π
gE gE F 4π2 v 2 mr
or k = =
l l
4 × 9.8 × (5) 2 × 2 × 0.4 (c) Total energy of the oscillating mass (E)
or k =
0.05 = its potential energy at the extreme position (U0)
4
= 15792 N/m = 1.6 × 10 N/m = 0.24 J
A spring of force constant 1200 N/m is mounted on a In above problem, let us take the position of the mass
horizontal table as shown in Figure. A mass of 3.0 kg, when the spring is unstretched as x = 0, and the
attached to the free end of spring, is pulled sideways direction from left to right is the positive direction of
to a distance of 2.0 cm and released. X-axis. Give x as a function of time t for the oscillating
mass. If at the moment we start the stop watch (t = 0);
the mass is
(a) at the mean position
(b) at the maximum stretched position
Determine: (c) at the maximum compressed position.
(a) the frequency of oscillations, In what way do these different functions for SHM
differ? Frequency? Amplitude? Or Initial phase?
(b) the maximum acceleration of the mass,
Sol. For SHM along x-axis,
(c) the maximum speed of the mass.
x = A cos (ωt +φ0) … (i)
Sol. With usual notations, we are given that
m = 3.0 kg, k = 1200 N/m, A = 2.0 cm = 0.02 m (a) When at t = 0, x = 0,
(a) The frequency of oscillation of the mass m is 0 = A cos (ω × 0 + φ0)
given as or cos φ0 = 0 or φ0 = – π/2
1 k 1 1200
f= = From eqn. (i), x = A cos (ωt – π/2) = A sin ωt
2π m 2 × 3.14 3
or x = 2 sin (20 t)
20 –1 –1
(as A = 2 cm, ω = 2πf = 2 × 3.142 × 3.2 = 20 s )
–1
or f = s = 3.2 s
6.28
(b) The maximum acceleration of the mass, (b) When at t = 0, x = A,
i.e., amax = ω A = (2πf) A = 4π f A A = A cos (ω × 0 + φ0)
2 2 2 2
2 2 2
or amax = [(39.48) (3.2) (0.02)] m/s = 8.1 m/s or cos φ0 = –1 or φ0 = 0
(c) The maximum speed of the mass, i.e.,
From eqn. (i) x = A cos ωt = 2cos (20t)
vmax = ωA = 2πfA
vmax = (2 × 3.14 × 3.2 × 0.02) m/s = 0.4 m/s (c) When at t = 0, x = –A,
–A = A cos (ω × 0 + φ0)
Example - 14
or cos φ0 = – 1 or φ0 = π
In above problem, what is
From eqn. (i), x = A cos (ωt + π)
(a) the speed of the mass when the spring is
compressed by 1.0 cm? = –A cos ωt
(b) potential energy of the mass when it momentarily or x = –2 cos (20 t)
comes to rest? Example - 16
(c) total energy of the oscillating mass?
A particle executing SHM along a straight line has a
Sol. (a) Speed v = ω A 2 − x 2 =π
2 f A2 − x 2 –1
velocity of 4 ms , when at a distance of 3 m from its
–1
mean position and 3 ms , when at a distance of 4 m
= 2 × 3.14 × 3.2 (0.02) 2 − (−0.01) 2
from it. Find the time it takes to travel 2.5 m from the
= 0.35 m/s (as f = 3.2, A = 0.02 m, x = –0.01 m) positive extremity of its oscillation.
–1
(b) PE of the mass when it momentarily comes to rest Sol. Here (case i), v1 = 4 ms ; y1 = 3m;
(at the extreme position), –1
(case ii), v2 = 3 ms ; y2 = 4m.
1 1
mω2 A 2 =m(2πf) A = 2π mf A
2 2 2 2 2
i.e., U0 = We know that v = ω a 2 − y2
2 2
2 2
= 2 × 9.87 × 3 × (3.2) × (0.02) = 0.24 J Case (I) 4 =
ω a 2 − 32 … (i)
2
Case (II) 3 = ω a 2 − 42 … (ii) = –3.754 cm/s
2
Dividing (i) by (ii), we get In fact, the acceleration is 3.754 cm/s and is
directed towards the mean position.
4 ω a −9 16 a 2 − 9
2
= or = Example - 18
3 ω a 2 −16 9 a 2 −16
A particle executes simple harmonic motion with a
2 2 2
or 16 a – 256 = 9 a – 81 or 7 a = 256 – 81 = 175 time period of 16 s. At time t = 2 s, the particle crosses
the mean position while at t = 4 s, its velocity is
2 175 –1
or a = = 25 or a = 25 = 5 4 ms . Find its amplitude of motion.
7
Sol. Here, T = 16 s; At t = 2 s, y = 0 and at t = 4 s;
Substituting it in (i), we get –1
v = 4 ms ; a = ?
4=ω 2 2
ω 25 − 9 = ω × 4
5 −3 = 2π
For simple harmonic motion, y = a sin ωt = a sin t
4 T
or ω =
–1
= 1 rad s When t = 4 s, the time taken by particle to travel from
4
the mean position to a given position = 4 – 2 = 2s. The
When the particle is at a distance 2.5 m from the displacement,
extreme position, then its distance from the mean
 2π  π a
position, y = a sin  × 2  = a sin   = … (i)
x = 5 – 2.5 = 2.5 m  16  4 2
Since, the time is to be noted from the extreme position Velocity, v = ω a 2 − y2

for SHM therefore, we shall use the relation
 2π  a2 π a
x = a cos ωt ∴ 4 =  a 2 − = ×
 16  2 8 2
or 2.5 = 5 cos (1 × t) = 5 cos t or cos t =
2.5 1 π 32 2
= = cos or a = = 14.4 m.
5 2 3 π
π 22 Example - 19
or t = = = 1.048 s.
3 7×3 A particle executes SHM of amplitude a. At what
distance from the mean position is its K.E. equal to its
Example - 17 P.E.?
A particle executes SHM of time period 10 s. The 1 1
mω (a –y ) and P.E. = m ω y
2 2 2 2 2
displacement of particle at any instant is given by the Sol. K.E. =
2 2
relation x = 10 sin ωt (in cm).
1 1
∴ mω (a –y ) = m ω y
2 2 2 2 2
(i) Find the velocity of body 2 s after it passes through As, K.E. = P.E.
the mean position and 2 2
2 2 2 2 2
(ii) The acceleration 2 s after it passes the mean or a – y = y or y = a /2 or y = a/ 2 = 0.71 a
position.
Example - 20
2π 2π
Sol. Here; T = 10 s; ω = = rad/s ; amplitude,
–1
T 10 A mass of 1 kg is executing SHM which is given by,

x = 6.0 cos (100 t + π/4) cm. What is the maximum
r = 10 cm. kinetic energy?
Velocity of the particle at any instant t is given by Sol. Here, m = 1 kg.
v = rω cos ωt The given equation of SHM is x = 6.0 cos (100 t + π/4)
2π  2π  Comparing it with the equation of SHM
(i) When t = 2 s, v = 10 × cos  × 2 
10  10  x = a cos (ωt + φ),
= 2 π cos (0.4π) = 1.942 cm/s. we have, a = 6.0 cm = 6/100 m and ω = 100 rad s
–1
1 2
(ii) Acceleration at any time t is given by maximum kinetic energy = m(vmax)
2
 2π 
2
 2π   6 
2
A = –ω r sin ωt = –   × 10 × sin  × 2 
2
1 1
×100  = 18 J
2
= m(aω) = × 1 × 
 10   10  2 2  100 
Example - 21 Therefore, total restoring force on mass m is

An 8 kg body performs SHM of amplitude 30 cm. The F = F1 + F2 = – kx + (– kx) = – 2kx ...(i)
restoring force is 60 N, when the displacement is Here –ve sign shows that force F is directed towards the
30 cm. Find (a) time period (b) the acceleration, P.E equilibrium position O and F ∝ x. Therefore, if the mass
and K.E., when displacement is 12 cm. m is left free, it will execute linear SHM.
Sol. Here, m = 8 kg; a = 30 cm = 0.30 m; Comparing (i) with the relation, F = – kx, we have
(a) F = 60 N; y = 0.30 m Spring factor, k’ = 2 k
F 60 Here, inertia factor = mass of the block = m
=
–1
F = ky or k = = 200 Nm
y 0.30 inertia factor m
As time period, T = 2π = 2π
spring factor 2k
k 200
As ω = =
–1
= 5 rad/s
m 8 Example - 23
2π 2 × 22 44 For the damped oscillator shown in Figure, the mass
Time period, T == = = 1.256 s
ω 7 × 5 35
–1
m of the block is 200 g, k = 90 Nm and the damping
–1
(b) Here, y = 12 cm = 0.12 m constant b is 40 gs .
Calculate:
∴ Acceleration, a = ω y = (5) × 0.12 = 3.0 ms
2 2 –2
(a) the period of oscillation,

1 2 1 2
P.E. = ky = × (200) × (0.12) = 1.44 J (b) time taken for its amplitude of vibrations to drop
2 2 to half of its initial value and
1 2 2 1 2 2 (c) the time taken for its mechanical energy to drop to
K.E. = k (a – y ) = × 200 × [(0.30) – (0.12) ]
2 2 half its initial value.
= 7.56 J –1
Sol. (a) Here m = 200 g = 0.2 kg, k = 90 Nm
Example - 22 k 90
∴ =
–1 –1
= 450 Nm kg
Two identical springs of spring constant k are attached m 0.2
to a block of mass m and to fixed supports as shown
b2 (0.04) 2
=
2 –2
in Figure. Show that when the mass is displaced from = 0.01 kg s
its equilibrium position on either side, it executes a 4m 4 × (0.2) 2
2
simple harmonic motion. Find the period of

k b2 k b2 k
oscillation. As, >> ,therefore, ω’ = − ≈
m 4m 2 m 4m 2 m
2π m 22 0.2
T= =
2π =
2× ≈ 0.3 s.
ω' k 7 90
(b) If T is the time, when amplitude drops to half
value then amplitude of the damped oscillations at
–bt/2m
time t is a = x0 e
Sol. Let the mass m be displaced by a small distance x to the when t = T, a = x0/2
right as shown in Figure. Due to it, the spring on the left
hand side gets stretched by length x and the spring on x0
∴
–bT/2m
= x0 e
the right hand side gets compressed by length x. The 2
forces acting on the mass due to springs are
bT/2m bT
F1 = – kx towards left hand side or 2 = e or log e 2 =
2m
F2 = – kx towards left hand side
2m 2.3026 × 2m
or T = loge2 = log102
b b
2.3026 × 2 × 0.2 × 0.3010
=
0.04
= 6.93 s.
(c) If T’ is the time, when mechanical energy drops to Example - 25

half its mechanical energy E0, then mechanical
The moment of inertia of the disc used in a torsional
energy E of the damped oscillations at an instant t
is given by pendulum about the suspension wire is 0.2 kg-m 2 . It
–bt/m oscillates with a period of 2s. Another disc is placed
E = E0 e over the first one and the time period of the system
E0 –bT’/m
becomes 2.5s. Find the moment of inertia of the
When t = T’, E = E0/2 then = E0e second disc about the wire.
2
bT’/m
or 2 = e
bT '
or loge2 =
m
m
or T’ = 2.3026 log102 ×
b
0.2
or T’ = 2.3026 × 0.3010 × = 3.46 s.
0.04
Sol. Let the torsional constant of the wire be k.
Example - 24
The moment of inertia of the first disc about the wire
A simple pendulum of length l is suspended from the
is 0.2 kg-m 2 .
ceiling of a cart which is sliding without friction on an
inclined plane of inclination θ . What will be the time Hence, the time period is
period of the pendulum?
I
Sol. Here, point of suspension has an acceleration. 2 s = 2π
K
a = g sin θ (down the plane). Further, g can be
resolved into two components g sin θ (along the 0.2 kg-m 2
= 2π … (i)
plane) and g cos θ (perpendicular to plane). k
When the second disc having moment of inertia I1
about the wire is added, the time period is
0.2 kg-m 2 + I1
2.5s = 2π … (ii)
k
In the frame of cart, 6.25 0.2 kg-m 2 + I1

    From (i) and (ii), =
g eff = g − a = g + ( − g sin θ ) 4 0.2 kg-m 2
 This gives I1 ≈ 0.11kg-m 2
Where a is acceleration of the cart
 
Resultant of g and −a will be g cos θ . Example - 26
g cos θ (perpendicular to plane)
∴ g eff = The friction coefficient between the two blocks shown
in figure is µ and the horizontal plane is smooth.
l l
∴ T 2π = 2π
= (a) If the system is slightly displaced and released,
g eff g cos θ
find the time period.
NOTE: (b) Find the magnitude of the frictional force
between the blocks when the displacement from
l the mean position is x.
If θ =0°, T =2π which is quite obvious. (c) What can be the maximum amplitude if the upper
g
block does not slip relative to the lower block?
Sol. (a) For small amplitude, the two blocks oscillate mg

=2T mg= =
or, 2ky mg or, y
together. The angular frequency is 2k
k mg
ω= The spring is extended by a distance when the
M +m 2k
pulley is in equilibrium.
M +m
And so the time period T = 2π Now suppose, the centre of the pulley goes down
k
further by a distance x. The total increase in the length
(b) The acceleration of the blocks at displacement x of the string plus the spring is 2x . The energy of the
from the mean position is system is
−kx
2
1 2 1 2 1  mg 
−ω 2 x =
a= U= I ω + mv − mgx + k  + 2x 
M +m 2 2 2  2k 
The resultant force on the upper block is, therefore, 1 I  2 m g
2 2
=  2 + mv + + 2kx 2
−mkx 2r  8 k
ma =
M +m
dU
This force is provided by the friction of the lower As the system is conservative, = 0,
dt
block. Hence, the magnitude of the frictional force
mk x  I  dv
is Giving 0 =
 2 + m  v + 4kxv
M +m  r  dt
(c) Maximum force of friction required for simple dv 4kx
Or, = −
dt  I 
harmonic motion of the upper block is
mkA
at  2 + m
M +m r 
the extreme positions. But the maximum frictional 4k
force can only be µ mg . Or, a = −ω 2 x, where ω 2 =
 I 
 2 + m
mkA µ ( M + m) g r 
= µ=
Hence, mg or, A
M +m k Thus, the centre of mass of the pulley executes a
simple harmonic motion with time period
Example - 27
 I 
The pulley shown in figure has a moment of inertia I  2 + m
T = 2π  
about its axis and mass m. Find the time period of r
vertical oscillation of its centre of mass. The spring ( 4k )
has spring constant k and the string does not slip over
the pulley. Example - 28
A smooth inclined plane having angle of inclination
30° with horizontal has a mass 2.5 kg is held by a
spring which is fixed at the upper end as shown in
figure.
Sol. Let us first find the equilibrium position. For

rotational equilibrium of the pulley, the tensions in the
two strings should be equal. Only then the torque on
the pulley will be zero. Let this tension be T. The If the mass is taken 2.5cm up along the surface of the
T inclined plane, the tension in the spring reduces to
extension of the spring will be y = , as the tension
k zero. If the mass is then released, the angular
in the spring will be the same as the tension in the frequency of oscillation in radian per second is?
string. For translational equilibrium of the pulley,
Sol. Tension of spring zero means that the spring is in

unstretched position. So, 2.5 cm is extension of spring
when the mass attach to spring.
From figure, it is clear that the downward acceleration
of spring along inclined plane is
g 10
g =′ g sin 30°= = = 5 m / s2
2 2
At the stretched position the restoring force is
balanced by weight of mass along inclined plane
k × x = mg ' = 2.5 × 5
Where, mass of the body = 2.5 kg
Extension of spring= x= 2.5 cm= 0.025 m and,
k = spring constant
⇒ k × 0.025 = 2.5 × 5
⇒k=
500
k 500
Angular frequency ⇒ ω= =
m 2.5
⇒ω =
14.14 rad / s
EXERCISE – 1: BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Periodic Motion and Oscillatory Motion Simple Harmonic Motion
1. Which of the following equations does not represent a 6. A particle of mass 0.1 kg is executing SHM of
simple harmonic motion? amplitude 0.1 m. When the particle passes through the
–3
(a) y = a sin ω t (b) y = b cos ω t mean position, its K.E. is 8 × 10 J. The equation of
(c) y = a sin ω t + b cos ω t (d) y = a tan ω t motion of the particle, when the initial phase of
o
2. A body is moving in a room with a velocity of 20 m/s oscillation is 45 , is
perpendicular to the two walls separated by 5 m. There  π  π
(a) y 0.1sin  3t +  =
= (b) y 0.1cos  3t + 
is no friction and the collisions with the walls are  4   4
elastic. The motion of the body is  π  π
(a) not periodic =
(c) y 0.1sin  4t +  = (d) y 0.1cos  4t + 
 4  4
(b) periodic but not simple harmonic
7. The displacement of a particle is represented by the
(c) periodic and simple harmonic
π 
(d) periodic with variable time period equation: y = 3 cos  − 2ωt 
3. Assertion: In extreme position of a particle executing 4 
S.H.M., both velocity and acceleration are zero. The motion of the particle is:
Reason: In S.H.M., acceleration always acts towards 2π
(a) simple harmonic with period
mean position. ω
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is π
(b) simple harmonic with period
the correct explanation of Assertion. ω
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is (c) periodic but not simple harmonic
NOT the correct explanation of Assertion. (d) non-periodic
(c) Assertion is true but Reason is false. 8. For the two curves choose the correct option.
(d) Assertion is false but Reason is true.
4. The function sin 2 ωt represents
(a) a periodic but simple harmonic motion with a
period 2π / ω
(b) a periodic but not simple harmonic motion with a
period π / ω
(c) a simple harmonic motion with a period 2π / ω (a) (Amplitude)A > (Amplitude)B
(d) a simple harmonic motion with a period π / ω (b) (Time period)A > (Time period)B
5. Out of the following functions representing motion of (c) Both (a) and (b) are correct
a particle which represents SHM? (d) Both (a) and (b) are incorrect
(1) y = sin ωt – cos ωt (2) y = sin3ωt 9. The relation between acceleration and displacement of
 3π  four particles are given below:
=
(3) y 5cos  − 3ωt  (4) y = 1 + ωt + ω2 t 2
which one of the particles is executing simple
 4 
(a) Only (1) and (2) harmonic motion?
2
(b) Only (1) (a) ax = + 2x (b) ax = + 2x
2
(c) Only (4) does not represent SHM (c) ax = – 2x (d) ax = – 2x
(d) Only (1) and (3) 10. A particle executing SHM has a maximum speed of
2
30 cm/s and a maximum acceleration of 60 cm/s . The
period of oscillation is:
π
(a) π s (b) s
2
π
(c) 2π s (d) s
4
11. For a particle in SHM, if the amplitude of the 17. The time taken by a particle executing S.H.M. of
displacement is a and the amplitude of velocity is v the period T to move from the mean position to half the
amplitude of acceleration is: maximum displacement is
v2 (a) T/2 (b) T/4
(a) va (b) (c) T/8 (d) T/12
a
18. A particle executes simple harmonic motion between
v2 v
(c) (d) x = –A and x = + A. The time taken for it to go from 0
2a a
to A/2 is t1 and to go from A/2 to A is t2. Then
12. What is the ratio of maximum acceleration to the
(a) t1 < t2 (b) t1 > t2
maximum velocity of a simple harmonic oscillator?
(c) t1 = t2 (d) t1 = 2 t2
2
(a) ω (b) 19. Two pendulums of time period 3 s and 8 s respectively
ω
starts oscillating simultaneously from two opposite
1
(c) (d) 2ω extreme positions. After how much time they will be
ω in the same phase?
13. A mass m is performing linear simple harmonic
24 12
motion, then which of the following graph represents (a) s (b) s
5 5
correctly the variation of acceleration a corresponding
to linear velocity v? 24 12
(c) s (d) s
2 2 11 11
v v
20. Two particles are executing simple harmonic motion
of the same amplitude A and frequency ω along the
(a) (b) x–axis. Their mean position is separated by distance
x0 (x0 > A). If the maximum separation between them
a2 a2 is (x0 + A), the phase difference between their motion
v2 v2 is
π π
(a) (b)
3 4
(c) (d) π π
(c) (d)
a
2
a
2 6 2
21. The radius of circle, the period of revolution, initial
14. The displacement of an oscillating particle varies with
position and sense of revolution are indicated in the
time (in seconds) according to the equation
fig.
π  t 1
y = sin  +  , where y is in cm. The maximum
2  2 3
acceleration (in m/s) of the particle is: [take π 2 = 10]
Phasors in SHM
15. The phase difference between x1 = A sin ω t and
x 2 = A cos ω t is:
π π
(a) (b) y – projection of the radius vector of rotating particle
2 4
P is:
π π
(c)
3
(d)
6  πt 
(a) y(t) = 4 sin   , where y in m
16. A particle is performing S.H.M. along X-axis with  2
amplitude 4 cm and time period 1.2 sec. The minimum  3πt 
(b) y(t) = 3 cos   , where y in m
time taken by the particle to move from x = + 2 cm to  2 
x = + 4 cm and back again is given by  πt 
(c) y(t) = 3 cos   , where y in m
(a) 0.6 s (b) 0.4 s  2
(c) 0.3 s (d) 0.2 s (d) y(t) = – 3 cos 2πt, where y in m
22. A particle is executing simple harmonic motion with 28. The force constant of a weightless spring is 16 N/m.
frequency 5. The frequency at which its kinetic energy A body of mass 1.0 kg suspended from it is pulled
changes into potential energy is down through 5 cm from it’s mean position and then
released. The maximum kinetic energy of the system
Energy in Simple Harmonic Motion
(spring + body) will be
23. For a particle executing simple harmonic motion, the –2
(a) 2 × 10 J (b) 4 × 10 J
–2
displacement x is given by x = A sin ωt. Identify the –2

(c) 8 × 10 J (d) 16 × 10 J
–2
graph, which represents the variation of potential 29. The potential energy of a harmonic oscillation of mass
energy (PE) as a function of time t and displacement x 2 kg in its mean position is 5 J. If its total energy is 9 J
and its amplitude is 0.01 m, its time period of
π
oscillation is s , find the value of n
n
Spring Block System
30. A mass of 1 kg attached to the bottom of a spring has
a certain frequency of vibration. The following mass
has to be added to it in order to reduce the frequency
by half.
(a) 1 kg (b) 2 kg
(c) 3 kg (d) 4 kg
(a) I, III (b) II, III 31. The period of oscillation of a mass m suspended from
(c) I, IV (d) II, IV a spring is 2 seconds. If along with it another mass of
24. If a conservative force is acting on a system in SHM. 2 kg is also suspended, the period of oscillation
The total mechanical energy is: increases by one second. The mass m will be
(a) time dependent (a) 2 kg (b) 1 kg
(b) position dependent (c) 1.6 kg (d) 2.6 kg
(c) amplitude dependent 32. In the figure shown below, the block is moved
(d) both (a) and (c) are correct sideways by a distance A. The magnitude of net force
25. The expression for displacement of an object in SHM on the block is:
T
is x = A cos (ωt). The potential energy at t = is (take
2
potential energy at mean position to be zero):
1 1
(a) kA2 (b) kA2
2 8
1 2
(c) kA (d) zero (a) (k1 – k2) A (b) (k2 – k1) A
4
26. A body executes simple harmonic motion. The (c) (k1 + k2) A (d) None of the above
potential energy (PE), the kinetic energy (KE) and total 33. The time period of a spring mass system shown below
energy (TE) are measured as function of displacement is equal to:
x. Which of the following statements is true?
(a) KE is maximum when x = 0
(b) TE is zero when x = 0
(c) KE is maximum when x is maximum
(d) PE is maximum when x = 0
27. The kinetic energy of a particle executing S.H.M. is 2m m
16 J when it is in its mean position. If the amplitude of (a) 2π (b) 2π
k 4k
oscillations is 25 cm and the mass of the particle is
5.12 kg, the time period of its oscillation in seconds is 2π 2 m
(a) π/5 (b) 2 π k
(c) 5 π (d) 20 π
34. There are two springs mass systems as shown in the 38. The displacement of an object attached to a spring and
figures. Resistive forces are absent everywhere. Let the executing simple harmonic motion is given by
time periods of two systems are T1 and T2. The relation x= 2 × 10−2 cos(π t) m. The time at which the
between T1 and T2 is: maximum speed first occurs is:
(a) 0.5 s (b) 0.75 s
(c) 0.125 s (d) 0.25 s
39. A force of 6.4 N stretches a vertical spring by 0.1m.
The mass that must be suspended from the spring so
that it oscillates with a period of (π/4) second is
(a) (π/4) kg (b) 1 kg
T2
(a) T1 = (c) (1/π) kg (d) 10 kg
2
40. If a spring has time period T, and is cut into n equal
T
(b) T2 = 1 parts, then the time period of each part will be
T2
T
(c) T1 = T2 (a) T n (b)
n
(d) Cannot establish the relation between them (c) nT (d) T
35. Two identical springs are connected in series and 41. Two bodies M and N of equal masses are suspended
parallel as shown in the figure. If fs and fp are from two separate massless springs of spring constant
frequencies of series and parallel arrangements, what k1 and k2 respectively. If the two bodies oscillate
f vertically such that their maximum velocities are
is s ?
fp equal, the ratio of the amplitude of M to that of N is
k1 k1
(a) (b)
k2 k2
k2 k2
(c) (d)
k1 k1
42. A block is in SHM on a frictionless surface as shown
in the figure. The position x = 0 shows the unstretched
position of the spring.
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 1
(c) 1 : 3 (d) 3 : 1
36. A block of mass 1 kg hangs without vibrating at the
end of a spring whose force constant is 200 N/m and
which is attached to the ceiling of an elevator. The
elevator is rising with an upward acceleration of g/3
when the acceleration suddenly ceases. The angular Choose the correct option with reference to the above
frequency of the block after the acceleration ceases is system.
(a) 13 rad/s (b) 14 rad/s (a) +A and –A are maximum displacements where, A
(c) 15 rad/s (d) None of these is amplitude
+A (b) x = 0 indicate the equilibrium position
37. A block is left from x = + A, its speed at x = is:
2 (c) The block executes to and fro motion about the
(ω = 2 rad/s). mean position, when pulled aside and released
(d) All of the above
(a) (3A) m/s (b) ( 3 A) m/ s

(c) (2A) m/s (d) ( 2 A) m/ s
43. If the block is pulled by a distance x and left, the block 47. What is the velocity of the bob of a simple pendulum
will start oscillating. The value of x, so that at a at its mean position, if it is able to rise to vertical height
–2
moment when speed of the block become zero the of 10 cm? (g = 9.8 ms ).
spring become unstretched.
–1 –1
mg 2k (a) 2.2 ms (b) 1.8 ms
(a) (b) (c) 1.4 ms
–1
(d) 0.6 ms
–1
2k mg
48. A man measures time period of a simple pendulum
mg 2mg
(c) (d) inside a stationary lift and find it to be T. If the lift starts
k k
accelerating upwards with an acceleration g/4, then the
44. A coin is placed on a horizontal platform which
time period of pendulum will be
undergoes vertical simple harmonic motion of angular
frequency ω . The amplitude of oscillation is gradually 2T 5T
(a) (b)
increased. The coin will leave contact with the 5 2
platform for the first time 5 2
(c) (d)
(a) at the highest position of the platform 2T 5T
(b) at the mean position of the platform
49. A simple pendulum is oscillating without damping, as
g shown in figure. When the displacement of the bob is
(c) at an amplitude of 2
ω 
less than maximum, its acceleration vector a is
g2 correctly shown in
(d) for an amplitude of
ω2
45. One end of a spring of force constant k is fixed to a
vertical wall and the other to a block of mass m
resting on a smooth horizontal surface. There is (a) (b)
another wall at a distance x 0 from the block. The a
spring is then compressed by 2x 0 and released. The a
π m
time taken to strike the wall is , find the value
n k
of n
(c) (d)
a
a
50. A simple pendulum is suspended from the ceiling of a

lift. When the lift is at rest its time period is T. With
Angular SHM
what acceleration should the lift be accelerated
46. If we do an experiment by swinging a small ball by a upwards in order to reduce its period to T/2? (g is
thread of length 100 cm, what will be the approximate acceleration due to gravity).
time for complete to and fro periodic motion if the (a) 2g (b) 3g
swinging angle is very small? (c) 4g (d) g
(a) 4 s (b) 2 s
(c) 6 s (d) 1 s
51. A hollow sphere is filled with water through the small 56. Which of the following expressions of force,
hole in it. It is then hung by a long thread and made to corresponds to simple harmonic motion along a
oscillate. As the water slowly flow out of the hole at straight line, where x is the displacement and a, b, c are
the bottom, the period of oscillation will: positive constant?
(a) continuously decrease (a) a + bx – cx2 (b) a – bx + cx2
2
(b) continuously increase (c) bx (d) – bx
(c) first decrease then increase 57. A physical pendulum is positioned so that its centre of
(d) first increase then decrease gravity is above the suspension point. When the
52. A simple pendulum has a time period T1 when on the pendulum is released it passes the point of stable
Earth’s surface and T2 when taken to a height 2R above equilibrium with an angular velocity ω. The period of
the Earth’s surface, where R is the radius of the Earth. small oscillations of the pendulum is
T (a) 4π (b) 2π
The value of 1 is: ω ω
T2
(a) 1/9 (b) 1/3 (c) π (d) π
ω 2ω
(c) 3 (d) 9 58. The displacement of a particle varies with time
53. A simple pendulum performs simple harmonic according to the relation: y = asin ωt + bcos ωt.
motion about x = 0 with an amplitude a and time Choose the correct statement.
a (a) The motion is oscillatory but not SHM.
period T. The speed of the pendulum at x = is
2 (b) The motion is SHM with amplitude (a + b).
2 2
πa n (c) The motion is SHM with amplitude (a + b )
, find the value of n
T (d) The motion is SHM with amplitude a 2 + b2
πa 3 πa 59. The displacement equation of a particle is
(a) (b)
2T T x = 3 sin 2 t + 4 cos 2 t
3π2 a πa 3 The amplitude and maximum velocity will be
(c) (d) respectively
T T
(a) 5, 10 (b) 3, 2
Miscellaneous Examples of SHM (c) 3, 4 (d) 4, 2
54. A particle of mass m moving along the x-axis has a Superposition of Simple Harmonic Motion
2
potential energy U(x) = a + bx where a and b are 60. Four simple harmonic motions.
positive constants. It will execute simple harmonic x1 = 8 sin ωt; x2 = 6 sin (ωt + π/2); x3 = 4 sin (ωt + π)
motion with a frequency determined by the value of and x4 = 2 sin (ωt + 3π/2) are superimposed on each
(a) b alone (b) b and a alone
other. The resulting amplitude and its phase difference
(c) b and m alone (d) b, a and m alone
with x1 are respectively
55. A metre stick swinging in vertical plane about a fixed
(b) 4 2 , π/2
–1
horizontal axis passing through its one end undergoes (a) 20, tan (1/2)
small oscillation of frequency f0. If the bottom half of –1
(c) 20, tan (2) (d) 4 2 , π/4
the stick were cut off, then its new frequency of small
61. The displacement equation of a particle is
oscillation would become.
x = 3 sin 2t + 4 cos 2t
The amplitude and maximum velocity will be
respectively
(a) 5, 10 (b) 3, 2
(c) 4, 2 (d) 3, 4
(a) f0 (b) 2 f0 62. Two similar simple harmonic motions are propagating
in x-axis and another one in y-axis. When they collide
(c) 2f0 (d) 2 2 f 0
to superimpose, the resultant wave will be:
(a) elliptical (b) hyperbolic
(c) straight line (d) parabolic
63. The resultant of two rectangular simple harmonic 70. In damped oscillation graph between velocity and
motions of same frequency and unequal amplitudes but position will be:
π
differing in phase by is:
2
(a) Simple harmonic (b) Circular (a) (b)
(c) Elliptical (d) Parabolic

64. Two mutually perpendicular simple harmonic
vibrations have same amplitude, frequency, and phase.
When they superimpose, the resultant form of (c) (d)
vibrations will be:
(a) A circle (b) An ellipse
(c) A straight line (d) A parabola
71. The drag force on the vane is directly proportional to:
65. The composition of two simple harmonic motions of
(a) velocity of vane (b) displacement of vane
equal periods at right angle to each other with a phase
(c) spring constant (d) mass of the block
difference of π results in the displacement of the
72. The expression for the motion of block in damped
particles along:
oscillation can be represented as:
(a) Straight line (b) Circle
d2 x dx dx d2 x
(c) Ellipse (d) Parabola (a) m +b + kx =
0 (b) m + b 2 + kx =
0
dt 2 dt dt dt
Damped and Forced Oscillations d2 x dx d2 x dx
(c) m 2
+b − kx =0 (d) m 2
− b − kx = 0
66. Pendulum after some time becomes slow in motion dt dt dt dt
and finally stops due to: 73. In case of a forced vibration, the resonance wave
(a) air friction (b) earth’s gravity becomes very sharp when the
(c) mass of pendulum (d) none of the above (a) applied periodic force is small
67. In the above question, the net force acting on the (b) quality factor is small
block of mass m is: (c) damping force is small
(a) kx – bv (b) –kx – bv (d) restoring force is small
(c) –kx + bv (d) None of these 74. When a damped harmonic oscillator completes 100
(here, x is the displacement of the block and v is the 1
velocity of the block, k is spring constant and b is oscillations, its amplitude is reduced to of its initial
3
damping constant.) value. What will be its amplitude when it completes
68. A simple pendulum is made of a body which is a 200 oscillations? [A0: initial amplitude]
hollow sphere containing mercury suspended by
1 2
means of a wire. If a little mercury is drained off, the (a) A 0 (b) A 0
5 3
period of pendulum will:
(a) remain unchanged (b) increase 1 1
(c) A0 (d) A 0
(c) decrease (d) become erratic 6 9
69. The graph between velocity and position for a
damped oscillation will be:
(a) Straight line (b) Circle
(c) Ellipse (d) Spiral
75. Match the following columns of damped oscillations

=
expressed by x(t) Ae − bt /2 m cos (ω ' t + φ) , where
Column-I Column-II
(A) b = 0 means 1. Small damping
1
(B) kA 2 e − bt /m equals 2. Amplitude
2
b
(C) If << 1 means 3. No damping
km
4. Total mechanical
energy
Choose the correct option regarding above columns.
Form the codes given below
Codes
A B C
(a) 3 2 1
(b) 1 2 3
(c) 3 4 1
(d) 3 4 2
EXERCISE – 2: PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

1. A particle is performing S.H.M. along X-axis with 5. In an experiment to determine the period of a simple
amplitude 4 cm and time period 1.2 sec. The minimum pendulum of length 1 m, it is attached to different
time taken by the particle to move from x = + 2 cm to spherical bobs of radii r1 and r2. The two spherical bobs
x = + 4 cm and back again is given by [2015] have uniform mass distribution. If the relative
(a) 0.6 s (b) 0.4 s difference in the periods, is found to be 5 × 10−4 s , the
(c) 0.3 s (d) 0.2 s difference in radii, r1 − r2 is best given by:
2. A particle performs simple harmonic motion with
amplitude A. Its speed is tripled at the instant when it ( length () >>> ( r1 , r2 ) ) [2017]
2A (a) 1 cm (b) 0.1 cm
is at a distance from equilibrium position. The
3 (c) 0.05 cm (d) 0.01 cm
new amplitude of the motion is: [2016] 6. A sliver atom in a solid oscillates in simple harmonic
(a) 3 A (b) A 3 motion in some direction with a frequency of 1012/sec
7A A What is the force constant of the bonds connecting one
(c) (d) 41 atom with the other? (Molecular weight of silver =108
3 3
and Avogadro number = 6.02× 1023 gm mole-1)
3. A particle is executing, simple harmonic motion with
[2018]
a time period T. At time t = 0, it is at its position of
(a) 2.2 N/m (b) 5.5 N/m
equilibrium. The kinetic energy–time graph of the
(c) 6.4 N/m (d) 7.1 N/m
particle will look like [2017]
7. A pendulum with time period of 1s is losing energy due
to damping. At certain time its energy is 45 J. If after
completing 15 oscillations, its energy has become 15 J,
(a)
its damping constant (in s −1 ) is: [2015]
1 1
(a) (b)
ln 3
2 30
1
(c) 2 (d) ln 3
(b) 15
8. Two particles are performing simple harmonic motion
in a straight line about the same equilibrium point. The
amplitude and time period for both particles are same
and equal to A and T, respectively. At time t = 0 one
(c)
particle has displacement A while the other one has
−A
displacement and they are moving towards each
2
other. If they cross each other at time t, then t is:
(d) [2016]
T 5T
(a) (b)
4. A 1 kg block attached to a spring vibrates with a 6 6
frequency of 1 Hz on a frictionless horizontal table. T T
(c) (d)
Two springs identical to the original spring are 3 4
attached in parallel to an 8 kg block placed on the same 9. In an engine the piston undergoes vertical simple
table. So, the frequency of vibration of the 8 kg block harmonic motion with amplitude 7 cm. A washer rests
is: [2017] on top of the piston and moves with it. The motor speed
1 1 is slowly increased. The frequency of the piston at
(a) Hz (b) Hz
4 2 2 which the washer no longer stays in contact with the
piston, is close to: [2016]
1
(c) Hz (d) 2 Hz (a) 0.1 Hz (b) 1.2 Hz
2
(c) 0.7 Hz (d) 1.9 Hz
10. The ratio of maximum acceleration to maximum 14. A particle executes simple harmonic motion and is
velocity in a simple harmonic motion is 10 s-1. located at x =a, b and c at times t 0 , 2t 0 and 3t 0
At, t = 0 the displacement is 5 m. What is the maximum respectively. The frequency of the oscillation is:
π [2018]
acceleration? The initial phase is . [2017]
4 1  a + c  1  a + c
(a) cos −1   (b) cos −1  
(a) 500 m/s2 (b) 500 2 m/s 2 2π t0  2b  2π t0  2c 
(c) 750 m/s2 (d) 750 2 m/s 2 1  2a + 3c  1  a + 2b 
(c) cos −1   (d) cos −1  
11. A block of mass 0.1 kg is connected to an elastic spring 2π t0  b  2π t0  3c 
of spring constant 640 Nm-1 and oscillates in a 15. A damped harmonic oscillator has a frequency of 5
damping medium of damping constant 10-2 kg s-1, The oscillations per second. The amplitude drops to half its
system dissipates its energy gradually. The time taken value for every 10 oscillations. The time it will take to
for its mechanical energy of vibration to drop to half of 1
drop to of the original amplitude is close to:
its initial value, is closest to: [2017] 1000
(a) 2 s (b) 3.5 s [2019]
(c) 5 s (d) 7 s (a) 50 s (b) 100 s
12. Two simple harmonic motions, as shown below, are at (c) 20 s (d) 10 s
right angles. They are combined to form Lissajous 16. A simple pendulum oscillating in air has period T. The
figures. bob of the pendulum is completely immersed in a non-
x ( t ) A sin ( at + δ )
= 1
viscous liquid. The density of the liquid is th of the
y ( t ) = B sin ( bt )
16
material of the bob. If the bob is inside liquid all the
Identify the correct match below. [2018] time, its period of oscillation in this liquid is: [2019]
Parameters Curve
1 1
(a) A ≠ B, a = b; δ = 0 Parabola (a) 2T (b) 2T
10 14
(b) π Line
=
A B= ;δ
, a b= 1 1
2 (c) 4T (d) 4T
15 14
(c) π Ellipse
A ≠ B, a = b; δ = m
2 17. Two masses m and are connected at the two ends
2
(d) π Circle
=
A B= ;δ
, a 2b= of a massless rigid rod of length l. The rod is suspended
2
by a thin wire of torsional constant k at the centre of
13. An oscillator of mass M is at rest in its equilibrium
mass of the rod-mass system (see figure). Because of
1
= k ( x − X ) . A particle of torsional constant k, the restoring torque is τ = k for
2
position in a potential V
2
angular displacement θ . If the rod is rotated by an
mass m comes from right with speed u and collides
angle θ 0 and released, the tension in it when it passes
completely inelastically with M and sticks to it. This
process repeats every time the oscillator crosses its through its mean position will be: [2019]
equilibrium position. The amplitude of oscillations
after 13 collisions is: (M=10, m=5, u=1, k=1) [2018]
1 1
(a) (b)
3 2
2 3
(c) (d)
3 5
3kθ 02 2kθ 02
(a) (b)
l l
kθ 02 kθ 02
(c) (d)
l 2l
18. A rod of mass ‘M’ and length ‘2L’ is suspended at its 24. This displacement time graph of a particle executing
middle by a wire. It exhibits torsional oscillations; If S.H.M. is given in figure: (sketch is schematic and not
two masses each of ‘m’ are attached at distance ‘L/2’ to scale)
from its centre on both sides, it reduces the oscillation
m
frequency by 20%. The value of is close to: [2019]
M
(a) 0.77 (b) 0.57
(c) 0.37 (d) 0.17
19. A particle is executing simple harmonic motion (SHM) Which of the following statements is/are true for this
of amplitude A, along the x-axis, about x = 0. When its motion?
potential Energy (PE) equals kinetic energy (KE), the 3T
position of the particle will be: [2019] (A) The force is zero at t =
4
A A (B) The acceleration is maximum at t = T
(a) (b)
2 2 2 T
(C) The speed is maximum at t =
A 4
(c) (d) A T
2 (D) The P.E. is equal to K.E. of the oscillation at t =
20. A cylindrical plastic bottle of negligible mass is filled 2
with 310 ml of water and left floating in a pond with [2020]
still water. If pressed downward slightly and released, (a) (B), (C) and (D) (b) (A), (B) and (D)
it starts performing simple harmonic motion at angular (c) (A) and (D) (d) (A), (B) and (C)
frequency ω. If the radius of the bottle is 2.5 cm then 25. A block of mass m attached to a massless spring is
performing oscillatory motion of amplitude ‘A’ on a
ω is close to: (density of water = 103 kgm −3 ) [2019]
frictionless horizontal plane. If half of the mass of the
(a) 3.75 rad s −1 (b) 1.25 rad s −1 block breaks off when it is passing through its
(c) 2.50 rad s −1 (d) 8.00 rad s −1 equilibrium point, the amplitude of oscillation for the
21. A particle undergoing simple harmonic motion has remaining system become fA. The value of f is: [2020]
time dependent displacement given by 1 1
(a) (b)
πt 2 2
x ( t ) = A sin . The ratio of kinetic to potential
90 (c) 1 (d) 2
energy of this particle at t = 210 s will be: [2019] 26. A ring is hung on a nail. It can oscillate, without
1 slipping or sliding (i) in its plane with a time period T1
(a) (b) 1
9 and, (ii) back and forth in a direction perpendicular to
(c) 2 (d) 3 T
22. A simple pendulum of length 1m is oscillating with an its plane, with a period T2. The ratio 1 will be:
T2
angular frequency 10 rad/s. The support of the
[2020]
pendulum starts oscillating up and down with a small
angular frequency of 1 rad/s and an amplitude of 3 2
(a) (b)
10-2 m. The relative change in the angular frequency of 2 3
the pendulum is best given by: [2000] 2 2
-3
(c) (d)
(a) 10 rad/s (b) 1 rad/s 3 3
(c) 10-1 rad/s (d) 10-5 rad/s 27. When a particle of mass m is attached to a vertical
23. A simple harmonic motion is represented by: spring of spring constant k and released, its motion is
described by y ( t ) = y0 sin ωt , where ‘y’ is measured
( )
2
=y 5 sin 3π t + 3 cos 3π t cm . The amplitude and
from the lower end of unstretched spring. Then ω is:
time period of the motion are: [2019] [2020]
2 3 g 1 g
(a) 10 cm, s (b) 10 cm, s (a) (b)
3 2 y0 2 y0
3 2
(c) 5 cm, s (d) 5 cm, s 2g g
2 3 (c) (d)
y0 2 y0
28. In the given figure, a body of mass M is held between 32. The point A moves with a uniform speed along the
two massless springs, on a smooth inclined plane. The circumference of a circle of radius 0.36 m and covers
free ends of the springs are attached to firm supports. 30o in 0.1 s. The perpendicular projection ‘P’ from ‘A’
If each spring has spring constant k, the frequency of on the diameter MN represents the simple harmonic
oscillation of given body is: [2021] motion of ‘P’. The restoration force per unit mass when
P touches M will be: [2021]
1 2k 1 k
(a) (b)
2π M 2π 2M
(a) 0.49 N/kg (b) 50 N/kg
1 2k 1 k (c) 9.87 N/kg (d) 100 N/kg
(c) (d)
2π Mg sin α 2π Mg sin α 33. If two similar springs each of spring constant k1 are
29. If the time period of a two meter long simple pendulum joined in series, the new spring constant and time
is 2s, the acceleration due to gravity at the place where period would be changed by a factor: [2021]
pendulum is executing S.H.M. is: [2021] 1 1
−2 −2 (a) , 2 2 (b) , 2
(a) 9.8ms (b) 16 ms 2 4
(c) π 2 ms −2 (d) 2π 2 ms −2 1
(c) , 2 2
1
(d) , 2
4 2
=
30. Y A sin (ω t + φ0 ) is the time-displacement equation
34. Given below are two statements:
of a SHM. At t = 0 the displacement of the particle is Statement I: A second’s pendulum has a time period
A of 1 second.
Y= and it is moving along negative x-direction.
2 Statement II: It takes precisely one second to move
Then the initial phase angle φ0 will be: [2021] between the two extreme positions.
In the light of the above statements, chose the correct
π 5π
(a) (b) answer from the options given below [2021]
6 6
(a) Statement I is false but Statement II is true
π 2π
(c) (d) (b) Statement I is true but Statement II is false
3 3
(c) Both Statement I and Statement II are true
31. Two identical springs of spring constant ‘2k’ are (d) Both Statement I and Statement Ii are false
attached to a block of mass m and to fixed support (see 35. A particle executes S.H.M., the graph of velocity as a
figure). When the mass is displaced from equilibrium function of displacement is [2021]
position on either side, it executes simple harmonic (a) A circle (b) An ellipse
motion. The time period of oscillations of this system (c) A parabola (d) A helix
is: [2021] 36. Time period of a simple pendulum is T inside a lift
when the lift is stationary. If the lift moves upwards
with an acceleration g/2, the time period of pendulum
will be [2021]
2 3
m m (a) T (b) T
(a) 2π (b) 2π 3 2
2k k
T
m m (c) (d) 3T
(c) π (d) π 3
k 2k
37. Amplitude of a mass-spring system, which is executing 43. Time period of a simple pendulum is T. The time taken
simple harmonic motion decreases with time. 5
to complete oscillations starting from mean
If mass = 500g. Decay constant =20 g/s then how much 8
time is required for the amplitude of the system to drop α
position is T . The value of α is: [2021]
to half of its initial value? (ln 2 = 0.693) [2021] β
(a) 17.32 (b) 34.65 44. Consider two identical springs each of spring constant
(c) 0.034 (d) 15.01 k and negligible mass compared to the mass M as
38. For what value of displacement, the kinetic energy and shown. Figure 1 shows one of them and figure 2 shows
potential energy of a simple harmonic oscillation their series combination. The ratios of time period of
become equal? [2021] T
(a) x = 0 (b) x = ± A oscillation of the two SHM is b = x , where value
Ta
A A
(c) x = ± (d) x = of x is_________. (Round off to the Nearest Integer)
2 2 [2021]
39. A block of mass 1 kg attached to a spring is made to
oscillate with an initial amplitude of 12 cm.
After 2 minutes the amplitude decreases to 6 cm.
Determine the value of the damping constant for this
motion: (take ln 2 = 0.693) [2021]
−2 −1 −2 −1
(a) 0.69 × 10 kg s (b) 3.3 × 10 kg s
(c) 1.16 × 10−2 kg s −1 (d) 5.7 × 10−3 kg s −1
40. Two particles A and B of equal masses are suspended
from two massless springs of spring constants K1 and
45. A particle performs simple harmonic motion with a
K2 respectively. If the maximum velocities during
period of 2 second. The time taken by the particle to
oscillations are equal, the ratio of the amplitude of A
cover a displacement equal to half of its amplitude
and B is: [2021]
1
K K from the mean position is s.
(a) 2 (b) 1 a
K1 K2
The value of ‘a’ to the nearest integer is ………
K1 K2 [2021]
(c) (d)
K2 K1
41. The function of time representing a simple harmonic
π
motion with a period of is: [2021]
ω
(a) sin 3 (ωt )
(b) sin(ωt ) + cos (ωt )
π 
(c) 3 cos  − 2ωt 
4 
(d) cos (ωt ) + cos (2ωt ) + cos (3ωt )
42. A particle executes S.H.M. with amplitude ‘A’ and
time period ‘T’. The displacement of the particle when
xA
its speed is half of maximum speed is . The value
2
of x is: [2021]
EXERCISE – 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 6. The variation of the acceleration a of the particle
executing S.H.M. with displacement x is as shown in
1. A simple harmonic motion is represented by the figure.
x (t) = 10 sin (20 t + 0.5). The amplitude (A) of the a
a
S.H.M. is
(a) A = 30 (b) A = 20
(a) (b)
(c) A = 10 (d) A = 5
2. The vertical motion of a ship at sea is described by the
x x
d2x
equation = − 4 x , where x is the vertical height of a
dt 2 a
the ship (in metre) above its mean position. If it

oscillates up to a height of 1 m from its mean position. (c) x (d) x
(a) its maximum vertical speed will be 1 m/s
(b) its maximum vertical speed will be 2 m/s
(c) its greatest vertical acceleration is 2 m/s2
(d) its greatest vertical acceleration is 1 m/s2 7.What is the maximum acceleration of the particle
3. A body of mass 0.01 kg executes simple harmonic doing the SHM
motion (S.H.M.) about x = 0 under the influence of a π t 
force shown below: The period of the S.H.M. is
= y 2sin  + φ  , where y is in cm.
2 
π π2
(a) cm/s 2 (b) cm/s 2
2 2
π π2
(c) cm/s 2 (d) cm/s 2
4 4
(a) 1.05 s (b) 0.52 s 8. The acceleration a of a particle undergoing SHM is
(c) 0.25 s (d) 0.30 s shown in the figure. Which of the labelled points
4. If a particle under S.H.M. has time period 0.1 sec and corresponds to the particle being at –xmax?
amplitude 2 × 10–3 m. It has maximum velocity
π π
(a) m/s (b) m/s
25 26
π
(c) m/s (d) None of these
30
5. For a particle executing simple harmonic motion,
(a) 4 (b) 3
which of the following statements is not correct
(c) 2 (d) 1
(a) The total energy of the particle always remains the
9. The equation of motion of a particle executing simple
same
(b) The restoring force is always directed towards a harmonic motion is a + 16p 2 x =
0 . In this equation, a
fixed point is the linear acceleration in m/s2 of the particle at a
(c) The restoring force is maximum at the extreme displacement x in metre. The time period in simple
positions harmonic motion is
(d) The acceleration of the particle is maximum at the 1 1
(a) s (b) s
equilibrium position. 4 2
(c) 1 s (d) 2 s
10. The displacement of a particle moving in S.H.M. at any 18. The displacement time equation of a particle executing
instant is given by y = a sin ωt . The acceleration after SHM= is: x A sin ( t + φ ) . At time t = 0 position of the
T A
time t = is (where T is the time period) particle is x = and it is moving along negative x-
4 2
(a) aω (b) −aω direction. Then the angle φ can be:
(c) aω 2 (d) − aω 2 π π
11. The potential energy of a particle executing S.H.M. is (a) (b)
6 3
2.5 J, when its displacement is half of amplitude. The
total energy of the particle is 2π 5π
(c) (d)
(a) 18 J (b) 10 J 3 6
(c) 12 J (d) 2.5 J 19. Two simple harmonic motions are represented by the
12. A particle is vibrating in a simple harmonic motion  π
=
equations y1 0.1sin 100π t +  and
with amplitude 4 cm. At what distance from the  3
equilibrium is its energy half potential and half kinetic? y2 = 0.1cos π t . The phase difference of the velocity of
(a) 2 2 cm (b) 2 cm
particle 1 with respect to the velocity of particle 2 is
(c) 3 cm (d) 1 cm −π π
13. Energy of particle executing SHM depends upon (a) (b)
3 6
(a) amplitude only
−π π
(b) amplitude and frequency (c) (d)
(c) velocity only
6 3
20. If < E > and < U > denote the average kinetic and the
(d) frequency only
average potential energies respectively of mass
14. A particle of mass 0.10 kg executes SHM with an
describing a simple harmonic motion, over one period,
amplitude 0.05 m and frequency 20 Hz. Its energy of
then the correct relation is
oscillation is [given : π 2 = 10]
(a) < E > = < U > (b) < E > = 2 <U >
(a) 2 J (b) 4 J (c) < E > = – 2 <U > (d) < E >= – < U >
(c) 1 J (d) zero 21. The following figure depicts a circular motion. The
15. A particle is executing simple harmonic motion with a radius of the circle, the period of revolution, the initial
period of T seconds and amplitude a metre. The position and the sense of revolution are indicated on
a the figure. The simple harmonic motion of the x–
shortest time it takes to reach a point m from its
2 projection of the radius vector of the rotating particle P
mean position in seconds is can be shown as :
T
(a) T (b)
4
T T
(c) (d)
8 16
16. A particle of mass 0.1 kg is executing SHM of
amplitude 0.1 m. When the particle passes through the
mean position, its KE is 8 × 10-3 J. Find the equation
 2π t π 
of motion of the particle, if the initial phase of (a) x ( t ) a cos 
= + 
oscillation is 45°  4 4
π  πt π 

(a) y 0.1cos  3t +  =
=
 π
(b) y 0.1sin  6t +  (b) x ( t ) a cos  + 
=
 4   4  4 4
 2π t π 
 π  π (c) x ( t ) a sin 
= + 
=(c) y 0.1sin  4t +  = (d) y 0.1cos  4t +   4 4
 4  4
 πt π 
17. A particle of mass 0.1 kg executes SHM under a force (d) x ( t ) a cos  + 
=
F = (–10x) Newton. Speed of particle at mean position  3 2
is 6 m/s. Then amplitude of oscillations is
(a) 0.6 m (b) 0.2 m
(c) 0.4 m (d) 0.1 m
22. A particle moves with simple harmonic motion in a 29. The potential energy of a harmonic oscillator of mass
straight line. In first τs, after starting from rest it travels 2 kg in its mean position is 5J. If its total energy is 9J
a distance a, and in next τ s it travels 2a, in same and its amplitude is 0.01 m, its time period will be
direction, then : π π
(a) s (b) s
(a) time period of oscillations is 8τ 100 50
(b) amplitude of motion is 4a π 
(c) time period of oscillations is 6τ (c)   s (d) none of these
 20 
(d) amplitude of motion is 3a
30. Two particles are executing SHM in a straight line.
23. In SHM for how many times potential energy is equal
Amplitude A and time period T of both the particles
to kinetic energy during one complete period?
are equal. At time t = 0, one particle is at displacement
(a) 1 (b) 2
−A
(c) 4 (d) 8 x1 = +A and the other at x 2 = and they are
24. Velocity at mean position of a particle executing SHM 2
is v. Velocity of the particle at a distance equal to half approaching towards each other. After what time they
of the amplitude will be cross each other?
v v T T
(a) (b) (a) (b)
2 2
3 4
3 3 5T T
(c) v (d) v (c) (d)
2 4 6 6
25. A particle executes linear simple harmonic motion 31. A particle is executing S.H.M. of amplitude 5 cm and
with an amplitude of 2 cm. When the particle is at 1 cm period 6 sec. How long will it take to move from one
from the mean position the magnitude of its velocity is end of its path on one side of mean position to a
equal to that of its acceleration. Then its time period in position 2.5 cm on the same side of the mean position?
seconds is (a) 1.5 sec (b) 1 sec
1 (c) 3 sec (d) 3.5 sec
(a) (b) 2π 3 32. A particle executing harmonic motion is having
2π 3
velocities v1 and v2 at distance x1 and x2 from the
2π 3
(c) (d) equilibrium position. The amplitude of the motion is
3 2π
26. A particle of mass m executes simple harmonic motion v12 x 22 − v 22 x12 v12 x12 − v 22 x 22
(a) (b)
with amplitude a and frequency ν . The average kinetic v12 + v 22 v12 + v 22
energy during its motion from the position of
v12 x 22 - v 22 x12 v12 x 22 + v 22 x12
equilibrium to the ends is (c) (d)
v12 - v 22 v12 + v 22
(a) 2π 2 ma 2ν 2 (b) π 2 ma 2ν 2
1 33. A certain simple harmonic vibrator of mass 0.1 kg has
(c) π 2 ma 2ν 2 (d) 4π 2 ma 2 v 2 a total energy of 10 J. Its displacement from the mean
4
27. The maximum acceleration of a particle in SHM is position is 1cm when it has equal kinetic and potential
made two times keeping the maximum speed to be energies. The amplitude A and frequency f of vibration
constant. It is possible when of the vibrator are
(a) amplitude of oscillation is doubled while frequency 500
=
(a) A =
2 cm, f Hz
remains constant π
(b) amplitude is doubled while frequency is halved
(c) frequency is doubled while amplitude is halved
1000
(d) frequency of oscillation is doubled while amplitude =
(b) A =
2 cm, f Hz
π
remains constant
1 500
πt =
(c) A = cm, f Hz
28. A particle moves according to the law x = a cos . 2 π
2
The distance covered by it in the time interval between 1 1000
=
(d) A = cm, f Hz
t = 0 to t = 3 s is 2 π
(a) 2a (b) 3a
(c) 4a (d) 5a
34. A particle of mass m is executing simple harmonic 41. Two bodies M and N of equal masses are suspended
oscillations about the origin on the x-axis. Its potential from two separate massless springs of force constants
energy is U(x) = k x 3 , where k is a positive constant. k1 and k 2 respectively. If the two bodies oscillate
If the amplitude of oscillation is a, then its time period vertically such that their maximum velocities are
T is equal, the ratio of the amplitude M to that of N is
1 k1 k1
(a) proportional to (b) proportional to a (a) (b)
a k2 k2
(c) proportional to a (d) proportional a 3/ 2 k2 k2
35. The displacement of the particle from its mean position (c) (d)
k1 k1
(in metre) is given by
42. In arrangement given in figure, if the block of mass m
y = 0.2 sin (10πt + 1.5π) cos (10πt + 1.5π). is displaced, the frequency is given by
The motion of the particle is
(a) periodic but not simple harmonic motion
(b) non periodic
(c) simple harmonic motion with period of 0.1 s
(d) simple harmonic motion with period of 0.2 s. 1 k1 – k2 1 k1 + k2
(a) f = (b) f =
36. Maximum velocity in SHM is v m . The average 2π m 2π m
velocity during motion from one extreme point to the
1 m 1 m
other extreme point will be: (c) f = (d) f =
2π k1 + k2 2π k1 – k2
π 2
(a) v m (b) v m
2 π 43. Three masses 700 g, 500 g, and 400 g are suspended at
4 π the end of as spring as shown and are in equilibrium.
(c) v m (d) v m When the 700g mass is removed, the system oscillates
π 4
37. Force constant of a weightless spring is 16 N/m. A with a period of 3 seconds, when the 500 gm mass is
body of mass 1.0 kg suspended from it is pulled down also removed, it will oscillate with a period of
through 5 cm from its mean position and then released.
The maximum kinetic energy of the body will be
(a) 2 × 10–2 J (b) 4 × 10–2 J
(c) 8 × 10–2 J (d) 16 × 10–2 J
38. A particle is attached to a vertical spring and is pulled
down a distance 0.04 m below its equilibrium position
(a) 1 s (b) 2 s
and is released from rest. The initial upward
12
acceleration of the particle is 0.30 m/s2. The period of (c) 3 s (d) s
the oscillation is 5
(a) 4.08 s (b) 1.92 s 44. On a smooth inclined plane, a body of mass M is
(c) 3.90 s (d) 2.29 s attached between two springs. The other ends of the
39. Frequency of a particle executing SHM is 10 Hz. The springs are fixed to firm supports. If each spring has
particle is suspended from a vertical spring. At the force constant k, the period of oscillation of the body
highest point of its oscillation the spring is unstretched. (assuming the springs as massless) is
Maximum speed of the particle is: (g = 10 m/s2)
(a) 2π m / s (b) π m / s
1 1
(c) m/s (d) m/s
π 2π
40. To make the frequency double of an oscillator, we have
to 1/ 2 1/ 2
M   2M 
(a) Double the mass (a) 2π   (b) 2π  
(b) Half the mass K  K 
Mg sin θ
1/ 2
(c) Quadruple the mass  2 Mg 
(c) 2π (d) 2π  
(d) Reduce the mass to one-fourth 2K  K 
45. Four massless springs whose force constants are 2k, 47. A massless rod is pivoted at point O. A string carrying
2k, k and 2 k respectively are attached to a mass M kept a mass m at one end is attached to the point A on the
on a frictionless plane (as shown in figure). If the mass rod. The period of small vertical oscillation of mass m
M is displaced in the horizontal direction, then the around its equilibrium position is:
frequency of the system.
1 k 1 4k a m a m
(a) (b) (a) T = 2π (b) T = π
2π 4M 2π M b k b k
1 k 1 7k b m b m
(c) (d) (c) T = 2π (d) T = π
2π 7M 2π M a k a k
46. m1 and m2 are connected with a light inextensible 48. A block of mass m, attached to a fixed position O on a
string with m1 lying on smooth table and m2 hanging smooth inclined wedge of mass M, oscillates with
amplitude A and angular frequency ω . The wedge is
as shown in figure. m1 is also connected to a light
located on a rough horizontal surface and the wedge
spring which is initially unstretched and the system is doesn’t move. If the angle of the wedge is 60°, then the
released from rest force of friction acting on the wedge is given by
(coefficient of static friction = µ)
(a) system will perform SHM with angular frequency

k ( m1 + m2 )
given by . (a) µ (M + m) g
m1m2 1
(b) mω 2 A sin ωt
(b) system performs SHM with angular frequency 2
k (c) µ ( M + m ) ω 2 A sin ωt
given by .
m1 + m2  3 
(d) µ ( M + m ) g + mω 2 A sin ωt 
(c) tension in string will be 0 when the system is  2 
released. 49. In the figure, the block of mass m, attached to the
mg springs of stiffness k is in contact with the completely
(d) maximum displacement of m1 will be 2 .
k elastic wall, and the compression in the spring is x. The
spring is compressed further by x by displacing the
block towards left and is then released. If the collision
between the block and the wall is completely elastic
then the time period of oscillations of the block will be:
2π m m
(a) (b) 2π
3 k k
π m π m
(c) (d)
3 k 6 k
50. A uniform cylinder of length L and mass M having 53. The friction coefficient between two blocks of masses
cross-sectional area A is suspended with its length 1 kg and 4 kg shown in figure is µ and the horizontal
vertical from a fixed point by a light spring such that it plane surface is smooth. If the system is slight
is half submerged in a liquid of density σ at displaced from the mean position and released, it will
equilibrium position. When the cylinder is given a execute SHM. The maximum amplitude for which the
small downward push and released it starts oscillating upper block does not slip relative to the lower will be
with small amplitudes. If the spring has a force –(k is spring constant)
constant k, then its time period of oscillations will be
M M
(a) T = 2π (b) T = 2π
Aσ g k
M
(c) T = 2π (d) none of these
k + Aσ g
51. One end of a spring of force constant k is fixed to a 5µg µg
(a) (b)
vertical wall and the other to a block of mass m resting k k
on a smooth horizontal surface. There is another wall 3µg 2µg
(c) (d)
at a distance x0 from the black. The spring is then k k
compressed by 2x0 and released. The time taken to 54. A mass M = 5 kg is attached to a spring a shown in the
figure and held in position, so that the spring remains
strike the wall is
unstretched. The spring constant is 200 N/m. The mass
M is, then released and begins to undergo small
M
oscillations. The amplitude of oscillation is
2x0 x0
1 k k
(a) π (b)
6 m m
2π m π k
(c) (d)
3 k 4 m
52. A wooden cube (density of wood d) of side l floats in (a) 0.5 m (b) 0.25 m
a liquid of density ρ with its upper and lower surfaces (c) 0.2 m (d) 0.1 m
horizontal. If the cube is pushed slightly down and 55. A spring has a natural length of 50 cm and a force
released, it performs simple harmonic motion of period constant of 2.0 × 103 Nm–1. A body of mass 10 kg is
T. Then T is equal to suspended from it and the spring is stretched. If the
ρ d body is pulled down to a length of 58 cm and released,
(a) 2π (b) 2π
( d)g
ρ − ρg it executes simple harmonic motion. What is the net
force on the body when it is at its lowermost position
ρ d of its oscillation? (Take g = 10 ms–2)
(c) 2π (d) 2π
dg (ρ − d ) g (a) 20 N (b) 40 N
(c) 60 N (d) 80 N
56. A spring of force constant 200 N/m is mounted as
shown in figure and a mass 2 kg is attached to the free
end. If the system is given an initial displacement of
0.05 m and an initial velocity of 2 m/sec, find the
amplitude of simple harmonic motion.
(a) 0.4 m (b) 0.206 m

(c) 0.3 m (d) 0.5 m
57. The ratio of frequencies of two pendulums are 2:3, then 61. A horizontal rod of mass m and length L is pivoted
their length are in ratio smoothly at one end. The rod’s other end is supported
(a) 2/3 (b) 3/ 2 by a spring of force constant k. The rod is rotated (in
4 vertical plane) by a small angle θ from its horizontal
9
(c) (d) equilibrium position and released. The angular
9 4
frequency of the subsequent simple harmonic motion
58. The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum of
is
length L suspended from the roof of a vehicle which
moves without friction down an inclined plane of
inclination α , is given by
L L
(a) 2π (b) 2π
g cos α g sin α
L L 3k k
(c) 2π (d) 2π (a) (b)
g g tan α m 3m
59. In case of a simple pendulum, time period versus 3k 3 g k
length is depicted by (c) + (d)
m 2L m
62. A uniform rod of length L is suspended from a point P
and is made to undergo small oscillations. Time period
of oscillation is (O is centre of mass):
(a) (b)
(c) (d) 3L L
(a) 2π (b) 2π
g g
7L L
(c) 2π (d) 2π
12 g 12 g
63. A rectangular block of mass m and area of cross-
60. A simple pendulum has time period T = 2s is air. If
section A floats in a liquid of density ρ . If it is given
whole arrangement is placed in non-viscous liquid
1 small vertical displacement from equilibrium, it
whose density is times the density of bob. The time undergoes oscillation with a time period T, then
2
(a) T ∝ m (b) T ∝ ρ
period in the liquid will be:
2 1 1
(a) s (b) 4 s (c) T ∝ (d) T ∝
2 A ρ
(c) 2 2 s (d) 4 2 s 64. A U tube of uniform bore of cross-sectional area A has
been set up vertically with open ends facing up. Now
M gm of a liquid of density d is poured into it. The
column of liquid in this tube will oscillate with a period
T such that
M MA
(a) T = 2π (b) T = 2π
g gd
M M
(c) T = 2π (d) T = 2π
gdA 2 Adg
65. The metallic bob of a simple pendulum has the relative Objective Questions II
density ρ . The time period of this pendulum is T. If [One or more than one correct option]
the metallic bob is immersed in water, then the new 68. A coin is placed on a horizontal platform, which
time period is given by undergoes vertical simple harmonic motion of angular
ρ −1 ρ frequency ω . The amplitude of oscillation is gradually
(a) T (b) T
ρ ρ −1 increased. The coin will leave contact with the
platform for the first time
ρ −1 ρ
(c) T (d) T (a) at the highest position of the platform
ρ ρ −1
(b) at the mean position of the platform
66. One end of a spring of force constant k is fixed to a g
vertical wall and the other to a body of mass m resting (c) for an amplitude of
ω2
on a smooth horizontal surface. There is another wall
at a distance x0 from the body. The spring is then g
(d) for an amplitude of
compressed by 3x0 and released. The time taken to
ω
69. Two masses m1 and m2 are suspended together by a
strike the wall from the instant of release is
–1 light spring of spring constant k as shown in the figure.
(given sin (1/3) = (π/9))
When the system is in equilibrium, the mass m1 is
removed without disturbing the system, as a result of
this removal mass m2 performs simple harmonic
motion. For this situation mark the correct
statement(s).
π m 2π m
(a) (b)
6 k 3 k
π m 11π m
(c) (d)
4 k 18 k
67. A mass m is suspended from a spring of force constant
k and just touches another identical spring fixed to the
floor as shown in the figure. The time period of small
oscillations is
m1 g
(a) the amplitude of oscillation is
k
( m1 + m2 ) g
(b) the amplitude of oscillation is
k
(c) the system oscillates with angular frequency k
m2
m m m (d) the system oscillates with angular frequency

(a) 2π (b) π +π
k k k/2 k
(c) π
m
(d) π
m m ( m1 + m2 )
+π
3k / 2 k 2k 70. A particle is subjected to two simple harmonic motions
along x and y directions according to x = 3 sin 100 πt
and y = 4sin 100 πt
(a) Motion of particle will be on ellipse travelling in
clockwise direction.
(b) Motion of particle will be on a straight line with
slope 4/3.
(c) Motion will be simple harmonic motion with
amplitude 5.
(d) Phase difference between two motions is π/2.
71. A rectangular block of mass m and area of cross 77. The length of second’s pendulum of the earth is 1 .
section A floats on a liquid of density ρ. If it is given a And the length of second’s pendulum on the moon is
small displacement, it oscillates with a period T, then 
 2 . Find the value of 1
(a) T ∝ m (b) T ∝ ρ 2
1 1 78. In a seconds pendulum, mass of the bob is 30 g. If it is

(c) T ∝ (d) T ∝ replaced by 90 g mass then its time period (in sec) will
A r
72. The potential energy of a particle of mass 0.1kg, be
moving along the x-axis, is given by U = 5x(x – 4)J, 79. The motion of a particle is given as
where x is in meter. It can be concluded that =x A sin ωt + B cos ωt . The motion of the particle is
(a) the particle is acted upon by a constant force. simple harmonic with amplitude ( A2 + B 2 ) , find the
n
(b) the speed of the particle is maximum at x = 2 m.

(c) the particle executes SHM. value of n
π 80. The displacement equation of a particle is
(d) the period of oscillation of the particle is s .
5 x = 3 sin 2t + 4 cos 2t
73. The angular frequency of the damped oscillator is
The product of magnitude of amplitude and magnitude
k r2  of maximum velocity will be:
given by,= ω  − 2 
where k is the spring
 m 4m  81. The equation of a SHM is given by
constant, m is the mass of the oscillator and r is the =x 4sin 5π t + 4 cos 5π t , where x is in cm and time t
r2 is in seconds. Find the phase constant (in degrees) of
damping constant. If the ratio is 8%, the change the motion.
mk
in time period compared to the undamped oscillator is 82. A particle undergoing SHM has the equation:
approximately as follows: =x A sin (ω t + φ ) , where x represents the
(a) increases by 8% (b) decreases by 8% displacement of the particle. The kinetic energy
(c) increases by 1% (d) decrease by 1% nπ
74. A body is in simple harmonic motion with time period oscillates with time period find the value of n.
ω
half second (T = 0.5 s) and amplitude one cm
(A = 1 cm). Find the average velocity in the interval in 83. The potential energy of a particle of mass 1 kg in motion
along the x–axis is given by: U = 4 (1 – cos 2x) J
which it moves from equilibrium position to half of its
amplitude. Here x is in metres. The period of small oscillations (in
(a) 6 cm/s (b) 4 cm/s π
sec) is , find the value of n.
(c) 16 cm/s (d) 12 cm/s n
Numerical Value Type Questions Assertion Reason
75. The mass and diameter of a planet are twice those of (A) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason
earth. The period of a second’s pendulum on this planet is the correct explanation of the assertion.
is 2 n . Find the value of n. (B) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
not the correct explanation of the assertion.
76. A man measures the period of a simple pendulum
inside a stationary lift and finds it to be T sec. If the lift (C) If assertion is true but reason is false.
g (D) If the assertion and reason both are false.
accelerates upwards with an acceleration , then the
4 84. Assertion (A): In extreme position of a particle
2T executing S.H.M., both velocity and acceleration are
period of the pendulum becomes . Find the value
n zero.
of n. Reason (R): In S.H.M., acceleration always acts
towards mean position.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
85. Assertion (A): Water in a U-tube executes SHM, the 89. A simple harmonic oscillator consists of a block
time period for mercury filled upto the same height in attached to a spring with k = 200 N/m. The block slides
the U-tube bc greater than that in case of water. on a frictionless horizontal surface, with equilibrium
Reason (R): Thc amplitude of an oscillating pendulum point x = 0. A graph of the block’s velocity v as a
goes on increasing. function of time t is shown. Correctly match the
(a) A (b) B required information in Column I with the values given
in Column II (use π = 10):
2
(c) C (d) D
86. Assertion (A): The percentage change in time period
is 1.5%. If the length of simple pendulum increases
by 3%.
Reason (R): Time period is directly proportional to
length of pendulum.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
87. Assertion (A): All oscillatory motions are necessarily Column-I Column-II
periodic motion, but all periodic motions are not (a) The block’s mass in kg (p) –200
oscillatory. (b) The block’s displacement (q) 0.20
Reason (R): Simple pendulum is an example of at t = 0 in metres
oscillatory motion. (c) The block’s acceleration (r) 4.0
2
(a) A (b) B at t = 0.10s in m/s
(c) C (d) D (d) The block’s maximum (s) –0.20
kinetic energy in joules
Match the Following
Paragraph Type Questions
Each question has two columns. Four options are given
Using the following passage, solve Q. 90 to 92
representing matching of elements from Column-I and
Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds to Passage - 1
a correct matching. For each question, choose the option One end of an ideal spring is fixed to a wall at origin O and
corresponding to the correct matching. the axis of spring is parallel to x-axis. A block of mass m =
88. Two particles ‘A’ and ‘B’ start SHM at t = 0. Their 1kg is attached to free end of the spring and it is performing
positions as function of time are given by SHM. Equation of position of the block in co-ordinate system
XA = A sin ωt shown in figure is x = 10 + 3sin (10t), where t is in second
and x in cm.
XB = A sin (ωt + π/3)
Another block of mass M = 3 kg, moving towards the origin
Column-I Column-II
with velocity 30 cm/s collides with the block performing
(a) Minimum time (p) π SHM at t = 0 and gets stuck to it.
when x is same 3ω
(b) Minimum time (q) π
when velocity is ω
same
(c) Minimum time (r) π 90. Angular frequency of oscillation after collision is
(a) 20 rad/s (b) 5 rad/s
after which 2ω
vA < 0 and vB < 0 (c) 100 rad/s (d) 50 rad/s
91. New amplitude of oscillation is
(d) Minimum time (s) 5π
(a) 3 cm (b) 20 cm
after which 6ω (c) 10 cm (d) 100 cm
xA < 0 and xB < 0
92. New equation for position of the combined body is
(a) (10 + 3 sin 5t) cm (b) (10 – 3 sin 5t) cm
(c) (10 + 3 cos 10 t) cm (d) (10 – 3 cos 10t) cm
Using the following passage, solve Q. 93 to 95 Using the following passage, solve Q. 96 to 100
Passage - 2 Passage - 3
A small block of mass m is fixed at upper end of a massive A 100 g block is connected to a horizontal massless spring of
vertical spring of spring constant k = 4 mg/L and natural force constant 25.6 N/m. As shown in figure (a), the block is
length ‘10L’. The lower end of spring is free and is at a height free to oscillate on a horizontal frictionless surface. The block
is displaced 3 cm from the equilibrium position and, at t = 0,
L from fixed horizontal floor as shown. The spring is initially
it is released from rest at x= 0. It executes simple harmonic
unstressed, and the spring-block system is released from rest motion with the positive x-direction indicated in figure (a).
in the shown position. The position-time(x-t) graph of motion of the block is as
shown in figure (b).
93. At the instant the speed of block is maximum, the

magnitude of force exerted by the spring on the block
is
mg
(a) (b) mg
2
(c) zero (d) None of these
94. As the block is coming down, the maximum speed
96. When the block is at position A on the graph, its
attained by the block is
(a) position and velocity both are negative
(a) gL (b) 3gL
(b) position is positive, and velocity is negative
3 3 (c) position is negative, and velocity is positive
(c) gL (d) gL
2 2 (d) position and velocity both the positive
95. Till the block reaches its lowest position for the first 97. When the block is at position B on the graph, its
time, the time duration for which the spring remains (a) position and velocity are positive
compressed is (b) position is positive, and velocity is negative
(c) position in negative and velocity is positive
L L 1
(a) π + sin −1 (d) position and velocity are negative
2g 4g 3
98. When the block is at position C on the graph, its
π L L 1 (a) velocity is maximum, and acceleration is zero
(b) + sin −1
4 g 4g 3 (b) velocity is minimum, and acceleration is zero
(c) velocity is zero and acceleration is negative
L L 2
(c) π + sin −1 (d) velocity is zero and acceleration is positive
2g 4g 3
99. Position of the block as a function of time can now be
π L L 2 expressed as
(d) + sin −1
2 2g 4g 3  π
=
(a) x 3cos 16t +  cm
 2
 π
=
(b) x 3cos 16t +  cm
 3
 π
=
(c) x 3.5cos 16t +  cm
 6
 π
=
(d) x 3.2 cos 16t +  cm
 4
100. Velocity of the block as a function of time can be

expressed as
 π
(a) v =
−48sin 16t +  cm / s
 2
 π
(b) v =
−48sin 16t +  cm / s
 3
 π
(c) v =
−56sin 16t +  cm / s
 4
 π
(d) v =
−56sin 16t +  cm / s
 6
EXERCISE – 4: PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

When a particle of mass m moves on the x–axis in a potential 5. A simple pendulum has time period T1. The point of
of the form V(x) = kx2, it performs simple harmonic motion. suspension is now moved upward according to the
relation y = kt2, (k = 1 m/s2) where y is the vertical
m
The corresponding time period is proportional to , as can displacement. The time period now becomes T2 The
k
T12
be seen easily using dimensional analysis. However, the ratio of is
motion of a particle can be periodic even when its potential T22
energy increases on both sides of x = 0 in a way different from (Take g = 10 m/s2) [2005]
kx2 and its total energy is such that the particle does not 6 5
(a) (b)
escape to infinity. Consider a particle of mass m moving on 5 6
the x–axis. Its potential energy is V(x) = ax4 (a > 0) for |x| 4
near the origin and becomes a constant equal to V0 for |x| > (c) 1 (d)
5
X0 (see figure)
V(x) 6. A mass m is undergoing SHM in the vertical direction
about the mean position y 0 with amplitude A and
angular frequency ω . At a distance y from the mean
V0 position, the mass detaches from the spring. Assume
that the spring contracts and does not obstruct the
x motion of m.
X0
*
1. If the total energy of the particle is E, it will perform Find the distance y . (measured from the mean
periodic motion only if [2004] position) such that the height h attained by the block
(a) E < 0 (b) E > 0 is maximum.
(c) V0 > E > 0 (d) E > V0 (Aω 2 > g ) [2005]
2. For periodic motion of small amplitude, A, the time
period T of this particle is proportional to [2004]
m 1 m
(a) A (b)
α A α
α 1 α
(c) A (d)
m A m
3. The acceleration of this particle for |x| > X0 is [2004]
V
(a) proportional to V0 (b) proportional to 0
mX 0 7. Function x = A sin 2 ωt + B cos 2 ωt + C sin ωt cos ωt
V0 represents SHM: [2006]
(c) proportional to (d) zero
mX 0 (a) For any value of A, B and C (except C = 0)
4. A block P of mass m is placed on a horizontal (b) If A = –B, C = 2 B, amplitude = B 2
frictionless plane. A second block of same mass m is
placed on it and is connected to a spring of spring (c) If A = B; C = 0
constant k, the two blocks are pulled by a distance A. (d) If A = B; C = 2 B, amplitude = |B|
Block Q oscillates without slipping. What is the
maximum value of frictional force between the two
blocks? [2004]
kA
(a) (b) kA
2
(c) µs mg (d) zero
8. Column–I describes some situation in which a small 9. Column-I gives a list of possible set of parameters
object moves. Column–II describes some measured in some experiments. The variations of the
characteristics of these motions. Match the situations parameters in the form of graphs are shown in
in Column–I with the characteristic in Column–II. Column-II. Match the set of parameters given in
[2007] Column-I with the graphs given in Column-II.
Column-I Column-II Indicate your answer by darkening the appropriate
(a) The object moves on the (p) The object bubbles of the 4 × 4 matrix given in the ORS. [2008]
x–axis executes under a is Column-I Column-II
conservative force in performing (a) Potential energy of (p)
such a way that its simple a simple pendulum
“speed” and “position” harmonic (y-axis) as a
=
satisfy v c c −x 2 motion. function of
1 2
displacement
,where c1 and c2 are
(x-axis)
positive constants.
(b) The object moves on the (q) The object (b) Displacement (y- (q)
x–axis in such a way does not axis) as a function
that its velocity and its change its of time (x-axis) for
displacement from the direction a one dimensional
origin satisfy v = –kx, motion at zero or
where k is a positive constant
constant. acceleration when
(c) The object is attached to (r) The kinetic the body is moving
one end of a mass–less energy of along the positive
spring of a given spring the object x-direction.
constant. The other end keeps on (c) Range of a (r)
of the spring is attached decreasing projectile (y-axis)
to the ceiling of an as a function of its
elevator. Initially velocity (x-axis)
everything is at rest. The when projected at a
elevator starts going fixed angle.
upwards with a constant (d) The square of the (s)
acceleration a. The time period (y-axis)
motion of the object is of a simple
observed from the pendulum as a
elevator during the function of its
period it maintains this length (x-axis).
acceleration. 10. The x–t graph of a particle undergoing simple
(d) The object is projected (s) The object harmonic motion is shown below. The acceleration of
from the earth’s surface can change the particle at t = 4/3 s is: [2009]
vertically upwards its direction
GM e only once.
2 , where Me is
Re
the mass of the earth and
Re is the radius of the
earth. Neglect forces
from objects other than 3 2 −π 2
the earth. (a) π cm s −2 (b) cm s −2
32 32
π2 3 2
(c) cm s −2 (d) − π cm s −2
32 32
11. A uniform rod of length l and mass M is pivoted at the 15. A point mass is subjected to two simultaneous
centre. Its two ends are attached to two springs of equal sinusoidal displacements in x–direction,
spring constant k. The springs are fixed to rigid  2π 
x1 (t) = A sin ωt and x2 (t) = A sin  ωt + .
supports as shown in the figure, and rod is free to  3 
oscillate in the horizontal plane. The rod is gently Adding a third sinusoidal displacement
pushed through a small angle θ in one direction and x3(t) = B sin (ωt + φ) brings the mass to a complete
released. The frequency of oscillation is [2009]
rest. The value of B and φ are [2011]
3π 4π
(a) 2 A, (b) A,
4 3
5π π
(c) 3 A, (d) A,
1 2k 1 k 6 3
(a) (b)
2π M 2π M 16. A metal rod of length L and mass m is pivoted at one
1 6k 1 24k end. A thin disk of mass M and radius R (< L) is
(c) (d) attached at its centre of the free end of the rod.
2π M 2π M
12. The mass M shown in the figure oscillates in simple Consider two ways the disc is attached.
harmonic motion with amplitude A. The amplitude of Case A – the disc is not free to rotate about its centre
the point P is [2009] and
Case B – the disc is free to rotate about its centre.
The rod-disc system performs SHM in vertical plane
after being released from the same displaced position.
k1 A k2 A
(a) (b) Which of the following statement(s) is/are true?
k2 k1 [2011]
k1 A k2 A
(c) (d)
k1 + k2 k1 + k2
13. A 0.1 kg mass is suspended from a wire of negligible
mass. The length of the wire is 1 m and its cross-
sectional area is 4.9 × 10−7 m 2 . If the mass is pulled a
little in the vertically downward direction and released,
it performs simple harmonic motion of angular
frequency 140 rad s-1. If the Young’s modulus of the
(a) Restoring torque in case A = Restoring torque in
material of the wire is n×109 Nm-2 the value of n is
case B
[2010]
(b) Restoring torque in case A < Restoring torque in
14. A wooden block performs SHM on a frictionless
case B
surface with frequency f 0 . The block carries a charge
 (c) Angular frequency for case A > Angular frequency
+Q on its surface. If now a uniform electric field E is for case B
switched-on as shown, then the SHM of the block will (d) Angular frequency for case A < Angular frequency
be [2011] for case B
(a) of the same frequency and with shifted mean

position
(b) of the same frequency and with the same mean
position
(c) of changed frequency and with shifted mean
position
(d) of changed frequency and with the same mean
position
17. A particle of mass m is attached to one end of a mass- 19. A block with mass M is connected by a massless spring
less spring of force constant k, lying on a frictionless with stiffness constant k to a rigid wall and moves
horizontal plane. The other end of the spring is fixed. without friction on a horizontal surface. The block
The particle starts moving horizontally from its oscillates with small amplitude A about an equilibrium
equilibrium position at time t = 0 with an initial position x0. Consider two cases: (i) when the block is
velocity u0. When the speed of the particle is 0.5 u0, it at x0; and (ii) when the block is at x = x0 + A. In both
collides elastically with a rigid wall. After this the cases, a particle with mass m (< M) is softly placed
collision [2013] on the block after which they stick to each other.
(a) the speed of the particle when it returns to its Which of the following statement (s) is (are) true about
equilibrium position is u0 the motion after the mass m is placed on the mass M?
(b) the time at which the particle passes through the [2016]
m (a) The amplitude of oscillation in the first case
equilibrium position for the first time is t = π
k M
changes by a factor of , whereas in the
(c) the time at which the maximum compression of the m+M
4π m second case it remains unchanged
spring occurs is t = (b) The final time period of oscillation in both the cases
3 k
is same
(d) the time at which the particle passes through the
(c) The total energy decreases in both the cases
equilibrium position for the second time is
(d) The instantaneous speed at x0 of the combined
5π m
t= masses decreases in both the cases
3 k
20. A block of mass 2M is attached to a massless spring
18. Two independent harmonic oscillators of equal mass with spring-constant k. This block is connected to two
are oscillating about the origin with angular other blocks of masses M and 2M using two massless
frequencies ω1 and ω2 and have total energies E1 and pulleys and strings. The accelerations of the blocks are
E2, respectively, The variation of their momenta p with a1,a2, and a3 as shown in the figure. The system is
a a released from rest with spring in its unstretched state.
positions x are shown in the figures. If = n2 and
b R The maximum extension of the spring is x0. Which of
= n, then the correct equation(s) is (are) [2015] the following option(s) is/are correct? [g is the
acceleration due to gravity. Neglect friction] [2019]
ω2
(a) E1ω1 = E2 ω2 (b) = n2
ω1
E1 E2 x0
(c) ω2 ω1 = n2 (d) = (a) At an extension of of the spring, the magnitude
ω1 ω2 4
of acceleration of the block connected to the spring
3g
is
10
4Mg
(b) x0 =
k
x
(c) When spring achieves an extension of 0 for the
2
first time, the speed of the block connected to the
M
spring is 3 g
5k
(d) a2-a1=a1-a3

13
WAVES
WAVESChapter 13 141
WAVES
1. INTRODUCTION AND CLASSIFICATION OF In stationary waves particles of the medium vibrate

WAVES with different amplitude but energy does not
propagate.
Introduction of waves: When a particle moves through
(iii) Based on direction of propagation: Waves can be
space, it carries KE with itself. Wherever the particle
one, two or three dimensional according to the
goes, the energy goes with it. (One way of transporting
number of dimensions in which they propagate
energy from one place to another place).
energy. Waves moving along strings are one-
There is another way (wave motion) to transport energy
dimensional. Surface waves or ripples on water are
from one part of space to other without any bulk motion
two dimensional, while sound or light waves from a
of material together with it. Sound is transmitted in air in
point source are three dimensional.
this manner.
(iv) Based on the motion of particles of medium:
NOTE:
A wave is a disturbance that propagates in space,
transport energy and momentum from one point to
another without the transport of matter.
Few Examples of waves: The ripples on a pond (water Waves are of two types on the basis of motion of
waves), the sound we hear, visible light, radio and TV particles of the medium.
signals etc.
(i) Longitudinal waves
1.1. Classification of waves
(ii) Transverse waves
In the transverse wave the direction associated with
the disturbance (i.e. motion of particles of the
medium) is at right angle to the direction of
propagation of wave while in the longitudinal wave
the direction of disturbance is along the direction of
(i) Based on medium necessity: A wave may or may propagation.
not require a medium for its propagation. The waves 1.2. Transverse Wave Motion
which do not require medium for their propagation Mechanical transverse waves are produced in such type
are called non-mechanical, e.g. light, heat (infrared), of medium which have shearing property, so they are
radio waves etc. On the other hand the waves which known as shear wave or S-wave
require medium for their propagation are called
mechanical waves. In the propagation of mechanical
waves elasticity and density of the medium play an
important role therefore mechanical waves are also
known as elastic waves.
Example:
Waves in water, sound waves, seismic waves in
earth’s crust. Fig. 13.1
(ii) Based on energy propagation: Waves can be
NOTE:
divided into two parts on the basis of energy
propagation (i) Progressive wave (ii) Stationary Shearing is the property of a body by which it changes
waves. The progressive wave propagates with its shape on application of force.
constant velocity in a medium.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 142
⇒ Mechanical transverse waves are generated only in • In solids, mechanical waves (may be sound) can be
solids and surface of liquid. either transverse or longitudinal depending on the
mode of excitation.
Individual particles of the medium execute SHM about
The speed of the two waves in the same solid are
their mean position in direction perpendicular to the
different. (Longitudinal waves travels faster than
direction of propagation of wave.
transverse waves). e.g., if we struck a rod at an angle
A crest is a portion of the medium, which is raised as shown in fig. (A) the waves in the rod will be
temporarily above the normal position of rest of particles transverse while if the rod is struck at the side as
of the medium, when a transverse wave passes. shown in fig. (B) or is rubbed with a cloth the waves
A trough is a portion of the medium, which is depressed in the rod will be longitudinal. In case of vibrating
temporarily below the normal position of rest of particles tuning fork waves in the prongs are transverse while
of the medium, when a transverse wave passes. in the stem are longitudinal.
1.3. Longitudinal Wave Motion
In this type of waves, oscillatory motion of the medium
particles produces regions of compression
(high pressure) and rarefaction (low pressure) which
propagated in space with time (see figure).
Fig. 13.3
Furthermore in case of seismic waves produced by
Earthquakes both S (shear) and P (pressure) waves are
produced simultaneously which travel through the rock
Fig. 13.2
in the crust at different speeds
NOTE:
vs ≅ 5km / s while v p ≅ 9km / s  S-waves are transverse
The regions of high particle density are called
compressions and regions of low particle density are while P − waves are longitudinal.
called rarefactions. Some waves in nature are neither transverse nor
The propagation of sound waves in air is visualized as longitudinal but a combination of the two. These waves
the propagation of pressure or density fluctuations. The are called ‘ripple’ and waves on the surface of a liquid
pressure fluctuations are of the order of 1Pa, whereas are of this type. In these waves particles of the medium
vibrate up and down and back and forth simultaneously
atmospheric pressure is 105 Pa.
describing ellipses in a vertical plane.
1.4. Mechanical Waves in Different Media
• A mechanical wave will be transverse or
longitudinal depending on the nature of medium and
mode of excitation.
• In strings, mechanical waves are always transverse
when string is under a tension. In the bulk of gases
and liquids mechanical waves are always
Fig. 13.4
longitudinal e.g. sound waves in air or water. This is
because fluids cannot sustain shear.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 143
1.5. Characteristics of Wave Motion • Wave number ( v ) : it is defined as

• In wave motion, the disturbance travels through the 1 k
v= = = number of waves in unit length of the
medium due to repeated periodic oscillations of the λ 2π
particles of the medium about their mean positions. wave pattern.
• The energy is transferred from one place to another • Particle velocity, wave velocity and particle's
without any actual transfer of the particles of the acceleration: In plane progressive harmonic wave
medium. particles of the medium, usually oscillate simple
• Each particle receives disturbance a little later than harmonically about their mean position. Therefore,
its preceding particle i.e., there is a regular phase all the formulae that we studied in SHM apply to the
difference between one particle and the next. particles here also.
• The velocity with which a wave travels is different For example, maximum particle velocity is ± Aω at
from the velocity of the particles with which they mean position and it is zero at extreme positions.
vibrate about their mean positions. Similarly maximum particle acceleration is ±ω 2 A at
• The wave velocity remains constant in a given extreme positions and zero at mean position.
medium while the particle velocity changes However the wave velocity is different from the
continuously during its vibration about the mean particle velocity. This depends on certain
position. It is maximum at mean position and zero at characteristics of the medium. Unlike the particle
extreme position. velocity which oscillates simple harmonically
• For the propagation of a mechanical wave, the (between + Aω and − Aω ) the wave velocity is
medium must possess the properties of inertia, constant for given characteristics of the medium.
elasticity and minimum friction among its particles.
• ( )
Particle velocity v p and acceleration a p in a ( )
2. EQUATION OF PLANE PROGRESSIVE WAVE sinusoidal wave: The acceleration of the particle is
2.1. Important terms connected with wave motion the second partial derivative of y ( x, t ) with respect
• Wavelength ( λ ) [length of one wave]: Distance to t,

∂ 2 y ( x, t )
travelled by the wave during the time interval in ∴ ap = 2 −ω 2 A sin (ωt − kx ) =
= −ω 2 y ( x, t )
which any one particle of the medium completes one ∂t
cycle about its mean position. We may also define i.e., the acceleration of the particle equals −ω 2 times
wavelength as the distance between any two nearest its displacement, which is the same result we
particles of the medium, vibrating in the same phase. obtained for SHM. Thus, aP = −ω 2 (displacement)
• Frequency (n): Number of cycles (number of
2.2. Equation of a Plane Progressive Wave
complete wavelengths) completed by a particle in
unit time. • Particle velocity in wave motion: The individual
• Time period (T): Time taken by wave to travel a particles which make up the medium do not travel
distance equal to one wavelength. through the medium with the waves. They simply
• Amplitude (A): Maximum displacement of oscillate about their equilibrium positions. The
vibrating particle from its equilibrium position. instantaneous velocity of an oscillating particle of
• Angular frequency (ω ) : It is defined as the medium, through which a wave is travelling, is
known as "particle velocity".
2π
ω
= = 2π n
T
• Phase: Phase is a quantity which contains all
information related to any vibrating particle in a
wave. For equation
=y A sin (ωt − kx ) ; (ωt − =
kx ) phase.
• Angular wave number or propagation constant
2π
(k): It is defined as k = Fig. 13.5
λ
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 144
• Wave velocity: The velocity with which the

3. TRANSVERSE WAVES ON A STRING
disturbance, or planes of equal (wave front), travel
through the medium is called wave velocity. A transverse wave is a moving wave whose oscillations
• Relation between particle velocity and wave are perpendicular to the direction of the wave. A simple
=
velocity: Wave equation: y A sin (ωt − kx ) , demonstration of the wave can be created on a horizontal
∂y length of the string by securing one end of the string and
Particle velocity v P = = Aω cos ( ωt − kx ) . moving the other end up and down. Light is another
∂t
example of a transverse wave, where the oscillations are
Wave velocity
electric and magnetic fields that are at right angles to the
λ ω ω ∂y
=
v= λ
= = , = −Ak cos (ω t − kx ) ideal light rays that describe the direction of propagation.
T 2π k ∂x
Transverse waves commonly occur in elastic solids,
1 ∂y ∂y 1 ∂y
=
− ⇒ =
− oscillations, in this case, are the displacement of solid
v ∂t ∂t v ∂t particles from their relaxed position, in the direction
Particle velocity at a given position and time is perpendicular to the propagation of the wave. Since these
equal to negative of the product of wave velocity displacements correspond to local shear deformation of
with slope of the wave at that point at that instant. the material, the transverse waves of this form are known
as a shear wave. In seismology, shear waves are also
2.3. Differential equation of Harmonic Progressive
known as secondary waves or S-waves. For example: -
Waves The ripples on the surface of the water, Electromagnetic
∂2 y waves, Ocean waves, etc.
= − Aω 2 sin (ωt − kx )
∂t 2 The speed of a wave on a string is given by
∂2 y
⇒ 2 = − Ak 2 sin (ωt − kx ) v=
T
∂x µ
∂2 y 1 ∂2 y
⇒ 2 = where T is tension in the string (in Newtons) and µ is
∂x v 2 ∂t 2
2.4. Relation Between phase Difference and Path mass per unit length of the string (kg/m).
Difference It should be noted that v is speed of the wave w.r.t. the
medium (string).
In case the tension is not uniform in the string or string
has nonuniform linear mass density then v is speed at a
given point and T and µ are corresponding values at
that point.
Fig. 13.6
Phase 0 π π 3π 2π 5π 3π
Difference 2 2 2
( ∆φ )
Fig. 13.7
Path 0 λ λ 3λ λ 5λ 3λ The velocity of a wave is calculated by dividing the
Difference 4 2 4 4 2
( ∆λ ) distance traveled by the time it took to travel that
distance. For waves, this is calculated by dividing the
Time 0 T T 3T T 5T 3T
λ
Difference 4 2 4 4 2 wavelength by the period as follows: v =
( ∆t ) T
We can take the inverse proportionality to period and
∆φ ∆λ ∆t  λ 
⇒ = = ⇒ Path difference =   phase
frequency and apply it to this situation as follows:
2π λ T  2π 
λ 1
difference v= ⇒v= λ ⇒v= λf
T T
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 145
4. ENERGY TRANSFER IN A STRING WAVE 5. LONGITUDINAL WAVES
4.1. Rate of Energy, Power and Intensity of wave 5.1. Longitudinal waves and Equation of
t Longitudinal waves
• Energy Transferred = ∫ Pav dt Longitudinal waves are the waves where the
0
displacement of the medium is in the same direction as
Energy transferred in one time period = PavT the direction of the travel of the wave.
This is also equal to the energy stored in one The distance between the centres of two consecutive
wavelength. regions of compression or the rarefaction is defined by
• When a travelling wave is established on a string, wavelength λ . When the compression and rarefaction
energy is transmitted along the direction of regions of two waves coincide with each other, it is
propagation of the wave, in form of potential energy known as constructive interference and if the regions of
and kinetic energy compression and rarefaction do not coincide, it is known
Average Power ( P ) = 2π 2 f 2 A2 µ v as destructive interference.
Where, µ is linear mass density
• Intensity: Energy transferred per second per unit
cross sectional area is called intensity of the wave.
Power P 1
I= = ⇒ I = ρω 2 A2 v
Cross sectional area s 2
This is average intensity of the wave. Fig. 13.8
Energy density: Energy per unit volume of the wave A compression in a longitudinal wave is a region where
the particles are the closest together while rarefaction in
Pdt I
= = a longitudinal wave is a region where the paricle are
svdt v
spread out.
4.2. Relation Between Amplitude and Intensity of
5.2. Sound as a Pressure wave
wave
We can describe sound waves either in terms of excess
For light waves, the energy of the light wave is
pressure or in terms of the longitudinal
proportional to the intensity.
displacement suffered by the particles of the medium
E ∝ I , where E is the energy of the wave and I is the w.r.t. mean position.
intensity. =s s0 sin ω ( t − x / v ) represents a sound wave where,
E ∝ ( Amplitude ) ... (1)
2
s = displacement of medium particle from its mean
Also, the intensity of a wave is power transferred per unit position at x,
area. = s s0 sin (ωt − kx ) ..... ( 3.1)
We know that power is energy expended per unit time. When sound is not propagating particles are at mean
Therefore, position 1 and 2
E
I= , where A is the area of the wave and t is the time.
At
Therefore, we can say that.
I ∝ E ... ( 2 )
From expression (1) and (2) we can say that.
I ∝ ( Amplitude ) or
2
Fig. 13.9
Amplitude ∝ Intensity
When particles are displaced from mean position.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 146
Where Y = Young’s modulus of elasticity and

ρ = density.
Velocity of sound waves in a fluid medium (liquid or
gas) is given by
B
v= ... ( 2 )
Fig. 13.10 ρ
Change in volume = ∆V = ( ∆x + ∆s ) A − ∆xA = ∆sA Where ρ = density of the medium and B = Bulk
modulus of the medium given by,
∆V ∆sA ∆s
= = dP
V ∆xA ∆x B = −V ... ( 3)
dV
B∆V
∆P =− Newton’s formula: Newton assumed propagation of
V sound through a gaseous medium to be an isothermal
B∆s process.
∆P =− PV = constant
∆x
dP − P
Bds ⇒ =
dp = − dV V
dx
and hence B = P using equation (3) and thus he obtained
dp =− B ( − ks0 ) cos (ωt − kx ) for velocity of sound in a gas,
=dp Bks0 cos (ωt − kx ) =v

P
=
RT
where M = molar mass
ρ M
=dp ( dp )max ocs (ωt − kx ) The density of air at 0° at pressure 76 cm of Hg column
 π is ρ = 1.293kg / m3 . This temperature and pressure is
=p p0 sin  ωt − kx +  ..... ( 3.2 )
 2 called standard temperature and pressure at STP. Speed
Where = = variation in pressure at position x and
p dp of sound in air is 280m/s. This value is some what less
than measured speed of sound in air 332m/s ten Laplace
= =
p0 Bks maximum pressure variation
0 suggested the correction.
Equation 3.2 represents that same sound wave where, P Laplace’s Correction: Later Lapalce established that
is excess pressure at position x, over and above the propagation of sound in a gas is not an isothermal but an
average atmospheric pressure and pressure amplitude adiabatic process and hence PV γ = constant
p0 is given by P0 = Bks0 ..... ( 3.3) dP P
⇒ −γ
=
(B = Bulk modulus of the medium, K = angular wave dV V
number) dP
Where, B =
−V γ P and hence speed of sound is a
=
Note from equation (3.1) and (3.2) that the displacement dV
of a medium particle and excess pressure at any position gas,
π γP γ RT
are out of phase by . Hence a displacement maxima =v = ... ( 4 )
2 ρ M
corresponds to a pressure minima and vice-versa. Factors affecting speed of sound in atmosphere.
5.3. Speed of Sound and Laplace’s Correction (a) Effect of temperature: As temperature (T)
increases velocity (v) increases.
Velocity of sound waves in a linear solid medium is
given by v∝ T
For small change in temperature above room
Y
v= ... (1) temperature v increases linearly by 0.6m/s for every
ρ 1°C rise in temperature.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 147
γR p0ω s0 A B
=v × T 1/ 2 = =⇒v
M 2 ρ
∆v 1 ∆T B = ρ v 2 ⇒ p0 = Bks0 = ρ v 2 ks0
=
v 2 T
1  p0  p02 A pAvω 2 s02
1 v  =
Paverage ω p0 A  = 2 
=
=
∆v   ∆T 2  ρ v k  2ρ v 2
2T 
Maximum power
∆=
v ( 0.6 ) ∆T p02 A
= P= = ( pA) v v 2p= pAω 2 s02
ρv
max ,max
(b) Effect of pressure: The speed of sound in a gas is
γP γ RT ρ Avω 2 s02
=
given by v =
ρ M Total energy transfer = Pav × t= ×t
2
(c) Effect of humidity: With increase in humidity
Average intensity = Average power / Area the average
density decreases. This is because the molar mass of
intensity at position x is given by
water vapour is less than the molar mass of air.
So at constant temperature, if P changes then ρ also 1 ω 2 s02 B P02 v
=
<I> = .... (1)
changes in such a way that P / ρ remains constant. 2 v 2B
Hence pressure does not have any effect on velocity Substituting B = ρ v 2 , intensity can also be expressed as
of sound as long as temperature is constant.
P02
I= ρv ..... ( 2 )
6. SOUND INTENSITY AND LOUDNESS 2
NOTE:
Intensity of Sound Waves: Like any other progressive
wave, sound waves also carry energy from one point of 1 1
If the source is a point source then I ∝ and s0 ∝
space to the other. This energy can be used to do work, r2 r
for example, forcing the eardrums to vibrate or in the a
=
and s sin (ωt − kr + θ )
extreme case of a sonic boom created by a supersonic jet, r
can even cause glass panes of windows to crack. The 1
amount of energy carried per unit time by a wave is If a sound source is a line source then l ∝ and
r
called its power and power per unit area held
1 a
perpendicular to the direction of energy flow is called s0 ∝ =
and s sin (ωt − kr + θ )
r r
intensity. For a sound wave travelling along positive x-
axis described by the equation. Loudness: Audible intensity range for humans:
=s s0 sin (ωt − kx + φ ) The ability of human to perceive intensity at different
frequency is different. The perception of intensity is
=P p0 cos (ωt − kx + φ ) maximum at 1000 Hz and perception of intensity
decreases as the frequency decreases or increases from
δs
= ω s0 cos (ωt − kx + φ ) 1000Hz.
δt
For a 1000Hz tone, the smallest sound intensity that a
δs human ear can detect is 10−12 watt. / m 2 . On the other
Instantaneous power =
P F=
.v pA
δt
hand, continuous exposure to intensities above 1W / m 2
=P p0 cos (ωt − kx + φ ) Aω s0 cos (ωt − kx + φ ) can result in permanent hearing loss.
Paverage =
<P> The overall perception of intensity of sound to human ear
is called loudness.
= p0 Aω s0 < cos 2 (ωt − kx + φ ) > Human ear do not perceives loudness on a linear intensity
scale rather it perceives loudness on organismic intensity
scale.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 148
For example: If intensity is increased 10 times human The transmitted wave is never inverted, but propagation
ear does not perceive 10 times increase in loudness. constant k is changed.
It roughly perceived that loudness is doubled where
intensity increased by 10 times. Hence it is prudent to
define a logarithmic scale for intensity.
Decibel Scale: The logarithmic scale which is used for
comparing two sound intensity is called decibel scale.
The intensity level β described in terms of decibels is
 I 
defined as β = 10 log   ( dB )
 I0 
Here I 0 is the threshold intensity of hearing for human
ear
i.e I = 10−12 watt / m 2 .
In terms of decibel threshold of human hearing is 1dB
Fig. 13.11
Note that intensity level β is a dimensionless quantity Amplitude of reflected and transmitted waves:
and is not same as intensity expressed in W / m 2 . v1 and v2 are speeds of the incident wave and reflected
wave in mediums respectively then
7. SUPERPOSITION OF WAVES
v −v 2v2
Ar = 2 1 Ai , At = . Ai
7.1. Superposition of Waves v1 + v2 v1 + v2
Two or more waves can traverse the same medium Ar is positive if v2 > v1 , i.e., wave is reflected from a
without affecting the motion of one another. If several rarer medium.
waves propagate in a medium simultaneously, then the Reflection of Sound Waves: Reflection of sound waves
resultant displacement of any particle of the medium at from a rigid boundary (e.g. closed end of an organ pipe)
any is instant is equal to the vector sum of the is analogous to reflection of a string wave from rigid
displacement produced by individual by wave. The boundary; reflection accompanied by an inversion i.e. an
phenomenon of intermixing of two or more waves to abrupt phase change of π . This is consistent with the
requirement of displacement amplitude to remain zero at
produce a new wave is called Superposition of waves.
the rigid end, since a medium particle at the rigid end can
Therefore, according to superposition principle. not vibrate. As the excess pressure and displacement
The resultant displacement of a particle at any point of corresponding to the same sound wave vary by π / 2 in
the medium, at any instant of time is the vector sum of term of phase, a displacement minimum at the rigid end
the displacement caused to the particle by the individual will be a point of pressure maxima. This implies that the
waves. reflected pressure wave from the rigid boundary will
   have same phase
If y1 , y2 , y3 ..... are the displacement of particle at a as the incident wave, i.e., a compression pulse is reflected
particular time due to individual waves, then the resultant as a compression pulse and a rarefaction pulse is
    reflected as a rarefaction pulse.
displacement is given by y = y1 + y2 + y3 + ....
On the other hand, reflection of sound wave from a low
Principle of superposition holds for all types of waves, pressure region (like open end of an organ pipe) is
i.e., mechanical as well as electromagnetic waves. But analogous to reflection of string wave from a free end.
This point corresponds to a displacement maxima, so that
this principle is not applicable to the waves of very large
the incident & reflected displacement wave at this point
amplitude. must be in phase. This would imply that this point would
7.2. Reflection of Waves be a minima for pressure wave (i.e. pressure at this point
remains at its average value), and hence the reflected
Reflection of String Waves: A travelling wave, at a
rigid or denser boundary, is reflected with a phase pressure wave would be out of phase by π with respect
reversal but the reflection at an open boundary (rarer to the incident wave. i.e. a compression pulse is reflected
medium) takes place without any phase change. as a rarefaction pulse and vice-versa.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 149
7.3. Interference of Waves ⇒ p p0 sin (ωt − kx + θ )

=
Interference of String Waves: Suppose two identical
sources send sinusoidal waves of same angular Where, p0 = pm2 1 + pm2 2 + 2 pm1 pm 2 cos φ ,
frequency ω in positive x-direction. Also, the wave
velocity and hence, the wave number k is same for the φ = k ( x1 − x2 ) + (θ 2 − θ1 ) ... (1)
two waves. One source may be situated at different
points. The two waves arriving at a point then differ in (i) For constructive interference
phase. Let the amplitudes of the two waves be A1 and A2 φ = 2nπ ⇒ p0 = pm1 + pm 2
and the two waves differ in phase by an angle φ . Their
(ii) For destructive interference
equations may be written as
= y1 A1 sin ( kx − ωt ) φ = ( 2n + 1) π ⇒ p0 = pm1 − pm 2
=
And y2 A2 sin ( kx − ωt + φ )
2π
According to the principle of superposition, the resultant φ
If φ is only due to path difference, then = ∆x, and
λ
wave is represented by
condition for constructive interference:
y = y1 + y2 = A1 sin ( kx − ωt ) + A2 sin ( kx − ωt + φ )
∆x = nλ , n = 0, ±1, ±2
=
We get y A sin ( kx − ωt + α )
Condition for destructive interference:
Where, A = A12 + A22 + 2 A1 A2 cos φ (A is amplitude of
λ
the resultant wave) ∆x = ( 2n + 1) , n = 0, ±1, ±2
A2 sin φ 2
Also, tan α = ( α is phase difference of the
A1 + A2 cos φ From equation (1)
resultant wave with the first wave)
Constructive and Destructive interference P02 = Pm21 + Pm22 + 2 Pm1 + Pm 2 cos φ
Constructive Interference: Since intensity, I ∝ (Pressure amplitude)2,
= A1 + A2
When resultant amplitude A is maximum A We have, for resultant intensity,
When cos φ =
+1 or φ =
2nπ I = I1 + I 2 + 2 I1 I 2 cos φ ..... ( 2 )
Where n is an integer. I= I= I0
1 2
Destructive Interference:
φ
When resultant amplitude A is minimum I 2 I 0 (1 + cos φ ) ⇒=
= I 4 I 0 cos 2 ...... ( 3)
2
Or =
A A1 − A2
Hence in this case,
When cos φ = ( 2n + 1) π
−1 or φ = For constructive interference: φ = 0, 2π , 4π and
When n is an integer. I max = 4 I 0

Interference of Sound Waves: And for destructive interference: φ = π ,3π .... and
If p1 pm1 sin (ωt − kx1 + θ1 )
= I min = 0
=
and p2 pm 2 sin (ωt − kx2 + θ 2 ) Coherence: Two sources are said to be coherent if the
phase difference between them does not change with
time. In this case their resultant intensity at any point in
space remains constant with time.
Two independent sources of sound are generally
incoherent in nature, i.e. phase difference between them
changes with time and hence the resultant intensity due
to them at any point in space changes with time.
Fig. 13.12
Resultant excess pressure at point O is
=
p p1 + p2
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 150
8. STANDING WAVES Furthermore, nodes and antinodes are alternate

λ
Suppose two sine waves of equal amplitude and with spacing   .
4
frequency propagate on a long string in opposite
directions. The equations of the two waves are given by 5. The nodes divide the medium into segments (or
loops). All the particles in a segment vibrate in same
=y1 A sin (ωt − kx ) and=
y2 A sin (ωt + kx + φ )
phase, but in opposite phase with the particles in the
These waves interfere to produce what we call standing adjacent segment. Twice in one period all the
waves. To understand these waves, let us discuss the
particles pass through their mean position
special case when φ = 0 .
simultaneously with maximum velocity ( Asω ) , the
The resultant displacements of the particles of the string
direction of motion being reversed after each half
are given by the principle of superposition as
cycle.
y= y1 + y2
= A sin (ωt − kx ) + sin (ωt +=

kx )  2 A sin ωt cos kx
or y = ( 2 A cos kx ) sin ωt.
This is the required result and from this it is clear that:

1. As the equation satisfies the wave equation,
∂2 y 1 ∂2 y
=
∂x v 2 ∂t 2
2
it represents a wave. However, as it is not of the form

f ( ax ± bt ) , the wave is not travelling and so is
called standing or stationary wave.
2. The amplitude of the wave
As = 2 A cos kx Fig. 13.13
6. Standing waves can be transverse or longitudinal,
Is not constant but varies periodically with position
e.g., in strings (under tension) if reflected wave
(and not with time as om beats).
exists, the waves are transverse-stationary, while in
3. The points for which amplitude is minimum are organ pipes waves are longitudinal-stationary.
called nodes and for these 7. As in stationary waves nodes are permanently at rest,
π 3π 5π so no energy can be transmitted across them, i.e.,
=
cos kx 0,=
i.e., kx , ,
2 2 2 energy of one region (segment) is confined in that
region. However, this energy oscillates between
λ 3λ 5λ  2π 
=i.e., x =, , ,.......  as k elastic potential energy and kinetic energy of the
4 4 4  λ  particles of the medium. When all the particles are
i.e., in a stationary wave, nodes are equally spaced. at their extreme positions KE is minimum while
4. The points for which amplitude is maximum are elastic PE is maximum (as shown in figure A), and
called antinodes and for these, when all the particles simultaneously) pass through
their mean position KE will be maximum while
cos kx = 0, π , 2π ,3π ,....
±1, i.e., kx = elastic PE minimum (Figure B). The total energy
λ 2λ 3λ  2π  confined in a segment (elastic PE + KE), always
=i.e., x 0,= , , ,......  as k
2 2 2  λ  remains the same.
i.e., like nodes, antinodes are also equally spaced
λ
with spacing   and Amax = ±2 A
2
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 151
 φ
or  kx + = nπ , = n 0,1, 2,... ( 4 )
 2
Note that a pressure node in a standing wave would
correspond to a displacement antinode, and a pressure
anti-node would correspond to a displacement node.
(when we label equation (1) as SHM, what we mean is
that excess pressure at any point varies simple-
harmonically. If the sound waves were represented in
terms of displacement waves, then the equation of
standing wave corresponding to (1) would be
 φ  φ
= s s0′ cos  ωt +  =
where s0′ 2 s0 sin  kx + 
 2  2
Fig. 13.14 This can be easily observed to be an equation of SHM. It
Longitudinal Standing Waves: Two longitudinal represents the medium particles moving simple
waves of same frequency and amplitude travelling in
opposite directions interfere to produce harmonically about their mean position at x.
a standing wave. Vibration Of Air Columns: Standing waves can be set
up in air-columns trapped inside cylindrical tubes if
If the two interfering waves are given by
frequency of the tuning fork sounding the air column
=p1 p0 sin (ωt − kx ) matches one of the natural frequency of air columns. In
such a case the sound of the tuning fork becomes
=
And p2 p0 sin (ωt + kx + φ ) markedly louder, and we say there is resonance between
the tuning fork and air-column. To determine the natural
Then the equation, of the resultant standing wave would frequency of the air-column, notice that there is a
be given by displacement node (pressure antinode) at each closed end
of the tube as air molecules there are not free to move,
 φ  φ
p = p1 + p2 = 2 p0 cos  kx +  sin  ωt +  and a displacement antinode (pressure-node) at each
 2  2 open end of the air-column.
In reality antinodes do not occurs exactly at the open end
 φ
⇒ p p0 sin  ωt +  ... (1)
= but a little distance outside. However if diameter
 2
of tube is small compared to its length, this end
The equation of SHM in which the amplitude p0 correction can be neglected
depends on position as Closed organ pipe: (in the diagram, Ap = pressure
 φ antinode, As = displacement antinode, N p = pressure
= p0′ 2 p0 cos  kx +  ... ( 2 )
 2
node, N s = displacement node).
Points where pressure remains permanently at its average
value; i.e. pressure amplitude is zero is called a pressure
node, and the condition for a pressure node would be
given by
p0′ = 0
 φ
i.e., cos  kx +  =
0
 2
φ π
i.e., kx + = 2nπ ± , n= 0,1, 2... ( 3)
2 2
Similarly points where pressure amplitude is maximum
is called a pressure antinode and condition for a pressure Fig. 13.15
antinode would be given by
p0′ = ±2 p0
 φ
i.e., cos  kx +  =
±1
 2
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 152
Fundamental mode: The smallest frequency (largest Fundamental mode: The smallest frequency (largest
wavelength) that satisfies the boundary condition for wavelength) that satisfies the boundary condition for
resonance (i.e. displacement node at left end and resonance (i.e. displacement antinodes at both ends) is,
antinode at right end is λ0 = 4l , , where l = length of λ0 = 2l
closed pipe the corresponding frequency.
v v Corresponding frequency, is called the fundamental
v= = is called the fundamental frequency ... (1) frequency
λ 4L
0
v
v0 = ... ( 3)
2l
Fig. 13.16
First Overtone: Here there is one node and one antinode
apart from the nodes and antinodes at the ends. Fig. 13.18
4l λ0 1st Overtone: Here there is one displacement antinode
λ=
1 =
3 3 between the two antinodes at the ends.
And corresponding frequency, 2l λ
λ1 = ⇒ λ1 = 0 and corresponding frequency
v 2 2
v= = 3v0
λ1
1
v
v= = 2v0
λ1
1
This frequency is 3 times the fundamental frequency and
hence is called the 3rd harmonic. This frequency is 2 times the fundamental frequency and
nth overtone: In general, the nth overtone will have n is called the 2nd harmonic.
nodes and n antinodes between the two ends.
The corresponding wavelength is nth overtone: The nth overtone has n displacement
4l λ0 antinodes between the two antinode at the ends.
λn =
= and = nn ( 2n + 1) v0 ... ( 2 )
2n + 1 2n + 1 2l λ0
λn
= = and v= ( n + 1) v0 ... ( 4 )
n +1 n +1 n
This corresponds to the ( 2n + 1) harmonic. Clearly only

th
This correspond to ( n + 1) harmonic: clearly both even

th
odd harmonics are allowed in a closed pipe.

and odd harmonics are allowed in an open pipe.
9.2 Open organ pipe : End correction: As mentioned earlier the displacement
antinode at an open end of an organ pipe lies slightly
outside the open end. The distance of the antinode from
the open end is called end correction and its value is
given by e = 0.6r
Fig. 13.19
Fig. 13.17
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 153
where r = radius of the organ pipe. with end correction, (c) Law of Mass: The fundamental frequency of a
the fundamental frequency of a closed pipe ( f c ) and an string is inversely proportional to the square root of
open organ pipe ( f0 ) will be given by the linear mass density, i.e., mass per unit length,
provided the length and the tension remain the same.
v v
fc = and f 0 = ... ( 5 )
4 ( l + 0.6r ) 2 ( l + 1.2r )
1
v∝ if L and F are constants.
µ
9. EXPERIMENTAL STUDY OF STANDING 9.2. Resonance Tube
WAVES Figure shows schematically the diagram of a simple
apparatus used in laboratories to measure the speed of
9.1. Sonometer sound in air. Along cylindrical glass tube (say about 1 in)
• If a vibrating Tuning fork is pressed against a is fixed on a vertical wooden frame. It is also called a
sonometer wire then forced vibrations are produced resonance tube. A rubber tube connects the lower end of
in table of hollow box & these vibrations are this glass tube to a vessel which can slide vertically on
transferred to air column filled in hollow box the same wooden frame. A meter scale is fitted parallel
which results into increase in vibration amplitude to and close to the glass tube.
of sound & intensity of sound increases. Air filled
hollow box is called sound box.
• During contact with table some energy is
transferred to table so TF cannot do vibrations for
longer duration
• At resonance maximum energy is transferred to
table so TF can do vibrations not for longer
duration.
• At resonance maximum energy is transferred from
TF to vibrating wire and sound intensity is Fig 13.20
maximum. The vessel contains water which also goes in the
Laws of Transverse Vibrations of a String: resonance tube through the rubber tube. The level of
Sonometer water in the resonance tube is same as that in the vessel.
The fundamental frequency of vibration of a string fixed Thus, by sliding the vessel up and down, one can change
at both ends is given by equation. From this equation, one the water level in the resonance tube.
can immediately write the following statements known A tuning fork (frequency 256 Hz if the tube is 1 in long)
as "Laws of transverse vibrations of a string". is vibrated by hitting it on a rubber pad and is held near
(a) Law of Length: The fundamental frequency of the open end of the tube in such a way that the prongs
vibration of a string (fixed at both ends) is inversely vibrate parallel to the length of the tube. Longitudinal
proportional to the length of the string provided its waves are then sent in the tube.
tension and its mass per unit length remain the same. The water level in the tube is initially kept high. The
tuning fork is vibrated and kept dose to the open end, and
1
v∝ If F and µ are constants. the loudness of sound coming from the tube is estimated.
L
The vessel is brought down a little to decrease the water
(b) Law of Tension: The fundamental frequency of a level in the resonance tube. The tuning fork is again
string is proportional to the square root of its tension vibrated, kept close to the open end and the loudness of
provided its length and the mass per unit length the sound coming from the tube is estimated. The process
remain the same. is repeated until the water level corresponding to the
v ∝ F if L and µ are constants. maximum loudness is located. Fine adjustments of water
level are made to locate accurately the level
corresponding to the maximum loudness.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 154
The length of the air column is read on the scale attached.

10. BEATS
In this case, the air column vibrates in resonance with the
tuning fork. The minimum length of the air column for When two sound waves of same amplitude and different
which the resonance takes place corresponds to the frequency superimpose, then intensity at any point in
fundamental mode of vibration. A pressure antinode is space varies periodically with time. This effect is called
formed at the water surface (which is the closed end of beats.
the air column) and a pressure node is formed near the If the equation of the two interfering sound waves
open end. In fact, the node is formed slightly above the emitted by s1 and s2 at point O are,
open end (end correction) because of the air-pressure
=p1 p0 sin ( 2π f1t − k1 x1 + θ1 )
from outside. Thus, for the first resonance the length l1
of the air column in the resonance tube is given by =p2 p0 sin ( 2π f 2 t − k2 x2 + θ 2 )
λ
l1 + e = ,... ( i ) φ1 and −k2 x2 + θ 2 =
Let −k1 x1 + θ1 = φ2
4
By principle of superposition
Where d is the end correction.
 φ +φ   φ1 − φ2 
= 2 p0 sin  π ( f1 + f 2 ) t + 1 2  cos  π ( f1 − f 2 ) t + 2 
 2   
Fig. 13.22
i.e., the resultant sound at point O has frequency
Fig 13.21
 f1 + f 2 
The length of the air column is increase to a little less  2  while pressure amplitude p0′ ( t ) varies with
 
than three times of l. The water level is adjusted so that
 φ −φ 
the loudness of the sound coming from the tube becomes p0′ ( t ) 2 p0 cos π ( f1 − f 2 ) t + 1 2 
time as=
maximum again. The length of the air column is noted  2 
on the scale. In this second resonance the air column Hence pressure amplitude at point O varies with time
vibrates in the first overtone. There is one node and one
 f − f2 
antinode in between the ends of the column. The length with a frequency of  1 
 2 
l2 of the column is given by
Hence sound intensity will vary with a frequency f1 − f 2
3λ ( fB )
l2 + e = ... ( ii ) This frequency is called beat frequency and the
4 time interval between two successive intensity maxima
By (i) and (ii), (or minima) is called beat time period (TB )
λ
( l2 − l1 ) =, or=
λ 2 ( l2 − l1 ) . f B= f1 − f 2
2
1
TB = ... (1)
f1 − f 2
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 155
Suppose the source S and observer O are separated by

Important Points: distance v. Where v is the velocity of sound. Let n be the
(i) The frequency f1 − f 2 should be less than 16Hz , frequency of sound emitted by the source. Then n waves
for it to be audible. will be emitted by the source in one second. These n
(ii) Beat phenomenon can be used for determining an waves will be accommodated in distance v.
unknown frequency by sounding it together with a
total distance v
source of known frequency. So, wavelength λ =
=
(iii) If the arm of a tuning fork is waxed or loaded, then total number of waves n
its frequency decreases. (1) Source moving towards stationary observer:
(iv) If arm of tuning fork is filed, then its frequency Let the source start moving towards the observer
increases.
with velocity vs , after one second, the n waves will
11. DOPPLER’S EFFECT be crowded in distance ( v − vs ) . Now the observer
The apparent change in frequency or pitch due to shall feel that he is listening to sound of wave length
relative motion of source and observer along the line of λ and frequency n′
sight is called Doppler Effect. While deriving these
expressions, we make the following assumptions:
(i) The velocity of the source, the observer and the
medium are along the line joining the positions of
the source and the observer.
(ii) The velocity of the source and the observer is less
than velocity of sound. Fig. 13.24
Now apparent wavelength
Doppler effect takes place both in sound and light. In
total distance v − vs
sound it depends on whether the source or observer = or λ′ =
both are in motion while in light it depends on whether total number of waves n
the distance between source and observer is increasing And changed frequency,
or decreasing. v v  v 
n=′ = = n 
Notations: λ ′  v − vs   v − vs 
 n 
n → Actual frequency  
So, as the source of sound approaches the observer
n′ → observed frequency (apparent frequency)
the apparent frequency n′ becomes greater than be
λ → actual wavelength true frequency n,
λ ′ → observed (apparent) wavelength (2) When source move away from stationary observer:
For this situation n waves will be crowded in
v → velocity of sound distance v + vs .
vs → velocity of source
vo → velocity of observer
vw → wind velocity
Case I:
Fig. 13.25
Source in motion, observer at rest, medium at rest:
v + vs
So, apparent wavelength λ ′ =
n
And apparent frequency
v v  v 
n=′ = = n 
λ′  v + vs   v + vs 
 n 
 
Fig. 13.23 So, n′ becomes less thatn n.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 156
Case II: Apparent frequency ( n′ ) = Actual waves (n) −

Observer in motion, source at rest, medium at rest: reduction in number of waves ( ∆n )
Let the source (S) and observer (O) are in rest at their
v v v − vo  v − vo   v
respective places. Then n waves given by source ‘S’ n′ = − o = = n  λ = 
would be crossing observer ‘ O’ in one second and fill λ λ λ  v   n
the space OA ( = v ) (so n′ < n )
Case III:
Effect of motion of medium: General formula for a
 v ± v0 
Doppler effect= n=′ n   ... ( i )
 v  vs 
Fig. 13.26 If medium (air) is also moving with vm velocity in
1. Observer move towards stationary source: direction of source and observer. Then velocity of sound
relative to observer will be v ± vm (-ve sign, if vm is
opposite to sound velocity). So,
 v ± vm ± vo 
n′ = n  
 v ± vm  vs 
Fig. 13.27 [on replacing v by v ± vm is equal (i)]
When observer ‘O’ moves towards ‘S’ with velocity NOTE:
vo , it will cover v0 distance in one second. So, the When both ‘S’ and ‘O’ are in rest (i.e. v= v= 0 ) then
s o
observer has received not only the n waves occupying there is no effect on frequency due to motion of air.
OA but also received additional number of ∆n waves
occupying the distance OO ′ ( = vo ) . Case I:
If medium moves in a direction opposite to the direction
So, total waves received by observer in one second
 v − vm ± vo 
i.e., apparent frequency ( n′ ) = Actual waves (n) + of propagation of sound, then n′ =  n
 v − vm ± vs 
Additional waves ( ∆n )
Case II:
v v v + vo  v + vo   v Source in motion towards the observer. Both medium
n′ = + o = =n    λ = n 
λ λ (v / n)  v    and observer are at rest.
(so, n′ > n )  v 
n′ =   n; clearly n′ > n
2. Observer move away from stationary source:-  v − vs 
For this situation n waves will be crowded in distance So, when a source of sound approaches a stationary
v − vo . observer, the apparent frequency is more than the actual
frequency.
Case III:
Source in motion away from the observer. Both medium
and observer are at rest.
Fig. 13.28  v 
n′ =   n; clearly n′ < n
When observer move away from source with v0  v + vs 
velocity then he will get ∆n waves less than real So, when a source of sound moves away from a
number of waves. So, total number of waves received stationary observer, the apparent frequency is less than
by observer i.e., actual frequency.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 157
Case IV:
Observer in motion towards the source. Both medium
and source are at rest.
 v + vo 
 v 
So, when observer is in motion towards the source, the
apparent frequency is more than the actual frequency.
Case V:
Observer in motion away from the source. Both medium
and source are at rest.
 v − v0 
n′ =   n; clearly n′ < n
 v 
So, when observer is in motion away from the source, the
apparent frequency is less than the actual frequency.
Case VI:
Both source and observer are moving away from each
other. Medium at rest.
 v − v0 
 v + vs 
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 158
SUMMARY
1. A wave is a disturbance that propagates in space, ∂2 y

− Aω 2 sin (ωt − kx )
=
transport energy and momentum from one point to ∂t 2
another without the transport of matter.
∂2 y
2. Mechanical transverse waves are produced in such ⇒ − Ak 2 sin (ωt − kx )
=
∂x 2
type of medium which have shearing property, so they
∂2 y 1 ∂y
are known as shear wave or S-wave ⇒ 2 =
∂x V 2 ∂t
3. A crest is a portion of the medium, which is raised
temporarily above the normal position of rest of 12. Wave velocity: The velocity with which the
particles of the medium, when a transverse wave disturbance, or planes of equal (wave front), travel
passes. through the medium is called wave (or phase) velocity
4. A trough is a portion of the medium, which is 13. Transverse wave: A transverse wave is a moving
depressed temporarily below the normal position of wave whose oscillations are perpendicular to the
rest of particles of the medium, when a transverse direction of the wave
wave passes. • The speed of a wave on a string is given by
T
5. Longitudinal Wave Motion: Longitudinal wave v=
µ
have oscillatory motion of the medium particles
where T is tension in the string (in Newtons) and
produces regions of compression (high pressure) and
µ is mass per unit length of the string (kg/m).
rarefaction (low pressure) which propagated in space
with time (see figure). 14. When a travelling wave s established on a string,
6. The regions of high particle density are called energy is transmitted along the direction of
compressions and regions of low particle density are propagation of the wave, in form of potential energy
called rarefactions. and kinetic energy
15. Intensity of Sound Waves: The amount of energy
7. Wavelength (λ ) [length of one wave]: Distance carried per unit time by a wave is called its power and
travelled by the wave during the time interval in which power per unit area held perpendicular to the direction
any one particle of the medium completes one cycle of energy flow is called intensity.
about its mean position. We may also define 16. Loudness: Audible intensity range for humans:
wavelength as the distance between any two nearest The ability of human to perceive intensity at different
particle of the medium, vibrating in the same phase frequency is different. The perception of intensity is
9. Phase: Phase is a quantity which contains all maximum at 1000 Hz and perception of intensity
information related to any vibrating particle in a wave. decreases as the frequency decreases or increases from
For equation= y A sin (ωt − kx ) ; (ωt − =
kx ) phase. 1000 Hz.
17. Decibel Scale: The logarithmic scale which is used
10. Wave number ( v ) : it is defined as for comparing two sound intensity is called decibel
scale. The intensity level β described in terms of
1 k
v= = = number of waves in unit length of the
λ 2π  I 
decibels is defined as β = 10 log   ( dB )
wave pattern.  I0 
11. Differential equation of Harmonic Progressive 18. Superposition of Waves: The phenomenon of
Waves: intermixing of two or more waves to produce a new
wave is called Superposition of waves. Therefore,
Differential equation of Harmonic Progressive Waves
according to superposition principle.
is given by:
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 159
19. The resultant displacement of a particle at any point 22. Beats: When two sound waves of same amplitude and
of the medium, at any instant of time is the vector different frequency superimpose, then intensity at any
sum of the displacement caused to the particle by the point in space varies periodically with time. This effect
is called beats.
individual waves.
• The frequency f1 − f 2 should be less than
20. Coherence: Two sources are said to be coherent if the 16 Hz , for it to be audible.
phase difference between them does not change with • Beat phenomenon can be used for determining an
time. In this case their resultant intensity at any point unknown frequency by sounding it together with
in space remains constant with time. Two independent a source of known frequency.
sources of sound are generally incoherent in nature, 23. Doppler’s Effect: The apparent change in
i.e. phase difference between them changes with time
frequency or pitch due to relative motion of source
and hence the resultant intensity due to them at any
point in space changes with time. and observer along the line of sight is called
Doppler Effect.
21. Standing Wave: Standing waves can be transverse
or longitudinal, e.g., in strings (under tension) if 24. Assumptions:
reflected wave exists, the waves are transverse- (i) The velocity of the source, the observer and the
stationary, while in organ pipes waves are medium are along the line joining the positions
longitudinal-stationary. of the source and the observer.
(ii) The velocity of the source and the observer is
less than velocity of sound.
SCAN CODE
WAVES 160
Solved Examples
Example - 1 (a) The reflected sound is travelling in air.

An observer standing at the seacoast observes 54 Therefore if λa is the wavelength of the reflected
waves reaching the coast per minute. If the wavelength
of the wave is 10 m, find the speed. What types of v a 340 m / s
wave, λ a = =
–4
= 3.4 × 10 m
waves did he observe? Explain f 106 s −1
Sol. Since 54 waves reach the coast in 1 min (i.e., 60 s),
(b) Further, the transmitted wave is travelling through
54 water and as such wavelength of the transmitted
Frequency of the waves, i.e., f = = 0.9 Hz
60 v 1486 m / s
wave, i.e., λ w = w =
–3
= 1.49 × 10 m
As λ = 10 m, speed of the waves f 106 s −1
2
v = fλ = (0.9 × 10) m/s = 9 m/s
The waves are transverse. Strictly speaking, these Example - 4
waves are ripples, which are neither entirely transverse A travelling harmonic wave on a string is described by
nor longitudinal. This is due to the reason that the y = 7.5 sin (0.0050 x + 12t + π/4)
water particles while moving up and down, also move (a) What are the displacement and velocity of
back and forth horizontally. Thus, water waves are oscillation of a point at x = 1 cm and t = 1 s? Is
wrongly classified as transverse waves. this speed equal to the speed of wave propagation?
Example - 2 (b) Locate the points of the string which have the
same transverse displacements and velocity as the
How far does the sound travel in air when a tuning fork x = 1 cm point at t = 2 s, 5 s, 11 s.
of frequency 560 Hz makes 30 vibrations? Given Sol. We are given that
speed of sound in air = 336 m/s.
y = 7.5 sin (0.0050 x + 12t + π/4)...(i)
Sol. Here, speed of sound in air, (a) At x = 1 cm and t = 1 s, displacement,
v = 336 m/s y = 7.5 sin (0.0050 × 1 + 12 × 1 + π/4)
Frequency of the tuning fork, f = 560 Hz or y = 7.5 sin (12.7904 rad)
Time taken to complete 30 vibrations, 180° 

30 3 or y = 7.5 sin 12.7904 × 
i.e., t = =  π 
560 56 = 7.5 sin 732.83°
Distance travelled by sound, y = 7.5 sin (720° + 12.83°)
 3  = 7.5 sin 12.83°
s = vt = (336 m/s)  s  = 18 m
 56  or y = (7.5 × 0.2215) cm = 1.666 cm
Speed of oscillation at a point,
Example - 3
dy
A bat emits ultrasonic sound of frequency 1000 kHz vp =
dt
in air. If this sound meets a water surface, what is the
or v p = 7.5 × 12 × cos (0.0050 x + 12t + π/4)
wavelength of:
(a) the reflected sound (b) the transmitted sound? = 90 cos (0.0050 x + 12t + π/4)
Speed of sound in air = 340 m/s and in water When x = 1 cm and t = 1 s,
= 1486 m/s. v p = (90 cos 12.83°) cm/s
Sol. We are given that frequency of the ultrasonic sound, = (90 × 0.9751) cm/s = 87.75 cm/s
6
f = 1000 kHz = 10 Hz The general equation of the travelling harmonic
speed of sound in air, va = 340 m/s wave (travelling towards left) is
speed of sound in water, y = A sin [ωt + kx + φ0]...(ii)
vw = 1486 m/s Comparing eqns. (i) and (ii), we get
A = 7.5 cm, ω = 12 rad/s
k = 0.0050 rad/cm
Speed of wave propagation,
WAVES 161
ω 12 rad / s (a) When the string is vibrating in its fundamental

v= = = 2400 cm/s = – 24 m/s
k 0.0050 rad / cm mode,
(Negative sign has been taken as the wave travels L = λ/2
towards left) or λ = 2L = (2 × 0.875) m = 1.75 m
We thus find that vp (particle speed) is not equal If v is the speed of transverse wave on the string,
v = fλ = (45 × 1.75) m/s = 79 m/s
to v (wave-speed).
(b) If T is the tension in the string,
2π 2π 2π
(b) As k = ,=
λ = = 12.6 m T
λ k 0.0050 v= or T = v µ
2
All points located at distances, x = nλ (where

µ
2 –2
n = + 1, +2, + 3, ...) from the point x = 1 cm have or T = (79) (4 × 10 ) = 248 N
the same displacement and velocity.
Example - 7
Example - 5
One end of a long string of linear mass density
–3
A uniform rope of length 12 m and mass 6 kg hangs = 8.0 × 10 kg/m is connected to an electrically driven
vertically from a rigid support. A block of mass 2 kg tuning fork of frequency 256 Hz. The other end passes
is attached to the free end of the rope. A transverse over a pulley and is tied to a pan containing a mass of
pulse of wavelength 0.06 m is produced at the lower 90 kg. The pulley end absorbs all the incoming energy
end of the rope. What is the wavelength of the rope so that reflected waves at this end have negligible
when it reaches the top of the rope? amplitude. At t = 0, the left end (fork end) of the string
Sol. Tension at the lower end, T1 = 2 kg wt x = 0 has zero transverse displacement (y = 0) and is
Tension at the top end, moving along positive y-direction. The amplitude of
T2 = 2 kg wt + 6 kg wt = 8 kg wt the wave is 5.0 cm. Write down the transverse
displacement y as a function of x and t that describes
Speed of the wave at the lower end,
this wave on the string.
v1 = T1 / µ Sol. We are given that,
Speed of the wave at the top end, tension in the string, T = (90 × 9.8) N = 882 N
v2 = T2 / µ mass per unit length of the string,
µ = 8.0 × 10 kg/m
–3
v1 T1 2 1
Thus, = = = amplitude of the wave, A = 5.0 cm = 0.05 m
v2 T2 8 2 Since the wave propagation along the string is a
or v2 = 2v1 or fλ2 = 2 (fλ1) or λ2 = 2λ1 transverse travelling wave, the velocity of the wave is
given by
(as frequency remains the same)
As λ1 = 0.06 m, v=
T
=
882 N 2
= 3.32 × 10 m/s
λ2 = 2 (0.06 m) = 0.12 m µ 8 ×10−3 kg / m
Now, ω = 2πf = (2 × 3.14 × 256) rad/s
Example - 6 3
= 1.61 × 10 rad/s
A wire stretched between two rigid supports vibrates ω ω 1.61×103 rad / s
As v = , k= = = 4.84 rad/m
in its fundamental mode with a frequency of 45 Hz. k v 3.32 ×102 m / s
–2
The mass of the wire is 3.5 × 10 kg and its linear As the wave travels towards the positive direction of
–2
density is 4 × 10 kg/m. What is: X-axis, the equation of the wave is:
(a) speed of a transverse wave on the string and y = A sin (ωt – kx)
(b) the tension in the string? where x, y and A are in metres.
Sol. We are given that 3
Thus, y = 0.05 sin (1.61 × 10 t – 4.84 x)
Frequency of the fundamental mode, f = 45 Hz
Linear density of the wire, µ = 4 × 10 kg/m
–2
–2
Mass of the wire, M = 3.5 × 10 kg
Clearly, length of the wire,
–2 –2
L = M/µ = (3.5 × 10 kg)/ (4 × 10 kg/m) = 0.875 m
WAVES 162
A uniform rope of mass 0.1 kg and length 2.45 m For aluminium, the bulk modulus of elasticity is
10 2 3 3
hangs from a ceiling. 7.5 × 10 N/m and density is 2.70 × 10 kg/m .
(a) Find the speed of transverse wave in the rope at a Deduce the speed of longitudinal waves in aluminium.
point 0.5 m distant from the lower end. Sol. We are given that
(b) Calculate the time taken by a transverse wave to B = 7.5 × 10 N/m , ρ = 2.7 × 10 kg/m
10 2 3 3
travel a full length of the rope.

B 7.5 ×1010 N/m 2
Sol. (a) If L is the length of the rope and m is its mass, Thus,=
v =
ρ 2.70 ×103 kg/m3
then mass per unit length of the rope, i.e.,
3
m = 5.3 × 10 m/s.
µ=
L Example - 11
Tension at a point distant y from the lower end,
The prongs of a tuning fork A, originally in unison
i.e.,
with tuning fork B are filed. Now the tuning forks on
T = weight of the rope of length y = µyg
being sounded together produce 2 beats/s. What is
If v is the speed of the transverse wave set up in
frequency of A after filing, if frequency of B is
the rope,
250 Hz?
µyg
=
v T=
/µ = yg Sol. On filing, the frequency of tuning fork A increases.
µ The new frequency of A after filing
When y = 0.5 m, = (250 + 2) Hz = 252 Hz
v = (0.5 m)(9.8 m / s 2 ) = 2.2 m/s Example - 12
dy dy dy A sitar wire and a tabla when sounded together give
(b) As v = therefore = yg or dt =
dt dt gy four beats/s. What do we conclude from this? As the
Integrating both sides within proper limits, we get tabla membrane is tightened, the beat rate may
t decrease or increase. Explain.
1 L dy 1 L
=∫ dt = ∫ ∫y
−1/2
dy Sol. Let f1 and f2 be the frequencies of the sitar wire and the
0 g 0 y g 0
tabla membrane respectively. Since in this case 4
L
1  y1/2  beats/s are heard,
or t =  
g  (1 / 2)  0 f1 = f2 + 4
On tightening the tabla membrane, its frequency
2 L
= [ L − 0] =
2 increases. Now there are two possibilities:
g g
(i) If f1 < f2, the number of beats increases on tightening
2.45 m the membrane.
As L = 2.45 m, t = 2
9.8 m / s 2 (ii) If f1 > f2, the number of beats decreases on tightening
 1 the membrane.
or t =  2  s = 1 s
 4 Example - 13
A tuning fork of unknown frequency gives 4 beats per
Example - 9
second with another fork of frequency 310Hz. It gives
Calculate the speed of sound in a liquid of density the same number of beats/s when loaded with wax.
3 9 2
8000 kg/m and bulk modulus 2 × 10 N/m . Find the unknown frequency.
Here, ρ = 8000 kg/m and B = 2 × 10 N/m
3 9 2
Sol. Sol. Let us name the tuning fork of unknown frequency as
A and the tuning fork of known frequency i.e., 310 Hz
B 2 ×10 N / m
9 2
Thus,=
v = as B. When A and B are sounded together, 4 beats are
ρ 8000 kg / m3 heard per second.
= 500 m/s Thus, frequency of A, i.e., f is either (310 + 4) Hz
= 314 Hz
or f = (310 – 4) Hz = 306 Hz
WAVES 163
In case, the frequency of A is 306 Hz, on loading it The wave velocity (magnitude) of either wave, i.e.,
with wax, its frequency decreases and may become ω 78.5s −1
v= = = 50 cm/s
305 Hz, 304 Hz, 303 Hz etc. In that case, the number k 1.57 cm −1
of beats given by it per second when sounded with B
(b) For a node, y = 0, i.e., cos kx = 0
will be (310 – 305) = 5, (310 – 304) = 6, (310 – 303)
or kx = (for the smallest positive value of x)
= 7 etc. i.e., the number of beats/s is more than 4. Thus,
π / 2 3.14 / 2
f = 306 Hz is not possible. If f = 314 Hz, on loading A or x== = 1cm
k 1.57 cm −1
with wax, its frequency may decrease to 306 Hz and
then it will give (310 – 306) = 4 beats per sec with B. (c) For an antinode, |cos kx| = 1
Thus, the unknown frequency is 314 Hz. or kx = π (for the smallest positive value of x)
π
Example - 14 or x = = 2 cm
k
Calculate the speed of sound in a gas in which two (d) The amplitude of vibration of the particle at x is
wavelengths 204 cm and 208 cm produce 20 beats in given by |A cos kx|.
6 second. For the given point (x = 2.33 cm),
Sol. Here, wavelength of one wave, λ1 = 204 cm amplitude = A cos kx
Wavelength of the second wave λ2 = 208 cm
–1
= (1.0 mm) cos [(1.57 cm ) (2.33 cm)]
Let speed of sound in the gas = v cm/s = (1.00 mm) cos (3.658 rad) = 0.875 mm
Frequency of one wave = f1 [cos (3.658 rad) = cos (3.658 × 57°)
Frequency of second wave = f2 = cos 209° = cos (180° + 29°)
= – cos 29° = –0.875
Number of beats produced per second,
= 0.875 mm
20
fb =
6 Example - 16
As f1 – f2 = fb, A 3.6 g string of a sonometer is 64 cm long. What
v v 20  v v  should be the tension in the string in order that it may
− =  as=
f1 and=
f2  vibrate in 2 segments with a frequency of 256 Hz?
204 208 6  λ1 λ2 
Sol. Here, l = 64 cm = 0.64 m,
v (208 − 204) 20 µ = 3.6 × 10 kg/64 × 10 m = 5.6 × 10 kg/m,
–3 –2 –3
or =
204 × 208 6 f1 = 256 Hz
 20   204 × 208  Since the string vibrates in 2 segments,
or v =     cm/s
 6  4  f1 = 2f
= 35360 cm/s = 353.6 m/s 1 T
or 256 = 2 ×
Example - 15 2 µ
Two travelling waves of equal amplitudes and equal 1 T

or 256 =
frequencies move in opposite directions along a string. 0.64 (5.6 ×10−3 )
They interfere to produce a standing wave having the 2 –3
or T = (256 × 0.64) (5.6 × 10 ) N = 150 N
equation
y = A cos kx sin ωt Example - 17
where A = 1.0 mm, k = 1.57 cm and ω = 78.5 s
–1 –1
A wire of length 1.5 m is stretched by a force of 44 N.
Find: The diameter of the wire is 2 mm and its density is
(a) the velocity of the component waves 3
1.4 g/cm . Calculate the frequency of the fundamental
(b) the node closest to the origin (in the region x > 0) note emitted by it.
and Sol. With usual notation, we are given that
(c) the antinode closest to the origin (x > 0) and (d) the L = 1.5 m, T = 44 N
amplitude of the particle at x = 2.33 cm. D = 2 mm = 2 × 10 m
–3
Sol. (a) The standing wave is formed by the superposition of

ρ = 1.4 g/cm = 1400 kg/m
3 3
the waves y1 = (A/2) sin (ωt – kx) and

y2 = (A/2) sin (ωt + kx) as y = y1 + y2
WAVES 164
1 T 200 T
We know that f = or =2 1
LD πρ 300 T2
1 44 (as f1 = 200 Hz, f2 = 300 Hz and L2 = 2L1 or L2/L1 = 2)
= Hz
1.5(2 ×10 ) (22 / 7) ×1400
−3
2 T1 4 T T
=
or 2= or 4 1 or 2 = 9
100 3 T2 9 T2 T1
= Hz = 33.3 Hz.
3 Thus, the new tension is 9 times the original tension.
When the wire of a sonometer is 73 cm long, it is in A wire of length 108 cm produces a fundamental note
resonance with a tuning fork. On shortening the wire of frequency 256 Hz, when stretched by a weight of
by 0.5 cm, it makes 3 beats with the same fork. 1 kg. By how much its length should be increased so
Calculate the frequency of the tuning fork. that its pitch is raised by a major tone, if it is now
Sol. We are given that stretched by a weight of 4 kg?
L (original length of the wire) = 73 cm Sol. Case I. Frequency of the fundamental note, f = 256 Hz
L’ (shortened length of the wire) = (73 – 0.5) cm Length of the wire, L = 108 cm
= 72.5 cm Stretching force, T = 1 kg f
Let f be the frequency of the tuning fork. Case II. Frequency of the major tone emitted
This also is the frequency of the wire when its length 9 9
i.e., f’ = f =   256 Hz = 288 Hz
is L as it is then in resonance with the tuning fork. Let 8 8
f’ be the frequency of the wire when its length is L’. Stretching force, T = 4 kg f
Since it then produces 3 beats/s with the tuning fork, f’ Let the length be increased by x.
=f+3 Increased length of the wire, i.e.,
(On shortening the length, the frequency of the wire L’ = L + x = (108 + x) cm
increases)
1 T
According to the law of length, As f = ,
2L µ
vf = f’L’
or f × 73 = (f + 3) (72.5) = 72.5 f + 217.5 1 1kg f
For Case I, 256 =
or 73 f – 72.5 f = 217.5 or 0.5 f = 217.5 2 ×108 µ
f = 435 Hz and for Case II,
Example - 19 1 4 kg f
288 =
A string vibrates with a frequency 200 Hz. Its length 2 × (108 + x) µ
is doubled and its tension is altered until it begins to Dividing, we get
vibrate with frequency 300 Hz. What is the ratio of the 256 108 + x
new tension to the original tension? =
288 108 × 4
Sol. Let f1 and f2 be the frequencies in the two cases and L1,
8 108 + x 108 + x
L2 and T1, T2 be respectively the corresponding lengths =
or = or 972 + 9x = 1728
9 108 × 2 216
of the string and tensions under which it is vibrating.
756
1 T1 or 9x = 1728 – 972 = 756 cm or x = = 84 cm
f1 = , 9
2L1 µ
Thus, the length should be increased by 84 cm.
1 T2
f2 = Example - 21
2L 2 µ `
A pipe of length 2L open at both ends has the same
(For the same string, µ in both the cases remains same)
frequency as another pipe of length L closed at one
f1 L 2 T1
Thus, = end. Prove this. Also state if the sounds will be
f 2 L1 T2 identical for the two pipes.
Sol. Fundamental frequency of open pipe of length 2L,
WAVES 165
v v Let Young’s modulus of the material of the rod = Y

i.e., f = = … (i)
2 × 2L 4L As v = Y/ρ ,
Fundamental frequency of a closed pipe of length L, Y= v × ρ2
v
i.e., f’ = … (ii) 3 2 3 3
= (3.6 × 10 m/s) (8.3 × 10 kg/m ) = 1.1 × 10 N/m .
11 2
4L
From eqns. (i) and (ii), f = f’ Example - 24
The sound (i.e., its quality) which depends upon the
A steel rod 100 cm long is clamped at its middle. The
number of harmonics and their relative intensities will
fundamental frequency of longitudinal vibrations of
not be the same in the two cases. In case of an open
organ pipe, all the harmonics are present whereas in the rod is given to be 2.53 kHz. What is the speed of
the case of a closed organ pipe only odd harmonics are sound in steel?
Sol. Here, length of the steel rod, L = 100 cm = 1 m
present.
fundamental frequency of the longitudinal vibrations,
Example - 22 3
f = 2.53 kHz = 2.53 × 10 Hz
Find the ratio of length of a closed pipe to that of the If λ is the wavelength of the wave generated,
open pipe in order that the second overtone of the λ/2 = L or λ = 2L = 2m
former is in unison with fourth overtone of the latter. Therefore, speed of sound in steel rod, i.e.,
v = fλ = (2.53 × 10 ) (2 m)
3
Sol. Let f and f’ be the fundamental frequencies of the open
3
and the closed pipes respectively of lengths L and L’. = 5.06 × 10 m = 5.06 km/s
v v Alternate solution: For a rod vibrating longitudinally,
Clearly, f = and f’ = ...(i)
2L 4L ' fundamental frequency,
where v is the speed of sound. v
f=
Second overtone of the closed pipe = 5f’ 2L
3 –1
Fourth overtone of the open pipe = 5f or v = 2fL = 2 (2.53 × 10 s ) (1 m)
Since the two notes are to be in unison, 3
or v = 5.06 × 10 m/s = 5.06 km/s
5f’ = 5f or f’ = f
Thus, from eqns. (i) and (ii), Example - 25
v v Two tuning forks with natural frequencies of 340 Hz
=
4L ' 2L each move relative to a stationary observer. One fork
L' 2 1 moves away from the observer while the other moves
or 4L’ = 2L or = = or L’ : L :: 1 : 2 towards him at the same speed. The observer hears
L 4 2
beats of frequency 3 Hz. Find the speed of the tuning
Example - 23 fork. Speed of sound in air = 340 m/s.
3
A brass rod (density 8.3 g/cm ), 3 m long is clamped Sol. Let vs be the speed of source and v be that of the
at the centre, It is excited to give longitudinal sound waves. Let f be the frequency of the tuning fork.
vibrations and the frequency of the fundamental note If f’ is its apparent frequency when it moves towards
is 600 Hz. Calculate the velocity of sound in the rod the stationary observer,
−1
and its Young’s modulus.  v  1  v 
Sol. Here, density of the brass rod, f’ =  =
f f= 1 − s  f
 (v − v S 
) (1 − v S
/ v)  v
ρ = 8.3 g/cm = 8.3 × 10 kg/m
3 3 3
vs
Length of the rod, L = 3 m Applying binomial theorem (as  1 ), we get
Frequency of the note produced, f = 600 Hz v
Let the wavelength of vibration in the rod = λ  v 
f’ = 1 + s  f ...(i)
As the rod is clamped at its centre, the centre is a node  v
and free ends are antinodes. If f’’ is the apparent frequency of the tuning fork when
Thus, λ = 2 L = 6m it moves away from the stationary source,
If speed of sound in brass is v, then −1
 v  1  v 
v = fλ f’’ =  =
f f= 1 + s  f
3
or v = (600 Hz) (6 m) = 3.6 × 10 m/s  v + vs  (1 + vS / v)  v
WAVES 166
vs
Applying binomial theorem (since  1 ), we get
v Example - 27
 v  What is the speed of the observer for whom a note is
f’’= 1 − s  f ...(ii)
 v 10 per cent lower than the emitted frequency?
From eqns. (i) and (ii), Sol. As the apparent frequency (f’) is less than emitted
 v   v  2vs f frequency (f), the observer must move away from the
f’ – f’’ = 1 + s f − 1 − s f = v source.
 v   v 
If v is the speed of sound and v o that of the observer,
(f ' − f '')f 3 × 340 m / s
=
or vs = = 1.5 m/s v − vo
2f 2 × 340 then f’ = f
v
(as f’ – f’’ = 3, v = 340 m/s and f = 340 Hz)
As the apparent frequency is 10% lower than the
Example - 26 emitted frequency,
Consider a source moving towards an observer at the 10 90
f’ = f – f= f = 0.9 f
speed of vs = 0.95v . Deduce the observed frequency 100 100
if the original is 500 Hz. (Think what would happen if  v − vo   v − vo 
or 0.9 f =   f or 0.9 =  
vs > v . Jet planes moving faster than sound are now  v   v 
so common). Here, v is the speed of sound. or 0.9v =
v − v o or v o =
v − 0.9v =
0.1v
Sol. We are given that v = 500 Hz, vs = 0.95v . Thus, speed of the observer is (1/10)th of the speed of
Since the observer is at rest and the source is moving sound.
towards the observer, the apparent frequency,
 v   v  500
f’ =  f =  500 =
 v − vs   v − 0.95 v  0.05
or f’ = 10,000 Hz
If vs > v , ( v − vs ) is negative and as such f’ is
negative which has no meaning. Thus, Doppler
formula is applicable so long as the velocity of the
source does not exceed the velocity of the wave. In
case of jet planes which move with speed greater than
the sound, a shock wave is formed whose wavefront is
a cone with the plane at its apex. The semi-vertical
v
angle of the cone is sin −1
vs
EXERCISE – 1: BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

7. A sinusoidal travelling wave is described by
Introduction and Classification of Waves
y (x, t) = a sin (kx – ωt + φ), where y(x, t) is the
1. The minimum distance between the two points having displacement as a function of position x and time t.
the same phase is: With reference to the above equation, match the items
(a) wavelength of the wave (b) amplitude of the wave in Column-I with terms in Column-II and choose the
(c) wave number (d) frequency of the wave correct option from the codes given below.
2. The distance travelled by the wave pattern in the time Column-I Column-I
required for one full oscillation by any constituent of (A) a denotes 1. Angular frequency of the
the medium is equal to: wave
(a) wavelength of the wave (B) ω denotes 2. Angular wave number
(b) amplitude of the wave (C) k denotes 3. Amplitude of the wave
(c) wave number of the wave (D) φ denotes 4. Initial phase angle at
(d) both (a) and (b) x = 0, t = 0
3. The path difference between the two waves Codes
 2π x  A B C D
= y1 a1 sin  ωt −
λ 
and
 (a) 3 2 4 1
 2π x  (b) 3 2 1 4
y2 a2 cos  ωt −
= + φ  is
 λ  (c) 3 1 2 4
(d) 4 1 2 3
λ λ  π
(a) φ (b) φ +    t x 1 
2π 2π  2 8. =
A wave equation is given by y 4sin π  − +  
  5 9 6 
2π  π 2π
(c) φ −  (d) (φ ) where, x is in cm and t is in seconds. The wavelength
λ  2 λ
of the wave is:
4. Which of the following waves have the maximum
(a) 18 cm (b) 9 cm
wavelength?
(c) 36 cm (d) 6 cm
(a) Infrared rays (b) UV-rays
9. The equation of progressive wave is
(c) Radio waves (d) X-rays
 t x 
5. Which of the following are not the transverse wave? = y 0.2sin 2π  −  , where x and y are in
(a) sound waves in the air (b) visible light waves  0.01 0.3 
(c) X-rays (d) γ - rays metres and t is in seconds. The velocity of
propagation of the wave is:
–1 –1
Equation of a Plane Progressive Wave (a) 30 ms (b) 40 ms
–1 –1
6. The equation which represents a sinusoidal (harmonic) (c) 300 ms (d) 400 ms
wave travelling along the positive direction of the 10. The equation of a wave travelling on a string is
X-axis is: π x
= y 4sin  8t −  if x and y are in centimetres, then
(a) y (x, t) = a sin (kx – ωt + φ) 2 8
(b) y (x, t) = a sin (kx + ωt + φ) velocity of wave is
(c) y (x, t) = a sin (kx + ωt) (a) 64 cm/sec in –ve x-direction
(d) y (x, t) = a sin (ωt + kx) (b) 32 cm/sec in –ve x-direction
(c) 32 cm/sec in +ve x-direction
(d) 64 cm/sec in +ve x-direction
11.
A transverse wave is described by the equation 17. A stationary boat is rocked by waves whose crests are
 x 100 m apart velocity is 25 m/s. The boat bounces up
= y y0 sin 2π  ft − 
 λ  once in every:
The maximum particle velocity is equal to four times (a) 2500 s (b) 75 s
the wave velocity if (c) 4 s (d) 0.25 s
π y0 π y0 18. A transverse wave passes through a string with the
(a) λ = (b) λ =
4 2 equation
(c) λ = π y0 (d) λ = 2π y0 y = 10 sin π (0.02 x - 2.00t)
12. A progressive wave is given by where x is in meter and t in second. The maximum
 t x  velocity of the particle in wave motion is:
= y 3sin 2π  − 
 0.04 0.01  (a)100 m/s (b) 63 m/s
Where x, y are in cm and t in s. The frequency of wave (c)120 m/s (d) 161 m/s
and maximum acceleration will be Energy Transfer in a String Waves &
3 2 3 2
(a) 100 Hz, 4.7 × 10 cm/s (b) 50 Hz, 7.5 × 10 cm/s Longitudinal Waves
4 2 4 2
(c) 25 Hz, 4.7 × 10 cm/s (d) 25 Hz, 7.5 × 10 cm/s
19. Energy is not carried by which of the following
13. Which of the following is not true for the progressive
wave?
 t x 
= wave y 4sin 2π  −  (a) Progressive (b) Electromagnetic
 0.02 100  (c) Transverse (d) Stationary
Where x and y are in cm and t in seconds. 20. A sings with a frequency n and B sings with a
(a) The amplitude is 4 cm 1
(b) The wavelength is 100 cm frequency that of A. If the energy remains the same
8
(c) The frequency is 50 Hz
and the amplitude of A is a then amplitude of B is:
(d) The velocity of propagation is 50 cm/s
(a) 16 a (b) 8 a
Transverse Waves on a String (c) 2 a (d) a
21. When a longitudinal wave propagates through a
14. A string of 5.5 m length has a mass 0.035 kg. If the
medium, the particles of the medium execute simple
tension in the string is 77 N, then the speed of wave on
harmonic oscillations about their mean positions.
the string is:
These oscillations of a particle are characterized by an
(a) 77 m/s (b) 102 m/s
invariant
(c) 110 m/s (d) 164 m/s
(a) Kinetic energy
15. A long string having mass density as 0.01 kg/m is
(b) Potential energy
subjected to a tension of 64 N. The speed of the
(c) Sum of kinetic energy and potential energy
transverse wave on the string is:
(d) Difference between kinetic energy and potential
(a) 100 m/s (b) 120 m/s
energy
(c) 80 m/s (d) 90 m/s
22. When sound propagates through air, the region of high
16. Wave pulse on a string shown in figure is moving to
density of air molecules is called:
the right without changing shape. Consider two
(a) compression (b) rarefaction
particles at positions x1 = 1.5 m and x2 = 2.5 m. Their
(c) denser (d) none of the above
transverse velocities at the moment shown in figure are
23. The speed of a longitudinal wave in air is given by:
along directions
ρ B
(a) v = (b) v =
B ρ
ρ (∆V / V )
(c) v = (d) both (a) and (c)
−∆p
24. The relation for Bulk modulus of a medium is given by
(a) positive y-axis and positive y-axis respectively ∆p ∆V
(a) B = − (b) B = −
(b) negative y-axis and positive y-axis respectively ∆V / V ∆p / p
(c) positive y-axis and negative y-axis respectively
∆p ∆p
(d) negative y-axis and negative y-axis respectively (c) B = (d) B = −
∆V / V V / ∆V
25. Distance between successive compression and 33. A wave frequency 100 Hz is sent along a string
rarefactions is 1 m and velocity of sound is 360 m/s. towards a fixed end. When this wave travels back,
Then the frequency (in Hz) of the sound is after reflection, a node is formed at a distance of
10 cm from the fixed end of the string. The speeds of
Sound Intensity and Loudness
incident (and reflected) waves are:
26. An increase in intensity level of 1 dB implies an (a) 48 m/s (b) 20 m/s
increase in Intensity of (given antilog10 0.1 = 1.2589)
(c) 10 m/s (d) 15 m/s
(a) 1 % (b) 3.01 %
34. When two sound waves with a phased difference of
(c) 26 % (d) 0.1 %
π / 2 , and each having amplitude A and frequency ω ,
27. If separation between screen and source is increased
are superimposed on each other, then the maximum
by 2% what would be the effect on the intensity amplitude and frequency of resultant wave is
(a) Increases by 4% (b) Increases by 2% A ω A
(a) : (b) :ω
(c) Decreases by 2% (d) Decreases by 4% 2 2 2
28. The intensity level of two sounds are 100 dB and ω
50 dB. What is the ratio of their intensities? (c) 2 A : (d) 2A :ω
1 3
2
(a) 10 (b) 10 35. The superposition takes place between two waves of
5 10
(c) 10 (d) 10 frequency f and amplitude a. The total intensity is
29. A source of sound emits 200 π W power which is directly proportional to
uniformly distributed over a sphere of radius 10 m. (a) a (b) 2a
What is the loudness of sound on the surface of the (c) 2a 2 (d) 4a 2
sphere?
36. If two waves of same frequency and same amplitude
(a) 70 dB (b) 74 dB
respectively on superimposition produced a resultant
(c) 80 dB (d) 117 dB
disturbance of the same amplitude, find the phase
30. The loudness and pitch of a sound note depends on difference (in degrees) between the waves:
(a) intensity and frequency
Standing Waves
(b) frequency and number of harmonics
37. A standing wave consisting of 3 nodes and 2 antinodes
(c) intensity and velocity
is formed between the two atoms having a distance of
(d) frequency and velocity 1.21 Å between them. The wavelength of the standing
31. The power of a sound from the speaker of a radio is wave is:
20 mW. By tuning the knob of the volume control, the (a) 1.21 Å (b) 2.42 Å
power of the sound is increased to 400mW. The power (c) 6.05 Å (d) 3.63 Å
increase in decibels as compared to the original power 38. A string is stretched between fixed points separated by
is 75.0 cm. It is observed to have resonant frequencies of
420 Hz and 315 Hz. There are no other resonant
(a)13 dB (b) 10 dB
frequencies between these two. Then the lowest
(c) 20 dB (d) 800 dB resonance frequency for this string is
Superposition of Waves (a) 1.05 Hz (b) 1050 Hz
(c) 10.5 Hz (d) 105 Hz
32. A pulse of a wave train travels along a stretched string
and reaches the fixed end of the string. It will be 39. The fundamental frequency of a closed organ pipe of
reflected back with length 20 cm is equal to the second overtone of an
organ pipe open at both the ends. The length of organ
(a) a phase change of 180° with velocity reversed
pipe open at both the ends is:
(b) the same phase as the incident pulse with no
(a) 100 cm (b) 120 cm
reversal of velocity
(c) 140 cm (d) 80 cm
(c) a phase change of 180° with no reversal of
velocity
(d) the same phase as the incident pulse but with
velocity reversed
40. Standing waves are produced in 10 m long stretched 45. Column-I has figures showing different modes of
string. If the string vibrates in 5 segments and wave oscillation of the system (a string tied at both the ends)
velocity is 20 m/s, then its frequency will be: and Column-II has name of the corresponding modes.
(a) 5 Hz (b) 2 Hz Match the items in Column I with terms in Column II
and choose the correct option from the codes given
(c) 10 Hz (d) 2 Hz
–4
below.
41. A stretched string of length 1m and mass 5 × 10 kg, Column-I Column-II
fixed at both ends, is under a tension of 20 N. If it is A. 1. Fundamental
plucked at points situated at 25 cm from one end, it mode
would vibrate with a frequency:
(a) 400 Hz (b) 200 Hz B. 2. Second
(c) 100 Hz (d) 256 Hz harmonic
42. A standing wave is formed on a string fixed at both the
ends. The individual waves i.e., incident wave and C. 3. Sixth
reflected wave are y= 1
(x, t) a sin(kx − ω t) y1 and harmonic
y=
2
(x, t) a sin(kx − ω t) , respectively. The two waves D. 4. Fifth
have same wavelength ‘ λ ’. harmonic
The position of nodes is given as
Codes
nλ
(a) x = ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ... A B C D
2 (a) 4 2 3 1
(2n + 1)λ (b) 4 3 1 2
(b) x = ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
2 (c) 3 2 1 4
(c) x = nλ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ... (d) 2 3 1 4
(d) x = (2n + 1) λ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ... 46. An open organ pipe of length l vibrates in its
43. A standing wave is formed on a string fixed at both the fundamental mode. The pressure variation is
ends. The individual waves i.e., incident wave and maximum:
(x, t) a sin(kx − ω t) and (a) at the two ends
y=
2
(x, t) a sin(kx + ω t) , respectively. The two waves (b) at the distance l/2 inside the ends
have same wavelength ‘ λ ’. (c) at the distance l/4 inside the ends
The position of anti-nodes is given by the equation,
(d) at the distance l/8 inside the ends
 1λ
(a) =
x  n +  ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ... 47. A pipe closed at one end produces a fundamental note
 2 2 of 412 Hz. It is cut into two equal lengths, the
nλ fundamental notes produced by the two pieces are
(b) x = ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
2 (a) 206 Hz, 412 Hz (b) 206 Hz, 824 Hz
(2n + 1)λ (c) 412 Hz, 824 Hz (d) 824 Hz, 1648 Hz
(c) x = ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ... 48. An open pipe is suddenly closed at one end with the
2
(d) x = (2n + 1)λ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ... result that the frequency of third harmonic of the closed
44. A standing wave is formed on a string fixed at both the pipe is found to be higher by 100 Hz than fundamental
ends. The individual waves i.e., incident wave and frequency of the open pipe. The fundamental
frequency of the open pipe is
(x, t) a sin(kx − ω t) and
(a) 200 Hz (b) 300 Hz
y=
2
(x, t) a sin(kx + ω t) , respectively. The two waves (c) 240 Hz (d) 480 Hz
have same wavelength ‘ λ ’.
The distance between any two consecutive anti-nodes
is
λ
(a) λ (b)
2
3λ
(c) (d) 2λ
2
49. An open pipe is in resonance in 2nd harmonic with 56. A uniform wire of length L, diameter D and density S
frequency f1. Now one end of the tube is closed and is stretched under a tension T. The correct relation
frequency is increased to f2 such that the resonance between its fundamental frequency f, the length L and
again occurs in nth harmonic. Choose the correct the diameter D is:
option. 1 1
3 5 (a) f ∝ (b) f ∝
(a) n = 3, f2 = f1 (b) n = 3, f2 = f1 LD L D
4 4
1 1
5
(c) n = 5, f2 = f1
3
(d) n = 5, f2 = f1 (c) f ∝ 2
(d) f ∝
4 4 D LD 2
50. If the length of a closed organ pipe is 1 m and velocity 57. A wire under tension vibrates with a fundamental
of sound is 330 m/s, then the frequency of 1st overtone frequency of 600 Hz. If the length of the wire is
is: doubled, the radius is halved and the wire is made to
(a) 4 (330/4) Hz (b) 3 (330/4) Hz vibrate under one-ninth the tension. Then, the
(c) 2 (330/4) Hz (d) none of these fundamental frequency will become:
51. An open organ pipe of length l vibrates in its (a) 400 Hz (b) 600 Hz
fundamental mode. The displacement variation is (c) 300 Hz (d) 200 Hz
maximum: 58. Three sound waves of equal amplitudes have
(a) at the two ends frequencies (f – 1), f, (f + 1). They superpose to give
(b) at the distance l/2 inside the ends beats. The number of beats produced per second will
(c) at the distance l/4 inside the ends be
(d) at the distance l/8 inside the ends (a) 4 (b) 3
52. A pipe closed at one end and open at the other end (c) 2 (d) 1
resonates with sound waves of frequencies 135 Hz and 59. Two sound waves with wavelength 5.0 m and 5.5 m
also 165 Hz but not with any wave of frequency respectively, each propagate in a gas with velocity
intermediate between these two. The frequency of the 330 m/s. Number of beats per second produced is:
fundamental note is: (a) 6 (b) 12
(a) 30 Hz (b) 15 Hz (c) 0 (d) 1
(c) 60 Hz (d) 7.5 Hz 60. A tuning fork vibrating with a sonometer having 20 cm
wire produces 5 beats/s. The beat frequency does not
53. If we study the vibration of a pipe open at both ends,
change if the length of the wire is changed to 21 cm.
then, which of the following statement is NOT true?
The frequency of the tuning fork must be:
(a) Open end will be anti-node.
(a) 200 Hz (b) 210 Hz
(b) Odd harmonics of the fundamental frequency will
(c) 205 Hz (d) 215 Hz
be generated.
61. A source of frequency f gives 5 beats/s when sounded
(c) All harmonics of the fundamental frequency will be
with a frequency 200 Hz. The second harmonic of
generated.
source gives 10 beats/s when sounded with a source of
(d) Pressure change will be maximum at both ends.
frequency 420 Hz. The value of f is:
54. A pipe closed at one end and open at the other end
(a) 200 Hz (b) 210 Hz
resonates with sound waves of frequency 135 Hz and
(c) 205 Hz (d) 195 Hz
also 165 Hz but not with any wave of frequency
62. When temperature increase, the frequency of a tuning
intermediate between these two. Then find the
fork
frequency (in Hz) of the first overtone:
(a) increases
Experimental Study of Standing Waves & Beats (b) decreases
55. A cylindrical tube, open at both ends, has a (c) remains same
fundamental frequency, f, in air. The tube is dipped (d) increases of decreases depending on the material
vertically in water so that half of it is in water. The
fundamental frequency of the air-column is now
f
(a) f (b)
2
3f
(c) (d) 2f
4
63. Two wires are fixed on a sonometer. Their tensions are 70. A police car with a siren of frequency 8 kHz is moving
in the ratio 8 : 1, their lengths are in the ratio 36 : 35, with uniform velocity of 36 km/h towards a tall
the diameters are in the ratio 4 :1 and densities are in building which reflects the sound waves. The speed of
the ratio 1 : 2. If the note of the higher pitch has a sound in air is 320 m/s. The frequency of the siren
–1
frequency 360 s , the frequency of beats ( in Hz) heard by the car driver is:
produced is (a) 8.50 kHz (b) 8.25 kHz
(c) 7.75 kHz (d) 7.50 kHz
Doppler's Effect of Sound
71. A whistle producing sound waves of frequencies
64. A vehicle with a horn of frequency n is moving with a 9500 Hz and above is approaching a stationary person
velocity of 30 m/s in a direction perpendicular to the with speed v m/s. The velocity of sound in air is 300
straight line joining the observer and the vehicle. The m/s. If the person can hear frequencies up to a
observer perceives the sound to have a frequency maximum of 10,000 Hz, the maximum value of v up
(n + n1). If velocity of sound in air is 300 m/s, n1 would to which he can hear the whistle is:
be (a) 15 / 2 m/s (b) 15 m/s
(a) n1 = 10 n (b) n1 = 0
(c) 30 m/s (d) 15 2 m/s
(c) n1 = 0.1 n (d) n1 = – 0.1 n
72. A source of sound is travelling towards a stationary
65. Two sources A and B are sounding notes of frequency
observer. The frequency of sound heard by the
680 Hz. A listener moves from A to B with a constant
observer is three times the original frequency. The
velocity u. If speed of sound is 340 ms-1, what should
velocity of sound is v m/s. The speed if source will be
be the value of u so that he hears 10 beats/s?
(a) 2.0 ms-1 (b) 3.0 ms-1 2
(a) v (b) v
(c) 2.5 ms -1
(d) 3.5 ms-1 3
66. When a source is going away from a stationary 3
(c) v (d) 3v
observer with a velocity equal to velocity of sound in 2
air, then the frequency heard by the observer will be 73. A train is moving with a constant speed along a
(a) same (b) double circular track. The engine of the train emits a sound of
(c) half (d) one third frequency f. The frequency heard by the guard at rear
67. A car sounding its horn at 480 Hz moves towards a end of the train is
high wall at a speed of 20 ms-1, the frequency of the (a) less than f
reflected sound heard by the man sitting in the car will (b) equal to f
be nearest to; (speed of sound 330 m/s) (c) is greater than f
(a) 480 Hz (b) 510 Hz (d) may be greater than, less or equal to f depending
(c) 540 Hz (d) 570 Hz on the factors like speed of train, length of train
68. A siren placed at a railway platform is emitting sound and radius of circular track
of frequency 5 k Hz. A passenger sitting in a moving 74. A train approaches a stationary observer, the velocity
train A records a frequency of 5.5 k Hz, while the train 1
approaches the siren. During his return journey in a of train being of the velocity of sound. A sharp
20
different train B, he records a frequency of 6.0 k Hz,
blast is blown with the whistle of the engine at equal
while approaching the same siren. The ratio of the
intervals of a second. The interval between the
velocity of train B to that of train A is successive blasts as heard by the observer is:
(a) 242/252 (b) 2
1 1
(c) 5/6 (d) 11/6 (a) s (b) min
20 20
69. A car is moving towards a high cliff. The driver sounds
a horn of frequency f. The reflected sound heard by the 19 19
(c) s (d) min
driver has a frequency 2 f. If v be the velocity of sound, 20 20
then the velocity of the car, in the same velocity units 75. Two trains, each moving with a velocity of 30 m/s,
would be cross each other. One of the trains gives a whistle
(a) v/4 (b) v/2 whose frequency is 600 Hz. If the speed of sound is
330 m/s, then the apparent frequency (in Hz) for
(c) v/ 2 (d) v/3
passengers sitting in the other train before crossing
would be:
WAVES 173
EXERCISE – 2: PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

1. A train is moving on a straight track with speed 5. Two engines pass each other moving in opposite
20 ms-1. It is blowing its whistle at the frequency of directions with uniform speed of 30 m/s. One of them
1000 Hz. The percentage change in the frequency is blowing a whistle of frequency 540 Hz. Calculate
heard by a person standing near the track as the train the frequency heard by driver of second engine before
passes him is (speed of sound = 320 ms-1) close to: they pass each other. Speed of sound is 330 m/sec:
[2015] [2016]
(a) 18% (b) 24% (a) 450 Hz (b) 540 Hz
(c) 6% (d) 12% (c) 648 Hz (d) 270 Hz
2. A source of sound emits sound waves at frequency f0. 6. A toy-car, blowing its horn, is moving with a steady
It is moving towards an observer with fixed speed speed of 5 m/s, away from a wall. An observer, towards
vs ( vs < v , where v is the speed of sound in air). If the whom the toy car is moving, is able to hear 5 beats per
observer were to move towards the source with speed second. If the velocity of sound in air is 340 m/s, the
v 0 , one of the following two graphs (A and B) will frequency of the horn of the toy car is close to: [2016]
(a) 680 Hz (b) 510 Hz
give the correct variation of the frequency f heard by
(c) 340 Hz (d) 170 Hz
the observer as v 0 is changed.
7. Two wires W1 and W2 have the same radius r and
respective densities r1 and r2 such that r2 = 4 r1. They
are joined together at the point O, as shown in the
figure. The combination is used as a sonometer wire
and kept under tension T. The point O is midway
between the two bridges. When a stationary wave is set
The variation of f with v0 is given correctly by: [2015] up in the composite wire, the joint is found to be a
node. The ratio of the number of antinodes formed in
f0
(a) graph A with slope = W1 to W2 is: [2017]
( v + vs )
f0
(b) graph B with slope =
( vs )
v −
f0
(c) graph A with slope = (a) 1:1 (b) 1:2
( v − vs ) (c) 1:3 (d) 4:1
f0 8. A standing wave is formed by the superposition of two
(d) graph B with slope =
( v + vs ) waves travelling in opposite directions. The transverse
3. A uniform string of length 20 m is suspended from a displacement is given by
rigid support. A short-wave pulse is introduced at its  5π 
y ( x, t ) = 0.5 sin  x  cos (200π t ).
lowest end. It starts moving up the string. The time  4 
taken to reach the support is: (take g = 10 ms-2) What is the speed of the travelling wave moving in the
[2016] positive x direction?
(a) 2s (b) 2 2 s (x and t are in meter and second, respectively.) [2017]
(a) 160 m/s (b) 90 m/s
(c) 2 s (d) 2π 2 s
(c) 180 m/s (d) 120 m/s
4. A pipe open at both ends has a fundamental frequency
9. 5 beats/ second are heard when a tuning fork is
f in air. The pipe is dipped vertically in water so that
sounded with a sonometer wire under tension, when
half of it is in water. The fundamental frequency of the
the length of the sonometer wire is either 0.95 m or
air column is now: [2016]
1 m. The frequency of the fork will be: [2018]
3f (a) 195 Hz (b) 150 Hz
(a) (b) 2f
4 (c) 300 Hz (d) 251 Hz
f
(c) f (d)
2
WAVES 174
10. Two sitar strings, A and B, playing the note ‘Dha’ are 16. The correct figure that shows, schematically, the wave
slightly out of tune and produce beats of frequency pattern produced by superposition of two waves of
5 Hz. The tension of the string B is slightly increased frequencies 9 Hz and 11 Hz is: [2019]
and the beat frequency is found to decrease by 3 Hz. If (a)
the frequency of A is 425 Hz, the original frequency of
B is: [2018]
(a) 430 Hz (b) 420 Hz
(c) 428 Hz (d) 422 Hz
11. The end correction of a resonance column is 1 cm. If
the shortest length resonating with the tuning fork is (b)
10 cm, the next resonating length should be: [2018]
(a) 28 cm (b) 32 cm
(c) 36 cm (d) 40 cm
12. The P = 0.01 sin [1000t – 3x] Nm-2 pressure wave,
corresponds to the sound produced by a vibrating blade
on a day when atmospheric temperature is 0°C. On (c)
some other day when temperature is T, the speed of
sound produced by the same blade and at the same
frequency is found to be 336 ms-1. Approximate value
of T is: [2019]
(a) 4°C (b) 11°C
(c) 12°C (d) 15°C (d)
13. Two cars A and B are moving away from each other in
opposite directions. Both the cars are moving with a
speed of 20 ms −1 with respect to the ground. If an
observer in car A detects a frequency 2000 Hz of the
sound coming from car B, what is the natural 17. A source of sound S is moving with a velocity of
frequency of the sound source in car B? 50 m/s towards a stationary observer. The observer
(Speed of sound in air = 340 ms −1 ) [2019] measures the frequency of the source as 1000 Hz. What
(a) 2250 Hz (b) 2060 Hz will be the apparent frequency of the source when it is
(c) 2300 Hz (d) 2150 Hz moving away from the observer after crossing him?
14. A string 2.0 m long and fixed at its ends is driven by a (Take velocity of sound in air 350 m/s) [2019]
240 Hz vibrator. The string vibrates in its third (a) 750 Hz (b) 857 Hz
harmonic mode. The speed of the wave and its (c) 1143 Hz (d) 807 Hz
fundamental frequency is: [2019] 18. A progressive wave travelling along the positive
(a) 180 m / s,80 Hz (b) 320 m / s,80 Hz x-direction is represented by
y ( x=
, t ) A sin ( kx − ωt + φ ) . Its snapshot at t = 0 is
(c) 320 m / s,120 Hz (d) 180 m / s,120 Hz
15. A stationary source emits sound waves of frequency given in the figure.
500 Hz. Two observers moving along a line passing
through the source detect sound to be of frequencies
480 Hz and 530 Hz. Their respective speeds are,
1
in ms- , (Given speed of sound = 300 m/s) [2019]
(a) 12, 16 (b) 12, 18

(c) 16, 14 (d) 8, 18
For this wave, the initial phase φ is [2019]
π
(a) − (b) π
2
π
(c) 0 (d)
2
WAVES 175
19. A submarine (A) travelling at 18 km/hr is being chased 26. A travelling harmonic wave is represented by the
along the line of its velocity by another submarine (B) equation, where x and y are in meters and t is in
travelling at 27 km/hr. B sends a sonar signal of seconds. Which of the following is a correct statement
500 Hz to detect A and receives a reflected sound of about the wave? [2019]
frequency ν . The value of ν (in Hz) is close to: (a) The wave is propagating along the negative X-axis
(Speed of sound in water = 1500 ms-1). Write the with speed 25 ms-1.
nearest integer as the answer. [2019] (b) The wave is propagating along the positive X-axis
20. A tuning fork of frequency 480Hz is used in an with speed 100 ms-1.
experiment for measuring speed of sound (v) in air by (c) The wave is propagating along the positive X-axis
resonance tube method. Resonance is observed to with speed 25 ms-1.
occur at two successive lengths of the air column, (d) The wave is propagating along the negative X-axis
l1 = 30 cm and l2 = 70 cm. then, v is equal to: [2019] with speed 100 ms-1.
(a) 332 ms-1 (b) 384 ms-1 27. A musician using an open flute of length 50 cm
(c) 338 ms -1
(d) 379 ms-1 produces second harmonic sound waves. A person runs
21. A small speaker delivers 2 W of audio output. At what towards the musician from another end of the hall at a
distance from the speaker will one detect 120 dB speed of 10 km/h. If the wave speed is 330 m/s, the
intensity sound? [Given reference intensity of sound as frequency heard by the running person shall be close
10-12 W/m2] [2019] to: [2019]
(a) 40 cm (b) 20 cm (a) 666 Hz (b) 753 Hz
(c) 10 cm (d) 30 cm (c) 500 Hz (d) 333 Hz
22. A heavy ball of mass M is suspended from the ceiling 28. Two identical strings X and Z made of same material
of a car by a light string of mass m (m << M). When have tension Tx and Ty in them. If their fundamental
the car is at rest, the speed of transverse waves in the frequencies are 450 Hz and 300 Hz, respectively, then
string is 60 ms-1. When the car has acceleration a, the the ratio Tx/Tz is: [2020]
wave-speed increases to 60.5 ms-1. The value of a, in
(a) 2.25 (b) 1.25
terms of gravitational acceleration g, is closest to:
(c) 0.44 (d) 1.5
[2019]
29. A wire of density 9 × 10 kg cm-3 is stretched between
-3
g g two clamps 1 m apart. The resulting strain in the wire
(a) (b)
30 5 is 4.9 × 10-4. The lowest frequency of the transverse
g g vibrations in the wire is (Young’s modulus of wire
(c) (d)
10 20 Y = 9 × 1010 Nm-2), (to the nearest integer),……….
23. A closed organ pipe has a fundamental frequency of [2020]
1.5 kHz. The number of overtones that can be distinctly 30. A uniform thin rope of length 12 m and mass 6 kg
heard by a person with this organ pipe will be: hangs vertically from a rigid support and a block of
(Assume that the highest frequency a person can hear mass 2 kg is attached to its free end. A transverse short-
is 20,000 Hz) [2019] wave train of wavelength 6 cm is produced at the lower
(a) 6 (b) 4 end of the rope. What is the wavelength of the wave
(c) 7 (d) 5 train (in cm) when it reaches the top of the rope?
24. A string of length 1 m and mass 5 g is fixed at both [2020]
ends. The tension in the string is 8.0 N. The string is (a) 12 (b) 3
set into vibration using an external vibrator of (c) 9 (d) 6
frequency 100 Hz. The separation (in cm) between 31. For a transverse wave travelling along a straight line,
successive nodes on the string is: [2019] the distance between two peaks (crests) is 5m, while
25. Equation of travelling wave on a stretched string of the distance between one crest and one trough is 1.5m.
linear density 5 g/m is y = 0.03 sin (450 t – 9x) where The possible wavelengths (in m) of the waves are:
distance and time are measured in SI units. The tension [2020]
in the string (in N) is: [2019] (a) 1, 3, 5,…. (b) 1,2,3,…
1 1 1 1 1 1
(c) , , ,... (d) , , ,...
2 4 6 1 3 5
WAVES 176
32. The driver of a bus approaching a big wall notices that 37. A stationary observer receives sound from two
the frequency of his bus’s horn changes from 420 Hz
to 490 Hz when he hears it after it gets reflected from identical tuning forks, one of which approaches and the
the wall. Find the speed of the bus if speed of the sound other one receded with the same speed (much less than
is 330 ms-1. [2020] the speed of sound). The observer hears 2 beats/sec.
(a) 81 kmh-1 (b) 91 kmh-1 The oscillation frequency of each tuning fork is
(c) 71 kmh-1 (d) 61 kmh-1
33. Assume that the displacement (s) of air is proportional vo = 1400 Hz and the velocity of sound in air is 350
to the pressure difference ( ∆p ) created by a sound m/s. The speed of each tuning fork is close to [2020]
wave. Displacement(s) further depends on the speed of 1
(a) m/s (b) 1 m/s
sound (n), density of air (r) and the frequency (f). If 4
∆p  10 Pa, v  300 m / s, ρ  1 kg/m3 and f =1000 Hz, 1 1
(c) m/s (d) m/s
then s will be of the order of (take the multiplicative 2 8
constant to be 1) [2020] 38. A one meter long (both ends open) organ pipe is kept
(a) 1 mm (b) 10 mm in a gas that has double the density of air at STP.
1 3 Assuming the speed of sound in air at STP is 300 m/s,
(c) mm (d) mm
10 100 the frequency difference between the fundamental and
34. In a resonance tube experiment when the tube is filled second harmonic of this pipe is ……… Hz. [2020]
with water up to a height of 17.0 cm from bottom, it 39. A transverse wave travels on a taut steel wire with a
resonates with a given tuning fork. When the water velocity of V when tension in it is 2.06 × 104. When the
V
level is raised the next resonance with the same tuning tension is changed to T, the velocity changed to .
fork occurs at a height of 24.5 cm. If the velocity of 2
sound in air is 330 m/s, the tuning fork frequency is: The value of T is close to [2020]
[2020] (a) 30.5 × 104 N (b) 2.50 × 104 N
(a) 2200 Hz (b) 550 Hz (c) 10.2 × 102 N (d) 5.15 × 103 N
(c) 3300 Hz (d) 1100 Hz 40. Three harmonic waves of same frequency (v) and
35. A driver in a car, approaching a vertical wall notice that
π π
the frequency of his car horn, has changed from intensity (I0) having initial phase angles 0, , − rad
4 4
440 Hz to 480 Hz, when it gets reflected from the wall.
respectively.
If the speed of sound in air is 345 m/s, then the speed
When they are superimposed, the resultant intensity is
of the car is: [2020]
close to [2020]
(a) 24 km/hr (b) 36 km/hr
(a) 5.8 I0 (b) I0
(c) 54 km/hr (d) 18 km/hr
(c) 3 I0 (d) 0.2 I0
36. An object of mass m is suspended at the end of a
41. For a transverse wave travelling along a straight line,
massless wire of length L and area of cross-section A.
the distance between two peaks (crests) is 5m, while
Young modulus of the material of the wire is Y. If the
the distance between one crest and one trough is 1.5m.
mass is pulled down slightly its frequency of
The possible wavelengths (in m) of the waves are:
oscillation along the vertical direction is: [2020]
[2020]
1 YA 1 mL
(a) f = (b) f = (a) 1, 3, 5,…. (b) 1,2,3,…
2π mL 2π YA 1 1 1 1 1 1
(c) , , ,... (d) , , ,...
1 YL 1 mA 2 4 6 1 3 5
(c) f = (d) f =
2π mA 2π YL 42. Which of the following equations represents a
travelling wave? [2021]
(a) y A sin (15 x − 2t )
= (b) y Ae − x ( vt + θ )
=
2
(c) y Ae x cos (ωt − θ )

= (d) y = A sin x cos ωt
WAVES 177
43. A student is performing the experiment of resonance 47. A signal of 0.1 kW is transmitted in a cable. The
column. The diameter of the column tube is 6 cm. The attenuation of cable is –5 dB per km and cable length
frequency of the tuning fork is 504 Hz. Speed of the is 20 km. The power received at receiver is 10–x W.
sound at the given temperature is 336 m/s. The zero of The value of x is ………
the meter scale coincides with the top end of the P 
resonance column tube. The reading of the water level [Gain in dB = 10log10  0  ] [2021]
 Pi 
in the column when the first resonance occurs is:
[2021] 48. The percentage increase in the speed of transverse
(a) 18.4 cm (b) 13 cm waves produced in a stretched string if the tension is
(c) 14.8 cm (d) 16.6 cm increased by 4%. Will be ……… %. [2021]
44. A tuning fork A of unknown frequency produces 49. The mass per unit length of a uniform wire is
5 beats/s with a fork of known frequency 340 Hz. 0.135 g/cm. A transverse wave of the form
When fork A is filed, the beat frequency decreases to y = –0.21 sin (x + 30t) is produced in it, where x is in
2 beats/s. What is the frequency of fork A? [2021] meter and t is in second. Then, the expected value of
(a) 338 Hz (b) 335 Hz tension in the wire is x × 10–2 N. N. Value of x is
(c) 345 Hz (d) 342 Hz ………
45. A sound wave of frequency 245 Hz travels with the (Round-off to the nearest integer) [2021]
speed of 300m / s along the positive x – axis. Each
50. A closed organ pipe of length L and an open organ pipe
point of the wave moves to and fro through a total
contain gases of densities ρ1 and ρ2 respectively. The
distance of 6 cm. What will be the mathematical
compressibility of gases is equal in both the pipes.
expression of this travelling wave? [2021]
Both the pipes are vibrating in their first overtone with
Y ( x, t ) 0.03 sin 5.1x − ( 0.2 × 103 ) t 
(a) = same frequency. The length of the open pipe is
( )
Y ( x, t ) 0.06 sin 5.1x − 1.5 × 103 t 
(b)= x ρ
L 1 where x is ……… (Round off to the Nearest
3 ρ2
(c)=Y ( x, t ) 0.06 sin 0.8 x − ( 0.5 × 10 ) t 
3
Integer) [2021]
Y ( x, t ) 0.03 sin 5.1x − (1.5 × 10 ) t 
(d) = 3
46. Two cars are approaching each other at an equal speed

of 7.2 km/hr. When they see each other, both blow horn
having frequency of 676 Hz. The beat frequency heard
by each driver will be ……… Hz. [Velocity of sound
in air is 340 m/s.] [2021]
WAVES 178
EXERCISE – 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 6. Transverse waves are produced in a long string by
attaching its free end to a vibrating tuning fork. Figure
1. The amplitude of a wave disturbance propagating
below shows the shape of a part of string. Which pairs
1
along positive x-axis is given by y = at t = 0 and of points are in phase?
1+ x2
1
y= at t = 2 s where x and y are in metres.
1 + ( x −1) 2
The shape of the wave disturbance does not change
with time. The velocity of the wave is
(a) 0.5 m/s (b) 1 m/s
(a) A and D (b) B and E
(c) 2 m/s (d) 4 m/s
(c) C and F (d) A and G
2. The distance between two consecutive crests in a wave
7. When a wave travels in a medium, the particle
train produced in string is 5 cm. If two complete waves
displacements are given by
pass through any point per second, the velocity of the
y (x, t) = 0.03 sin π (2t – 0.01 x) where y and x are in
wave is
(a) 10 cm/s (b) 2.5 cm/s meters and t in seconds.
(c) 5 cm/s (d) 15 cm/s The wave length of the wave is
3. A equation of plane progressive wave (a) 10 m (b) 20 m
(c) 100 m (d) 200 m
y = A sin ( ωt + kx). Its wrong statement is
8. Transverse wave of amplitude 10 cm is generated at
2π one end (x = 0) of a long string by a tuning fork of
(a) is wavelength
k frequency 500 Hz. At a certain instant of time, the
ω displacement of a particle A at x = 100 cm is - 5 cm
(b) is velocity of wave
k and of particle B at x = 200 cm is + 5 cm. What is the
ω wave length of the wave?
(c) is frequency of wave
2π (a) 2 m (b) 3 m
k (c) 4 m (d) 5 m
(d) is maximum velocity of particle 9. A source of sound vibrates according to the equation
πω
4.
An equation of plane progressive wave y = 0.05 cos π t. It sends out waves of velocity 1.5 m/s.
a 2π  x  The wave length of the waves is
=y sin  t −  . If maximum velocity of particle (a) 1.5 m (b) 3.0 m
π 3  b
(c) 4.5 m (d) 6.0 m
and velocity of wave are equal.
10. A progressive wave in a medium is represented by the
a
Now will be  5 
b equation y 0.1sin 10 π t − π x  where y and x are
=
 11 
2 3 in cm and t in seconds. The maximum speed of a
(a) (b)
3 2 particle of the medium due to the wave is
1 (a) 1 cm s
–1
(b) 10 cm s
–1
2 (c) π cms (d) 10 π cms
–1 –1
5. A transverse wave is represented by the equation

5  x
2π 11. The equation of wave=
y sin  t −  where
= y y0 sin (vt − x) for what value of λ , the 2  2
λ
displacement is in cm and time in sec. The phase angle
maximum particle velocity is equal to two times the
between two particles at distance 12 cm is
wave velocity? o
(a) 6 (b) 6 radian
π y0
(a) λ = (b) λ = πy0 (c) 3
o
(d) 3 radian
2
2π y0
(c) λ = 2 πy0 (d) λ =
2
WAVES 179
12. The particle displacement in a travelling harmonic 20. Two periodic waves of amplitudes a and b pass through
wave is given by a region at the same time and in the same direction. If
y (x, t) = 2.0 cos2(10t – 0.008x + 0.35) where x and y a > b, the difference in the maximum and minimum
are in centimetres and t is in seconds. What is the phase possible amplitudes is:
difference between oscillatory motion at two points (a) a + b (b) a – b
separated by a distance of 4 m? (c) 2 a (d) 2 b
(a) 0.2 π (b) 6.4 π 21. The extension in a string, obeying Hooke’s law, is x.
(c) 0.6 π (d) 0.8 π The speed of the wave in the stretched string is v. If the
13. Transverse waves of the same frequency are generated extension in the string is increased to 1.5 x, the speed
in two steel wires A and B. The diameter of A is twice of the wave in the string will be
that of B and the tension in A is half that in B. The ratio (a) 1.22 v (b) 0.61 v
of the velocities of waves in A and B is (c) 1.50 v (d) 0.75 v
22. A uniform rope of mass 0.1 kg and length 2.45 m hangs
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 2
from a ceiling. The time taken by a transverse wave to
(c) 1 : 2 2 (d) 3 : 2 2 2
travel the full length of the rope is (g = 9.8 m/s )
14. The velocity of sound in air is 332 m/s. If the air (a) 1 s (b) 2 s
consists of nitrogen and oxygen in the ratio 4 : 1, the (c) 3 s (d) 4 s
velocity of sound in oxygen is 23.
–8 –2
A sound has an intensity of 2 × 10 Wm . Its intensity
(a) 372 m/s (b) 278 m/s level in decibels is: (log10 2 = 0.3)
(c) 418 m/s (d) 315 m/s
(a) 23 (b) 4.3
15. The speed of sound in oxygen ( O2 ) at a certain
(c) 43 (d) none of these
temperature is 460 ms −1 . The speed of sound in helium 24. Two waves represented by the following equations are
(He) at the same temperature will be (assume both travelling in the same medium
gases to be ideal) y1 = 5 sin 2π (75t – 0.25 x),
–1 –1
(a) 330 ms (b) 460 ms y2 = 10 sin 2π (150 t – 0.50 x)
–1 –1
(c) 500 ms (d) 1420 ms I1
16. The speed of sound in a gas is v and the root mean The intensity ratio of the two waves is:
I2
square speed of gas molecules is vrms. If the ratio of the
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 4
specific heats of the gas γ = 1.5, then the ratio of speed (c) 1 : 8 (d) 1 : 16
of sound to vrms is 25. The intensity level of a sound wave is 4dB. If the
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 2 intensity of the wave is doubled, then the intensity
level of the sound, as expressed in dB, would be:
(c) 1: 3 (d) 1 : 3 (a) 8 (b) 16
17. Under the same conditions of pressure and (c) 7 (d) 14
temperature, the velocity of sound in oxygen and 26. Two sound waves of the same frequency have
hydrogen gases are v0 and vH then: respective amplitudes of 3 units and 1 unit and are
(a) vH = 2v0 (b) vH = 4v0 travelling in opposite directions in the same straight
(c) v0 = 4vH (d) vH = v0 line. At a particular place in that line, the resultant
18. If the temperature of the gaseous medium drops by 1%, wave will vary in loudness. The ratio of maximum
the velocity of sound in that medium: loudness to minimum loudness is:
(a) increase by 5% (b) remains unchanged (a) 9/1 (b) 6/1
(c) decreases by 0.5% (d) decreases by 2% (c) 9/2 (d) 2/1
19. The velocity of sound through a diatomic gaseous 27. A sound absorber attenuates the sound level by 20 dB.
medium of molecular weight M at 0°C: The intensity decreases by a factor of
(a) 100 (b) 1000
R 3R
(a) (b) (c) 10000 (d) 10
M M
382 R 273 R
(c) (d)
M M
WAVES 180
2
28. Two sounds waves have intensities 100W/m and 33. A string fixed at both ends is vibrating in the lowest
2
400W/m respectively. The later sound is mode of vibration for which a point at quarter of its
(a) 6 decibel louder than the other length from one end is a point of maximum
(b) 4 decibel louder than the other displacement. The frequency of vibration in this mode
(c) 0.6 decibel louder than the other is 100 Hz. What will be the frequency emitted when it
(d) data is not sufficient vibrates in the next mode such that this point is again a
29. The power of a sound from the speaker of a radio is point of maximum displacement?
20 mW. By turning the knob of the volume control, the (a) 400 Hz (b) 200 Hz
power of the sound is increased to 400 mW. The power (c) 600 Hz (d) 300 Hz
increase in decibels as compared to the original power 34. A string is stretched between fixed points separated by
is 75 cm. It is observed to have resonant frequencies of
(a) 13.0 dB (b) 10 dB 420 Hz and 315 Hz. There are no other resonant
(c) 20 dB (d) 8000 dB frequencies between these two. Then, the lowest
30. A wave is incident on fixed target as resonant frequency for this string is
 x (a) 10.5 Hz (b) 105 Hz
= y 5sin 2π  t −  , the equation of reflected wave (c) 1.05 Hz (d) 1050 Hz
 2
35. Two stretched strings of same material are vibrating
through rigid target
under the same tension in fundamental mode. The ratio
 x  x
(a) y = –5 sin 2π  t +  (b) y = +5 sin 2π  t +  of their frequencies is 1 : 2 and ratio of the length of
 2  2 the vibrating segments is 1 : 4. Then the ratio of the
 x  x radii of the strings is :
(c) y = +5 sin 2π  t −  (d) y = –5 sin 2π  t − 
 2   2 (a) 2 : 1 (b) 4 : 1
31. Two loudspeakers A and B, 1.0 m apart, produce sound (c) 3 : 2 (d) 8 : 1
waves of the same wavelength and in the same phase. 36. A string of length 1 m has the mass per unit length
–1
A sensitive sound detector, moving along PQ, parallel 0.1 g cm . What would be the fundamental frequency
to line AB, 2.4 m away, detects maximum sound at P of vibrating of this string under tension of 400 N?
(on the perpendicular bisector of AB) and another (a) 400 Hz (b) 100 Hz
maximum sound when it first reaches Q directly (c) 50 Hz (d) 200 Hz
opposite to B, as shown in Figure. What is the 37. Four wires of identical length, diameters and of the
wavelength of sound emitted by the speakers? same material are stretched on a sonometer wire. If the
ratio of their tensions is 1 : 4 : 9 : 16, then the ratio of
their fundamental frequencies are :
(a) 16 : 9 : 4 : 1 (b) 4 : 3 : 2 : 1
(c) 1 : 4 : 2 : 16 (d) 1 : 2 : 3 : 4
38. The fundamental frequency of sonometer wire is
600 Hz when length of wire is short by 25%. Now
st
(a) 0.1 m (b) 0.2 m frequency of 1 overtone will be
(c) 0.3 m (d) 0.4 m (a) 800 Hz (b) 1200 Hz
32. Two waves are passing through a region in the same (c) 1600 Hz (d) 2000 Hz
direction at the same time. If the equation of these 39. The length of sonometer wire is 1.8 m. What is
waves are: wavelength of wave when number of nodes are 10
2π (a) 20 cm (b) 36 cm
=y1 a sin ( vt − x ) (c) 40 cm (d) 72 cm
λ
40. The total length of a sonometer wire between fixed
2π
=y2 b sin ( vt − x ) + x0  ends is 110 cm. Two bridges are placed to divide the
λ  length of wire in ratio 6 : 3 : 2. The tension in the wire
λ
then the amplitude of the resultant wave for x0 = , is 400 N and the mass per unit length is 0.01 kg/m.
2 What is the minimum common frequency with which
is: three parts can vibrate?
(a) | a – b | (b) (a + b)
(a) 1100 Hz (b) 100 Hz
(c) zero (d) a 2 + b2 (c) 166 Hz (d) 1000 Hz
WAVES 181
41. Figure shows a stationary wave between two fixed 49. A pipe of length 20 cm is open at both ends. Which
point P and Q. Which point(s) of 1,2 and 3 are in phase harmonic mode of the pipe is resonantly excited by a
–1
with the point X? 1700 Hz source? The speed of sound = 340 ms .
(a) First harmonic (b) Second harmonic
(c) Third harmonic (d) Fourth harmonic
(a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 1 and 2 only 50. A knife–edge divides a sonometer wire into two parts.
(c) 2 and 3 only (d) 3 only The fundamental frequencies of the two parts are f1 and
42. Particle displacements (in cm) in a standing wave are
f2. The fundamental frequency of the sonometer wire
given by y (x, t) = 2 sin (0.1 π x) cos (100 π t).
when the knife–edge is removed will be
The distance between a node and the next anti–node is
1
(a) 2.5 cm (b) 5.0 cm (a) f1 + f2 (b) ( f1 + f 2 )
2
(c) 7.5 cm (d) 10.0 cm
43. Two parts of a sonometer wire, divided by a movable f f
(c) f1 f 2 (d) 1 2
knife–edge, differ in length by 1 cm and produce 1 beat f1 + f 2
per second when sounded together. If the total length 51. A tube closed at one end containing air, produces,
of the wire is 100 cm, the frequencies of the two parts when excited, the fundamental note of frequency
of the wire are 512 Hz. If the tube is open at both ends, the
(a) 51 Hz, 50 Hz (b) 50.5 Hz, 49.5 Hz fundamental frequency that can be excited is (in Hz)
(c) 49 Hz, 48 Hz (d) 49.5 Hz, 48.5 Hz (a) 1024 (b) 512
44. An organ pipe closed at one end is excited to support (c) 256 (d) 128
the third overtone. It is found that air in the pipe has 52. An organ pipe P1, closed at one end vibrating in its first
(a) 3 nodes and 3 antinodes harmonic and another pipe P2, open at both ends
(b) 3 nodes and 4 antinodes vibrating in its third harmonic, are in resonance with a
(c) 4 nodes and 3 antinodes given tuning fork. The ratio of the lengths of P1 and P2
(d) 4 nodes and 4 antinodes
is
45. Two organ pipes A and B are closed and open
8 1
respectively. Third overtone of each are unison. The (a) (b)
ratio of their length is 3 6
(a) 8/7 (b) 7/8 1 1
(c) (d)
(c) 7/4 (d) 4/7 2 3
46. The fundamental frequency of open organ pipe is f 53. Two closed pipes produce 10 beats/s when emitting
when it filled with one–fourth length with water now their fundamental nodes. If their length are in ratio of
frequency will be 25 : 26. Then their fundamental frequency in Hz, are :
f (a) 270, 280 (b) 260, 270
(a) f (b)
3 (c) 260, 250 (d) 260, 280
2f 4f 54. When two tuning forks A and B are sounded together,
(c) (d) x beats/sec are heard. Frequency of A is n. Now, when
3 3
one prong of fork B is loaded with a little wax, the
47. Two organ pipes, each closed at one end, give 5 beats
number of beats decreases. The frequency of fork B is:
per second when emitting their fundamental notes. If
(a) n + x (b) n – x
their lengths are in the ratio of 50:51, their fundamental
(c) n + 2x (d) n – 2x
frequencies (in Hz) are
55. A tuning fork of frequency 100 when sound together
(a) 250, 255 (b) 255, 260
with another tuning fork of unknown frequency
(c) 260, 265 (d) 265, 270
produces 2 beats/s. On loading the tuning fork whose
48. Standing waves are produced by the superposition of
frequency is not known and sounded together with the
two waves y1 = 0.05 sin (3t – 2x) and
same tuning fork produces one beat, then the frequency
y2 = 0.05 sin (3t + 2x) where x and y are expressed in of the unknown tuning fork is:
metres and t is in seconds. What is the amplitude of a (a) 102 (b) 98
0
particle at x = 0.5 m. Given cos (57.3 ) = 0.54 (c) 99 (d) 101
(a) 2.7 cm (b) 5.4 cm
(c) 8.1 cm (d) 10.8 cm
WAVES 182
56. An organ pipe, open from both ends produces 5 beats/s 62. A motorcycle starts from rest and accelerates along a
2
when vibrated with a source of frequency 200 Hz in its straight line at 2.2 m/s . At the starting point of the
fundamental mode. The second harmonic of the same motorcycle, there is a stationary electric siren. How far
pipe produces 10 beats/s with a source of frequency has the motorcycle gone when the driver hears the
420 Hz. The fundamental frequency of pipe is: frequency of the siren at 90% of its value when the
(a) 195 Hz (b) 205 Hz motorcycle was at rest?
(c) 190 Hz (d) 210 Hz (Speed of sound in air = 330 ms-1)
57. A metal wire of diameter 1 mm is held on two knife (a) 123.75 m (b) 247.5 m
edges separated by a distance of 50 cm. The tension in (c) 495 m (d) 990 m
the wire is 100 N. The wire vibrating with its 63. A whistle emitting a sound of frequency 440 Hz is tied
fundamental frequency and a vibrating tuning fork to a string of 1.5 m length and rotated with an angular
together produce 5 beats per second. The tension in the velocity of 20 rad/s in the horizontal plane. Then the
wire is then reduced to 81 N. When the two are excited, range of frequencies heard by an observer stationed at
beats are heard at the same rate. What is the frequency a large distance from the whistle will be (Speed of
of the fork? sound v = 330 m/s)
(a) 90 Hz (b) 95 Hz (a) 400.0 Hz to 484.0 Hz (b) 403.3 Hz to 480.0 Hz
(c) 100 Hz (d) 105 Hz (c) 400.0 Hz to 480.0 Hz (d) 403.3 Hz to 484.0 Hz
58. A closed organ pipe and an open organ pipe of same 64. A car sounding its horn at 480 Hz moves towards a
length produce 2 beats when they are set into vibrations high wall at a speed of 20 m/s. If the speed of sound is
simultaneously in their fundamental mode. The length –1
340 m/s , the frequency of the reflected sound heard
of open organ pipe is now halved and of closed organ by the man sitting in the car will be nearest to
pipe is doubled. The number of beats produced will be: (a) 480 Hz (b) 510 Hz
(a) 8 (b) 7 (c) 540 Hz (d) 570 Hz
(c) 4 (d) 2
59. A train standing at a certain distance from a railway Objective Questions II
platform is blowing a whistle of frequency 500 Hz. If [One or more than one correct option]
the speed of sound is 340 ms-1, the frequency and 65. A bat flying above a lake emits ultrasonic sound of
wavelength of the sound of the whistle heard by a man 100 kHz. When this wave falls on the water surface, it
running towards the engine with a speed of 10 ms-1 is partly reflected and partly transmitted. The speed of
respectively are –1
sound in air is 340 ms and in water 1450m/s, Then:
(a) 500 Hz, 0.7 m (b) 500 Hz, 0.68 m (a) wavelength of sound in air is 6.8 mm
(c) 486 Hz, 0.7 m (d) 515 Hz, 0.68 m (b) wavelength of sound in air is 3.4 mm
60. In the above question a wind starts blowing in the (c) wavelength of sound in water is 14.5 mm
direction from the engine to the platform with a speed (d) wavelength of sound in water is 1.45 mm
of 10 ms-1. The frequency and wavelength of the sound π
of the whistle heard by a man standing at the platform 66. When two sound waves with a phase difference of,
2
will be
and each having amplitude A and frequency ω, are
(a) 500 Hz, 0.68 m (b) 500 Hz, 0.7m
superimposed on each other, Then:
(c) 486 Hz, 0.7 m (d) 515 Hz, 0.68 m
A
61. A train blowing its whistle moves with a constant (a) the maximum amplitude is
velocity u away from the observer on the ground. The 2
ratio of the actual frequency of the whistle to that (b) frequency of resultant wave is ω
measured by the observer is found to be 1.2. If the train (c) the maximum amplitude is 2A
is at rest and the observer moves away from it at the
ω
same velocity, the ratio would be given by (d) frequency of resultant wave is
(a) 0.51 (b) 1.25 2
(c) 1.52 (d) 2.05
WAVES 183
67. The length of a sonometer wire AB is 110 cm. Where 72. A wave moves at a constant speed along a stretched
should the two bridges be placed from A, to divide the string. Mark the incorrect statement out of the
wire in 3 segments whose fundamental frequencies are following:
in the ratio of 1 : 2 : 3? (a) Particle speed is constant and equal to the wave
(a) 30 cm (b) 60 cm speed.
(c) 90 cm (d) 80 cm (b) Particle speed is independent of amplitude of the
68. A tuning fork of frequency 340 Hz is sounded above a periodic motion of the source.
cylindrical tube 1 m high. Water is slowly poured into (c) Particle speed is independent of frequency of
–1
the tube. If the speed of sound is 340 ms , at what periodic motion of the source.
levels of water in the tube will the sound of the fork be (d) Particle speed is dependent on tension and linear
appreciably intensified? mass density the string.
(a) 25 cm (b) 75cm 73. An observer A is moving directly towards a stationary
(c) 20cm (d) 100cm sound source while another observer B is moving away
69. Two whistles A and B have frequencies 660 Hz and from the source with the same velocity. Which of the
590 Hz respectively. An observer is standing in the following statements are correct?
middle of line joining the two sources. Source B and (a) Average of frequencies recorded by A and B is
observer are moving towards right with velocity 30 m/s equal to natural frequency of the source.
and A is standing to the left side. If the velocity of (b) Wavelength of wave received by A is less than that
sound in air is 300 m/s. Then: of waves received by B.
(a) beat frequency is 6Hz (c) Wavelength of waves received by two observers
(b) beat frequency is 4Hz will be same.
(c) apparent wavelength for B is 0.45 (d) Both the observers will observe the wave travelling
(d) apparent wavelength for B is 45m with same speed.
70. A wave equation which gives the displacement along
Numerical Value Type Questions
Y-direction is given by
=y 10−4 [sin (60t + 20 x)] 74. A string has a mass 10 g and a length L = 3 m. Its two
ends are tied to two walls at a distance D = 2 m apart.
where x and y are in metres and t is time in seconds.
Two blocks of mass M = 2 kg each are suspended from
This represents a wave
the string as shown in figure. In what time in
(a) travelling with a velocity of 30 m/s in the negative
milliseconds will a wave pulse sent from a point A,
x-direction
reach point B?
(b) of wavelength π metres
3g
(c) of frequency 30/π Hertz (given: = 3)
–4
(d) of amplitude 10 m travelling along the negative x- 2 2
D
direction.
71. For a transverse wave on a string, the string L/4 L/4
displacement is described by L/2
y = (x, t) = f(x – at) A B
where f represents a function and a is a negative
constant. Then which of the following is/are correct
statement(s)? M M
(a) Shape of the string at time t = 0 is given by f(x)
(b) The shape of wave form does not change as it
moves along the string
(c) Wave form moves in +ve x-direction
(d) The speed of waveform is a
WAVES 184
75. Two narrow cylindrical pipes A and B have the same 83. A tuning fork of frequency 480 Hz produces 10 beat/s,
length. Pipe A is open at both ends and is filled with a when sounded with a vibrating sonometer string. What
monoatomic gas of molar mass MA. Pipe B is open at must be frequency (in Hz) of the string, if a slight
one end and closed at the other end, and is filled with increase in tension produces more beats per sec, then
a diatomic gas of molar mass MB. Both gases are at the before?
same temperature. If the frequency of the second
harmonic of the fundamental mode in pipe A is equal Assertion & Reason
to the frequency of the third harmonic of the
(A) If both Assertion and Reason are true and reason
MA is the correct explanation of the assertion.
fundamental mode in pipe B, if the value of is
MB (B) If both Assertion and Reason are true but reason
100n is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
, find the value of n. (C) If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
63 (D) If both Assertion and Reason are false.
76. A “pop” gun consists of a tube 25 cm long closed at
one end by a cork and at the other end by a tightly fitted 84. Assertion: Both transverse and longitudinal
mechanical waves can propagate in solids but only
piston. The piston is pushed slowly in. When the
longitudinal mechanical waves can propagate in gases.
pressure rises to one and half times the atmospheric Reason: Gases cannot withstand a shearing stress;
pressure, the cork is violently blown out. Calculate the hence they have only bulk modulus. Choose the correct
frequency of the “pop” caused by its ejection. statement from the following.
(v = 340 m/s) (a) A (b) B
77. A weight is attached to the free end of a sonometer (c) C (d) D
wire. It gives resonance at a length 40 cm when it is in 85. Assertion: Compression and rarefaction involve
resonance with a tuning fork of frequency 512 Hz. The changes in density and pressure.
weight is then immersed wholly in water, the resonant Reason: When particles are compressed, density of
length is reduced to 30 cm. The relative density in medium increases and when they are rarefied, density
16 of medium decreases.
which weight suspended is , find the value of n
n (a) A (b) B
78. Two tuning forks A and B produce 10 beats per second (c) C (d) D
when sounded together. On slightly loading fork A 86. Assertion: The phase difference between two medium
with a little wax, it was observed that 15 beats are particles having a path difference λ is 2 π .
heard per second. If the frequency of fork B is 480 Hz, Reason: The phase difference is directly proportional
what is the frequency (in Hz) of fork A before it was to path difference of a particle.
loaded? (a) A (b) B
79. Nine tuning forks are arranged in order of increasing (c) C (d) D
frequency. Each tuning fork produces 4 beats per 87. Assertion: Sound would travel faster on a hot summer
day than on a cold winter day.
second when sounded with either of its neighbours. If
Reason: Velocity of sound is directly proportional to
the frequency of the 9th tuning fork is twice that of the the square of its absolute temperature.
first, what is the frequency (in Hz) of the first tuning (a) A (b) B
fork? (c) C (d) D
80. A tuning fork produces 4 beats per second when 88. Assertion: Where two vibrating tuning forks having
sounded with a sonometer of vibrating length 48 cm. It frequencies 256 Hz and 512 Hz are held near each
produces 4 beats per second also when the vibrating other, beats cannot be heard.
length is 50 cm. What is the frequency (in Hz) of the Reason: The principle of superposition is valid only if
tuning fork? the frequencies of the oscillators are nearly equal.
81. λ1 = 100 cm, λ2 = 99 cm and velocity of sound (a) A (b) B
= 396 m/s. The number of beats (in Hz) is: (c) C (d) D
82. Following two wave trains are approaching each
other:
y1 = a sin 2000 πt
y2 = a sin 2008 πt
The number of beats (in Hz) heard per second is:
WAVES 185
Match the Following 94. What is the velocity of this particle at this instant?
Each question has two columns. Four options are given
(a) 10 2 π cm / s (b) 40 2 π cm /s
representing matching of elements from Column-I and
Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds to (c) 30 2 π cm / s (d) 20 2 π cm / s
a correct matching. For each question, choose the option
corresponding to the correct matching. Use the following passage, solve Q. 95 to Q. 97
89. Match the column Passage – 2
Column–I Column–II A train approaching a hill at a speed of 40 km/hr sounds a
(a) Wave in solids (p) Transverse only whistle of frequency 580 Hz when it is at a distance of 1 km
(b) Electromagnetic (q) Can be transverse from the hill. A wind with a speed of 40 km/hr is blowing in
waves or longitudinal the direction of motion of train.
(c) Longitudinal (r) Require a medium Velocity of sound = 1200 km/hr.
waves to propagate 95. Find the frequency of the whistle as heard by an
(d) Pressure waves (s) Elastic parameters observer on the hill
dependent (a) 599.33 Hz (b) 590.33 Hz
90. Match the column: (c) 582.30 Hz (d) 370.22 Hz
For the travelling wave 96. What is the distance from the hill at which the echo
y = 0.02 sin 2π (10t – 5x), (all in SI units) from the hill is heard by the driver?
Column–I Column–II 15 20
(a) Speed of wave (p) 10 (a) km (b) km
16 31
(b) Frequency of (q) 0.4 π
17 29
wave (c) km (d) km
(c) Wavelength of (r) 2 18 30
wave 97. What is the frequency heard by the driver?
(a) 620 Hz (b) 630 Hz
(d) Maximum particle (s) 0.2
(c) 650 Hz (d) 640 Hz
speed
Use the following passage, solve Q. 98 to Q. 100
Paragraph Type Questions Passage – 3
Use the following passage, solve Q. 91 to Q. 94 RADAR is the acronym of radio detection and ranging.
Passage – 1
A radar detects an enemy aircraft by the use of radio-waves
A long string having a cross-sectional area 0.80 mm2 and which are received after reflection. In analogy with plane
density 12.5 g/cm3 is subjected to a tension of 64 N along the mirror reflection, one can take the reflected wave to be
x-axis. One end (at x = 0) of this string is attached to a vibrator coming from a virtual source. If the reflector is moving with
moving in transverse direction at a frequency of 20 Hz. a speed u, the speed of source relative the receiver can be 2u.
At, t = 0, the source is at a maximum displacement y = 1.0cm. Even when this kind of motion exist with the source and to
91. Find the speed of the wave travelling on the string. the receiver, Doppler’s effect can be applied. According to
(a) 20 m/s (b) 10 m/s Doppler’s effect as a source and an observer are approaching
(c) 80 m/s (d) 40 m/s each other, the apparent frequency f’, of a signal of frequency
92. Write the equation for the wave. f is,
(a) y = (1.0 cm) cos [(40 πs ) t – {(π/2m ) x}]
–1 –1
 v + v0 
(b) y = (1.0 cm) cos [(40 πs ) t + {(π/2m ) x}]
–1 –1 f '= f  
 v − vs 
(c) y = (1.0 cm) cos [(40 πs ) t – {(π/4m ) x}]
–1 –1
Using the elaborated idea solve the following questions:
(d) y = (1.0 cm) cos [(40 πs )t + {(π/4m )x}]
–1 –1
98. If an aircraft is approaching a given radar with a speed
93. What is the displacement of the particle of the string at u, the apparent frequency of f, received by the radar
x = 50 cm at time t = 0.05 s? will be [v – velocity of electromagnetic wave]
(a)
1
cm (b) 2cm  v   v 
(a) f   (b) f  
2  v −u   v −u 
3 2  v   v 
(c) cm (d) cm (c) f   (d) f  
2 3 v+u   v − 2u 
WAVES 186
99. The apparent decrease in frequency, if the air-craft

moves away is
2u u
(a) f (b) f
v v
u 2uf
(c) f (d)
2v v + 2u
100. In a detective system, the apparent frequency found
with the source moving with a speed u = 0.8v is f1 and
the source being at rest and the RADAR moving with
u = 0.9v is f2, then
(a) f1 = f2 (b) f1 > f2
8
(c) f1 < f2 (d) f 2 = f1
9
WAVES 187
EXERCISE – 4: PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. A sonometer wire resonates with a given tuning fork 5. A closed organ pipe of length L and an open organ pipe
forming standing waves with five antinodes between contain gases of densities ρ1 and ρ2 respectively. The
the two bridges when a mass of 9 kg is suspended from compressibility of gases are equal in both the pipes.
the wire. When this mass is replaced by mass M. The Both the pipes are vibrating in their first overtone with
wire resonates with the same tuning fork forming three same frequency. The length of the open organ pipe is
antinodes for the same positions of the bridges. The [2004]
value of M is: [2002] L 4L
(a) 25 kg (b) 5 kg (a) (b)
3 3
(c) 12.5 kg (d) 1/25 kg
2. In the experiment for the determination of the speed of 4 L ρ1 4 L ρ2
(c) (d)
sound in air using the resonance column method, the 3 ρ2 3 ρ1
length of the air column that resonates in the 6. An open pipe is in resonance in 2nd harmonic with
fundamental mode, with a tuning fork is 0.1 m. When frequency f1. Now one end of the tube is closed and
this length is changed to 0.35 m, the same tuning fork frequency is increased to f2 such that the resonance
resonates with the first overtone. Calculate the end
again occurs in nth harmonic. Choose the correct
correction. [2003]
option. [2005]
(a) 0.012 m (b) 0.025 m
3 5
(c) 0.05 m (d) 0.024 m =
(a) n 3,= f2 f1 =
(b) n 3,= f2 f1
3. A police car moving at 22 m/s chases a motorcyclist. 4 4
The police man sounds his horn at 176 Hz, while both 5 3
=
(c) n 5,= f2 f1 =
(d) n 5,= f2 f1
of them move towards a stationary siren of frequency 4 4
165 Hz. Calculate the speed of the motorcycle. If it is 7. A tuning fork of 512 Hz is used to produce resonance
given that the motorcyclist does not observe any beats in a resonance tube experiment. The level of water at
(speed of sound = 330 m/s) [2004] first resonance is 30.7 cm and at second resonance is
63.2 cm. The error in calculating velocity of sound is:
[2005]
(a) 204.1 cm/s (b) 110 cm/s
(c) 58 cm/s (d) 280 cm/s
8. A massless rod BD is suspended by two identical
massless strings AB and CD of equal lengths. A block
(a) 33 m/s (b) 22 m/s of mass m is suspended from point P such that BP is
(c) zero (d) 11 m/s equal to x. If the fundamental frequency of the left wire
4. A source of sound of frequency 600 Hz is placed inside is twice the fundamental frequency of right wire, then
water. The speed of sound in water is 1500 m/s and in the value of x is: [2006]
air it is 300 m/s. The frequency of sound recorded by
an observer who is standing in air is [2004]
(a) 200 Hz (b) 3000 Hz
(c) 120 Hz (d) 600 Hz
(a) l/5 (b) l/4

(c) 4l/5 (d) 3l/4
WAVES 188
Paragraph Type Questions 13. The distribution of the sound intensity of the whistle as
Use the following passage, solve Q. 9 to Q. 11 observed by the passengers in train A is best
Passage - 1 represented by [2007]
Two plane harmonic sound waves are expressed by the (a)
equations.
y1 (x, t) = A cos (0.5 πx – 100 πt)
y2 (x, t) = A cos (0.46 πx – 92 πt)
(All parameters are in MKS)
9. How many times does an observer hear maximum
intensity in one second? [2006]
(a) 4 (b) 10 f1 f2 Frequency
(c) 6 (d) 8 (b)
10. What is the speed of the sound? [2006]
(a) 200 m/s (b) 180 m/s
(c) 192 m/s (d) 96 m/s
11. At x = 0 how many times the amplitude of y1 + y2 is
zero in one second? [2006]
(a) 192 (b) 48 f1 f2 Frequency
(c) 100 (d) 96
(c)
Paragraph Type Questions
Use the following passage, solve Q. 12 to Q. 14
Passage - 2
Two trains A and B are moving with speeds 20 m/s and
30 m/s respectively in the same direction on the same straight
track, with B ahead of A. The engines are at the front ends.
f1 f2 Frequency
The engine of train A blows a long whistle.
(d)
f1 f2 Frequency
f1 f2 Frequency
Assume that the sound of the whistle is composed of
components varying in frequency from f1 = 800 Hz to 14. The spread of frequency as observed by the passengers
f2 = 1120 Hz, as shown in the figure. The spread in the in train B is [2007]
(a) 310 Hz (b) 330 Hz
frequency (highest frequency–lowest frequency) is thus
(c) 350 Hz (d) 290 Hz
320 Hz. The speed of sound in air is 340 m/s.
12. The speed of sound of the whistle is [2007]
(a) 340 m/s for passengers in A and 310 m/s for
passengers in B
(b) 360 m/s for passengers in A and 310 m/s for
passengers in B
(c) 310 m/s for passengers in A and 360 m/s for
passengers in B
(d) 340 m/s for passengers in both the trains
WAVES 189
15. A transverse sinusoidal wave moves along a string in 18. A 20 cm long string, having a mass of 1.0 g, is fixed at
the positive x–direction at a speed of 10 cm/s. The both the ends. The tension in the string is 0.5 N. The
wavelength of the wave is 0.5 m and its amplitude is string is set into vibration using an external vibrator of
10 cm. At a particular time t, the snap-shot of the wave frequency 100 Hz. Find the separation (in cm) between
is shown in figure. The velocity of point P when its the successive nodes on the string. [2009]
displacement is 5 cm is: [2008] 19. A stationary source is emitting sound at a fixed
frequency f0, which is reflected by two cars
approaching the source. The difference between the
frequencies of sound reflected from the cars is 1.2% of
f0. What is the difference in the speeds of the cars (in
km per hour) to the nearest integer? The cars are
moving at constant speeds much smaller than the speed
–1
of sound which is 330 ms . [2009]
3π ˆ 3π ˆ 20. When two progressive waves y1 = 4 sin (2x – 6t) and
(a) jm/ s (b) − jm/ s
50 50  π
y2 = 3 sin  2 x − 6t −  are superimposed, the
3π ˆ 3π ˆ  2
(c) i m/s (d) − i m/s
50 50 amplitude of the resultant wave is [2010]
16. A vibrating string of certain length l under a tension T 21. A hollow pipe of length 0.8 m is closed at one end. At
resonates with a mode corresponding to the first its open end a 0.5 m long uniform string is vibrating in
overtone (third harmonic) of an air column of length its second harmonic and it resonates with the
75 cm inside a tube closed at one end. The string also fundamental frequency of the pipe. If the tension in the
–1
generates 4 beats/s when excited along with a tuning wire is 50 N and the speed of sound is 320 ms , the
fork of frequency n. Now when the tension of the string mass of the string is: [2010]
is slightly increased the number of beats reduces to (a) 5 g (b) 10 g
2 per second. Assuming the velocity of sound in air to (c) 20 g (d) 40
be 340 m/s, the frequency n of the tuning fork in Hz is: 22. A police car with a siren of frequency 8 kHz is moving
[2008] with uniform velocity 36 km/h towards a tall building
(a) 344 (b) 336 which reflects the sound waves. The speed of sound in
(c) 117.3 (d) 109.3 air is 320 m/s. The frequency of the siren heard by the
17. A student performed the experiment to measure the car driver is [2011]
speed of sound in air using resonance air-column (a) 8.50 kHz (b) 8.25 kHz
method. Two resonances in the air-column were (c) 7.75 kHz (d) 7.50 kHz
obtained by lowering the water level. The resonance
with the shorter air-column is the first resonance and
that with the longer air column is the second resonance.
Then, [2009]
(e) the intensity of the sound heard at the first
resonance was more than that at the second
resonance
(f) the prongs of the tuning fork were kept in a
horizontal plane above the resonance tube
(g) the amplitude of vibration of the ends of the prongs
is typically around 1 cm
(h) the length of the air–column at the first resonance
was somewhat shorter than l/4th of the wavelength
of the sound in air
WAVES 190
23. Column-I show four systems, each of the same length 26. A student is performing an experiment using a
L, for producing standing waves. The lowest possible resonance column and a tuning fork of frequency
natural frequency of a system is called its fundamental 244 s-1. He is told that the air in the tube has been
frequency, whose wavelength is denoted as λf Match replaced by another gas (assume that the column
each system with statements given in Column-II remains filled with the gas). If the minimum height at
describing the nature and wavelength of the standing which resonance occurs is (0.350 ± 0.005) m, the gas
waves. [2011] in the tube is
Column-I Column-II (Useful information: 167 RT = 640 J 1/ 2 mole −1/ 2 ;
(A) Pipe closed at one end (p) Longitudinal 140 RT = 590 J 1/ 2 mole −1/ 2 . The molar masses M in
waves grams are given in the options. Take the values of
10
O L for each gas as given there.) [2014]
M
(B) Pipe open at both ends (q) Transverse
10 7
waves (a) Neon (M = 20, = )
20 10
10 3
O L (b) Nitrogen (M = 28, = )
(C) Stretched wire (r) λf = L 28 5
clamped at both ends 10 9
(c) Oxygen (M = 32, = )
32 16
O L 10 17
(d) Argon (M = 36, = )
(D) Stretched wire (s) λf = 2L 36 32
clamped at both ends 27. One end of a taut string of length 3m along the x axis
and at mid-point is fixed at x = 0. The speed of the waves in the string
is 100 ms-1. The other end of the string is vibrating in
the y direction so that stationary waves are set up in the
O L
string. The possible waveform (s) of these stationary
L/2
waves is (are) [2014]
(t) λf = 4L
πx 50π t
24. A student is performing the experiment of resonance (a) y (t) = A sin cos
6 3
column. The diameter of the column tube is 4 cm. The
πx 100π t
frequency of the tuning fork is 512 Hz. The air (b) y (t) = A sin cos
temperature is 38°C in which the speed of sound is 3 3
336 m/s. The zero of the meter scale coincides with the 5π x 250π t
(c) y (t) = A sin cos
top end of the resonance column tube. When the first 6 3
resonance occurs, the reading of the water level in the 5π x
(d) y (t) = A sin cos 250π t
column is [2012] 2
(a) 14.0 cm (b) 15.2 cm 28. A container of fixed volume has a mixture of one mole
(c) 16.4 cm (d) 17.6 cm of hydrogen and one mole of helium in equilibrium at
25. A person blows into open-end of a long pipe. As a temperature T. Assuming the gases are ideal, the
result, a high-pressure pulse of air travels down the correct statement (s) is (are) [2015]
pipe. When this pulse reaches the other end of the pipe, (a) The average energy per mole of the gas mixture is
[2012] 2RT
(a) a high-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, (b) The ratio of speed of sound in the gas mixture to
if the other end of the pipe is open. that in helium gas is 6 / 5
(b) a low-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, if (c) The ratio of the rms speed of helium atoms to that
the other end of the pipe is open 1
(c) a low-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, if of hydrogen molecules is
2
the other end of the pipe is closed (d) The ratio of the rms speed of helium atoms to that
(d) a high-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, 1
if the other end of the pipe is closed. of hydrogen molecules is
2
WAVES 191
29. Four harmonic waves of equal frequencies and equal 32. A train S1, moving with a uniform velocity of 108
π 2π km/h, approaches another train S2 standing on a
intensities I0 have phases angles 0, and π .
3 3 platform. An observer O moves with a uniform
When they are superposed, the intensity of the velocity of 36 km/h towards S2, as shown in figure.
resulting wave is nI0 .The value of n is. [2015] Both the trains are blowing whistles of same frequency
120 Hz. When O is 600 m away from S2 and distance
30. Two loudspeakers M and N are located 20 m apart and
between S1 and S2 is 800 m, the number of beats heard
emit sound at frequencies 118 Hz and 121 Hz,
by O is ……… (Speed of the sound = 330) [2019]
respectively. A car is initially at a point P, 1800 m
away from the midpoint Q of the line MN and moves
towards Q constantly at 60 km/hr along the
perpendicular bisector of MN. It crosses Q and
eventually reaches a point R, 1800 m away from Q. Let
v(t) represent the beat frequency measured by a person
sitting in the car at time t. Let fP, fQ and fR be the beat
frequencies measured at locations P, Q and R,
respectively. The speed of sound in air is 330 ms-1.
33. A musical instrument is made using four different
Which of the following statement(s) is(are) true
metal strings 1, 2, 3 and 4 with mass per unit length
regarding the sound heard by the person? [2016]
µ , 2 µ ,3µ and 4 µ respectively. The instrument is
(a) The plot below represents schematically the
variation of beat frequency with time played by vibrating the strings by varying the free
length in between the range L0 and 2L0. It is found that
in string 1( µ ) at free length L0 and tension T0 the
fundamental mode frequency is f0. [2019]
List-I List-II
(I) String-1 ( µ ) (P) 1
(b) The plot below represents schematically the (II) String-2 (2 µ ) (Q) 1
variation of beat frequency with time 2
(III) String-3 (2 µ ) (R) 1
2
(IV) String-4 (4 µ ) (S) 1
3
(T) 3
16
(c) The rate of change in beat frequency is maximum (U) 1
when the car passes through Q
16
(d) fP + fR = 2 fQ
31. Two men are walking along a horizontal straight line The length of the strings 1, 2, 3 and 4 are kept fixed at
in the same direction. The man in front walks at a speed 3L 5 L 7L
L0, 0 , 0 and 0 , respectively. Strings 1, 2, 3 and
1.0 ms-1 and the man behind walks at a speed 2.0 ms-1. 2 4 4
A third man is standing at a height 12 m above the 4 are vibrated at their 1st, 3rd, 5th and 14th harmonics,
same horizontal line such that all three men are in a respectively such that all the strings have same
vertical plane. The two walking men are blowing frequency. The correct match for the tension in the four
identical whistles which emit a sound of frequency strings in the units of T0 will be:
1430 Hz. The speed of sound in air is 330 ms-1. At the (a) I → P, II → R, III → T, IV → U
instant, when the moving men are 10 m apart, the (b) I → P, II → Q, III → R, IV → T
stationary man is equidistant from them. The
(c) I → P, II → Q, III → T, IV → U
frequency of beats in Hz, heard by the stationary man
at this instant, is ……… [2018] (d) I → T, II → Q, III → R, IV → U
WAVES 192
34. A stationary tuning fork is in resonance with an air 35. A source, approaching with speed u towards the open
column in a pipe. If the tuning fork is moved with a end of a stationary pipe of length L, is emitting a sound
speed of 2 ms-1 in front of the open end of the pipe and of frequency f s . The farther end of the pipe is closed.
parallel to it, the length of the pipe should be changed The speed of sound in air is v and f 0 is the fundamental
for the resonance to occur with the moving tuning fork.
frequency of the pipe. For which of the following
If the speed of sound in air is 320 ms-1, the smallest
combination(s) of u and f s will the sound reaching the
value of the percentage change required in the length
of the pipe is ………… [2020] pipe lead to a resonance? [2021]
(a) u=0.8 v and f s = f 0
(b) u=0.8 v and f s = 2 f 0
(c) u=0.8 v and f s = 0.5 f 0
(d) u=0.5 v and f s = 1.5 f 0
WAVES
ANSWER KEY 193
Answer Key
CHAPTER -10 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS
EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (a) 1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (c)

5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (c) 5. (a) 6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (a)
9. (a) 10. (b) 11. (c) 12. (d) 9. (c) 10. (c) 11. (c) 12. (b)
13. (a) 14. (1.00) 15. (100.00) 13. (a) 14. (d) 15. (c) 16. (d)
16. (160.00) 17. (1.00) 18. (0.50) 17. (a) 18. (d) 19. (2.00)
19. (9.00) 20. (9.00) 21. (5.00) 22. (b) 20. (32.00)
23. (b) 24. (d) 25. (c) 26. (c)
27. (a) 28. (c) 29. (a) 30. (8.00)
31. (0.32) 32. (0.10) 33. (d) 34. (a)
35. (b) 36. (d) 37. (c) 38. (b)
39. (a) 40. (d) 41. (5.00) 42. (6.00)
43. (20.00) 44. (d) 45. (c) 46. (d)
47. (c) 48. (d) 49. (b) 50. (8.76)
51. (5.00) 52. (1.25) 53. (2)
54. (34.64)55. (0.10)
ANSWER KEY 194
CHAPTER -10 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS

EXERCISE - 3: EXERCISE - 4:
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION

1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (c) 4. (c) 1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (a,b) 4. (2.00)
5. (a) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (a) 5. (2.4)
9. (c) 10. (b) 11. (c) 12. (a,d)

13. (a, d) 14. (a,d) 15. (a,b,d) 16. (a,b,c)
17. (a,c,d) 18. 2 19. 32.00 20. (a)
21. (a)
22. (A  Q,S);(B  P, R);(C  P, Q, R,S);(D  P, Q, R,S)
23. (d) 24. (a,c) 25. (b)

ANSWER KEY 195
Answer Key
CHAPTER -11 FLUID MECHANICS
EXERCISE - 1 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (d) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (a) 81. (d) 82. (b) 83. (a) 84. (b)
5. (a) 6. (c) 7. (6.00) 8. (b) 85. (b) 86. (a) 87. (a) 88. (c)
89. (d) 90. (a) 91. (a) 92. (c)
9. (b) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (a)
93. (c) 94. (c) 95. (b) 96. (b)
13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (b) 16. (a)
97. (a) 98. (d) 99. (b) 100. (b)
17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (a)
101. (b) 102. (d) 103. (d) 104. (d)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (c) 24. (d)
25. (a) 26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (c) 105. (d)
29. (a) 30. (a) 31. (c) 32. (a)

33. (b) 34. (d) 35. (c) 36. (d)
37. (a) 38. (c) 39. (c) 40. (d)
41. (c) 42. (d) 43. (b) 44. (c)
45. (d) 46. (c) 47. (b) 48. (c)
49. (c) 50. (b) 51. (d) 52. (b)
53. (c) 54. (b) 55. (b) 56. (b)
57. (d) 58. (a) 59. (c) 60. (a)
61. (a) 62. (a) 63. (a) 64. (b)
65. (10.00) 66. (b) 67. (d) 68. (c)
69. (c) 70. (d) 71. (c) 72. (c)
73. (b) 74. (b) 75. (c) 76. (c)
77. (0.10) 78. (c) 79. (c) 80. (a)
ANSWER KEY 196
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION

1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (a)

1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (a) 4. (b)
5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (b)
5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (c) 8. (b)
9. (b) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (c)
9. (a) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (b)
13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (d) 16. (c)
13. (5.00) 14. (a) 15. (c) 16. (c)
17. (c) 18. (b) 19. (a) 20. (d)
17. (c) 18. (d) 19. (101.00) 20. (d)
21. (d) 22. (a) 23. (c) 24. (b)
21. (b) 22. (a) 23. (b) 24. (b)
25. (b) 26. (a) 27. (b) 28. (d)
25. (a) 26. (a) 27. (c) 28. (a)
29. (b) 30. (d) 31. (d) 32. (a)
29. (d) 30. (c) 31. (c) 32. (b)
33. (b) 34. (a) 35. (a) 36. (d)
33. (a) 34. (25600.00) 35. (3.00)
37. (c) 38. (d) 39. (c) 40. (d)
41. (b) 42. (a) 43. (b) 44. (c)
45. (c) 46. (a) 47. (c) 48. (a)
49. (b) 50. (a,d) 51. (a) 52. (a,b,d)
53. (b,c) 54. (a,c,d) 55. (a,b,c,d) 56. (b,c)
57. (b,d) 58. (a,b,c) 59. (a,b,c) 60. (a)
61. (b) 62. (b) 63. (a,b) 64. (b,d)
65. (a,c) 66. (c) 67. (50) 68. (25)
69. (100.4) 70. (b) 71. (c) 72. (a)
73. (d) 74. (d)
75. (AR); (B  Q);(C  P);(D  S)
ANSWER KEY 197

EXERCISE - 4:
PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (d) 2. (d)
3. ((a) zero (b) 0.25 cm (c) g/6)
 dR 5 
4. (a) 5. (ga/2y) 6. (2m) 7.  r 
 dt 
  2 L2 
8.  H   9. (a) 10. (c)
 2g 
5
11. (a) 12. (a) 13. (1.01 × 10 Pa)
14. (b) 15. (6.00) 16. (6.00) 17. (c)
18. (a) 19. (b) 20. (d) 21. (c)
22. (c) 23. (a) 24. (b,c) 25. (a,d)
26. (3.00) 27. (a,c) 28. (a),(c),(d) 29. (a,d)
30. (15.00) 31. (9.00) 32. (004.00) 33. (a, c)
34. (0.30) 35. (10.00)
ANSWER KEY 198
Answer Key
CHAPTER - 12 SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (d) 1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (c)

5. (d) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (d) 5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (d) 8. (a)
9. (d) 10. (a) 11. (b) 12. (a) 9. (d) 10. (b) 11. (d) 12. (c)
13. (d) 14. (0.625) 15. (a) 16. (b) 13. (a) 14. (a) 15. (c) 16. (c)
17. (d) 18. (a) 19. (b) 20. (a) 17. (c) 18. (c) 19. (c) 20. (d)
21. (c) 22. (10) 23. (b) 24. (c) 21. (d) 22. (a) 23. (a) 24. (d)
25. (a) 26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (a) 25. (a) 26. (c) 27. (d) 28. (a)
29. (100) 30.(c) 31. (c) 32. (c) 29. (d) 30.(b) 31. (c) 32. (c)
33. (c) 34.(c) 35.(a) 36. (b) 33. (d) 34.(a) 35.(b) 36. (a)
37. (b) 38.(a) 39.(b) 40. (b) 37. (b) 38.(c) 39.(c) 40. (d)
41. (d) 42.(d) 43.(d) 44. (c) 41. (c) 42.(3.00) 43.(7.00) 44. (2.00)
45. (1.5) 46.(b) 47.(c) 48. (a) 45. (6.00)
49. (c) 50.(b) 51. (d) 52. (b)
53. (d) 54.(c) 55.(b) 56. (d)
57. (a) 58.(d) 59.(a) 60. (d)
61. (a) 62.(c) 63.(c) 64. (c)
65. (a) 66.(a) 67. (b) 68. (b)
69. (d) 70.(c) 71. (a) 72. (a)
73. (c) 74.(d) 75. (c)
ANSWER KEY 199
CHAPTER - 12 SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (a) 1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (a)

5. (d) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (d) 5. (a) 6. (0) 7. (b,d)
9. (b) 10. (d) 11. (b) 12. (a) 8. (a–p; b–q, r; c–p; d–q, s)
13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (c) 16. (c) 9. (a–p or p, s; b–q, s or q, r, s; c–s; d–q)
17. (a) 18. (d) 19. (c) 20. (a) 10. (d) 11. (c) 12. (d)
21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (c) 13. (4.00) 14. (a) 15. (b) 16. (a,d)
25. (c) 26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (b) 17. (a,d) 18. (b,d) 19. (a,b,d) 20. (d)
29. (a) 30.(d) 31. (b) 32. (c)
33. (a) 34.(a) 35.(c) 36. (b)
37. (a) 38.(d) 39.(d) 40. (d)
41. (d) 42.(b) 43.(b) 44. (a)
45. (b) 46.(b) 47.(a) 48. (b)
49. (a) 50.(c) 51. (c) 52. (b)
53. (a) 54.(a) 55.(c) 56. (b)
57. (d) 58.(a) 59.(d) 60. (c)
61. (a) 62.(c) 63.(d) 64. (d)
65. (d) 66.(d) 67. (d) 68. (a,c)
69. (a,c) 70. (b,c) 71. (a,b,d)
72. (b,c,d) 73. (c) 74.(d) 75. (2.00)
76. (5.00) 77. (6.00) 78. (2.00) 79. (0.5)
80. (50) 81. (45) 82. (1.00) 83. (2)
84. (d) 85.(d) 86.(c) 87. (b)
88. (a-p; b-s; c-r; d-q) 89.(a-q; b-s; c-p; d-r)
90. (b) 91. (a) 92. (b) 93. (b)
94. (c) 95.(b) 96.(b) 97. (c)
98. (c) 99.(c) 100.(d)
ANSWER KEY 200
Answer Key
CHAPTER - 13 WAVES
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (c) 1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (c)

5. (a) 6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (a) 5. (c) 6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (a)
9. (a) 10. (d) 11. (b) 12. (d) 9. (a) 10. (b) 11. (b) 12. (a)
13. (d) 14. (c) 15. (c) 16. (b) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (b) 16. (c)
17. (c) 18. (b) 19. (d) 20. (b) 17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (502) 20. (b)
21. (c) 22. (a) 23. (b) 24. (a) 21. (a) 22. (b) 23. (a) 24. (20)
25. (180) 26. (c) 27. (d) 28. (c) 25. (12.50) 26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (a)
29. (d) 30.(a) 31. (a) 32. (a) 29. (35) 30.(a) 31. (d) 32. (b)
33. (b) 34.(d) 35.(d) 36. (120) 33. (d) 34.(a) 35.(c) 36. (a)
37. (a) 38.(d) 39.(b) 40. (a) 37. (a) 38.(106.05) 39.(d) 40. (a)
41. (b) 42.(a) 43.(a) 44. (b) 41. (d) 42.(a) 43.(c) 44. (b)
45. (b) 46.(b) 47.(d) 48. (a) 45. (d) 46.(8.00) 47.(8.00) 48. (2.00)
49. (c) 50.(b) 51. (a) 52. (b) 49. (1215) 50.(4.00)
53. (d) 54.(45) 55.(a) 56. (a)
57. (d) 58.(c) 59.(a) 60. (c)
61. (c) 62.(b) 63.(10) 64. (b)
65. (c) 66.(c) 67. (c) 68. (b)
69. (d) 70.(a) 71. (b) 72. (a)
73. (b) 74.(c) 75. (720)
ANSWER KEY 201
CHAPTER - 13 WAVES
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (d) 4. (b) 1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (d)

5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (d) 8. (a) 5. (c) 6. (c) 7. (d) 8. (a)
9. (b) 10. (c) 11. (b) 12. (b) 9. (a) 10. (a) 11. (c) 12. (b)
13. (c) 14. (d) 15. (d) 16. (b) 13. (a) 14. (a) 15. (b) 16. (a)
17. (d) 18. (c) 19. (c) 20. (d) 17. (a,d) 18. (5.00) 19. (7.00) 20. (5.00)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (c) 24. (b) 21. (b) 22. (a)
25. (c) 26. (d) 27. (a) 28. (a) 23. (A – p, t; B – p, s; C – q, s; D – q, r)
29. (a) 30.(a) 31. (b) 32. (a) 24. (b) 25. (b,d) 26. (d)
33. (d) 34.(b) 35.(d) 36. (b) 27. (a,c,d) 28. (a,b,d) 29. (3.00)
37. (d) 38.(c) 39.(c) 40. (d) 30. (a,b,c) 31. (5.00) 32. (8.13)
41. (d) 42.(b) 43.(b) 44. (d) 33. (c) 34.(0.62 to 0.63)
45. (b) 46.(d) 47.(a) 48. (b) 35. (a,d)
49. (b) 50.(d) 51. (a) 52. (b)
53. (c) 54.(a) 55.(a) 56. (b)
57. (b) 58.(b) 59.(d) 60. (b)
61. (b) 62.(b) 63.(d) 64. (c)
65. (b,c) 66.(b,c) 67. (b,c) 68. (a,b)
69. (b,c) 70. (c,d) 71. (a,b,d)
72. (a,b,c,d) 73. (a,c) 74. (50)
75. (4.00) 76. (510) 77. (7.00) 78. (470)
79. (32) 80.(196) 81. (4.00) 82. (4.00)
83. (490) 84.(a) 85.(a) 86. (b)
87. (c) 88.(c)
89. (a-q; b - p; c - r, s; d - r)
90. (a - r; b - p; c - s; d - q)
91. (c) 92. (a) 93.(a) 94. (d)
95. (a) 96.(d) 97. (a) 98. (d)
99. (a) 100.(c)
MASTER INDEX .
VOLUME 1:
Units and Measurements & Basic Mathematics
Motion in a Straight line
Motion in a Plane & Relative Motion
Laws of Motion & Friction
VOLUME 2:
Work, Energy and Power
Circular Motion
Centre of Mass, Momentum and Collision
Rotational Motion
Gravitation
VOLUME 3:
Mechanical Properties of Solids
Fluid Mechanics
Simple Harmonic Motion
Waves
VOLUME 4:
Thermal Physics
Kinetic Theory of Gases and Thermodynamics
Creating Impact at Scale
65 Million+
Monthly
Youtube Views
49 Million+ 40+ Countries

Monthly Where Students
Web + App Visitors Take Live Classes
25 Million+ 26 Million+
Monthly Active Hours of
Users Live Learning
25 43
Parents
Happy
Trust
Students
Vedantu
MILLION+ MILLION+
Our Achievers of 2021
JEE Advanced 2021
Prerak Kevin Abhinav Vedantu students ace

JEE ADV. AIR 35 JEE ADV. AIR 78 JEE ADV. AIR 156 JEE Advanced 2021
JEE MAIN AIR 243 JEE MAIN AIR 533 JEE MAIN AIR 512
Ankit Shrey
6% of IITs’ upcoming batch
will be from Vedantu
JEE ADV. AIR 172 JEE ADV. AIR 174

JEE MAIN AIR 252 JEE MAIN AIR 238
JEE Main 2021
903 students in
Top 10,000
Vaibhav Bajaj Hrishit B P Sunrit Roy K
AIR 35 AIR 113 AIR 139
78 869
students scored students scored
99.9+ PERCENTILE 99.9+ PERCENTILE
68 444
students in students in
Top AIR 1000 Top AIR 5000 Kushagra Ganesh C Iyer
Sharma
AIR 158 AIR 179
NEET (UG) 2021
AIR 23
Pavit
Online Long Term Course
Score 710 AIR 92

Anirudh
Online Crash Course
Score 705
Shivank
Online Crash Course
AIR 143 Score 700

1172 NEET
Qualifiers
CBSE Class 12 ISC Class 12 CBSE Class 10
Annmary
Aatman Upreti Shreya Roshan Aastha N Raj Gitanjali Rajulal Shreya Nigam Khushi Arora Anshika Singha
Santhosh
98.4% 98.4% 98.0% 99.8% 98.4% 99.8% 99.6% 99.4%
ICSE Class 10
M.D.Sriya Varshil J Patel Mohammad Y Devika Sajeev Sakshi Semwal Aloki Upadhyay Ishita Surana Saumya Gupta
99.4% 97.4% 97.2% 97.2% 97.2% 99.4% 99.2% 99.2%
#HereForRealAchievers

Volume 3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Volume 3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Volume 3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the key details provided about Vedantu's Extraordinary Results?

What are the key details provided about Vedantu's Extraordinary Results?

What does the document mention about the structure and contents of Tatva practice books?

What does the document mention about the structure and contents of Tatva practice books?

Academic Progress for every Student

Regular tests &

Our Extraordinary Results 2021

All India HIGHER

37.28% 37.28% 8.25%

CBSE 10 CBSE 12 JEE

We strongly believe in you and your capabilities. So believe in yourself

Typesetting Team Graphic Designers

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS

Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 18

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 23

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 28

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 31

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 35

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 193

Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 51

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 60

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 70

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 74

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 85

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 195

SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION

Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 101

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 110

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 118

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 123

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 135

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 198

Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 140

Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 160

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 167

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 173

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 178

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 187

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 200

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS

1. ELASTIC BEHAVIOUR OF SOLIDS 1.2 Important Points on Elastic Behaviour of Solids

1.4 Deforming Force and Restoring Force

 Deforming force is the external force applied to a body

2.2 Types of Stress 2.4 Types of Strain

Type of stress Stress Strain Elastic Name of State of

Type of stress Stress Strain Elastic Name of State of

3.2 Poisson’s Ratio

We know elastic energy stored per unit volume

5. STRESS-STRAIN GRAPH (d) If the stress is increased further,

 In the region BC the wire literally flows. The maximum

 The region EABC represents the plastic behaviour of

 Stress-strain curve for different materials.

Ductile material Aim

Y can be calculated as the values of L and r are known and

6. MISCELLANEOUS CASE IN ELASTICITY

and elongation d produced in this differential element is

Therefore steel is more elastic the rubber.

1. ELASTIC BEHAVIOUR OF SOLIDS 3. MODULI OF ELASTICITY

According to various types of stresses, we have 1